Emotron FDU 2.

0
AC drive

ffi
Trry
H

lnstruction manual
Engl ish

Software version 4.3X

Quick Setup Card

Emotron Variable Speed Drive FDU 2.O

Using the function keys 5. Set motor frequency [222].
.+ {t- 6. Set motor power 1223J.
iffi ttEi

lL00l t_?ggl +-- :s_o9j

7 . Set motor curre nt 1224).

+rl 8. Set motor speed 1225).

srEs
+-+
I

9. Set power factor (cos ,il 12271.

m5@
{-rlt*t
10. Select supply voltage level used [218]

ilr*+ * ll.1229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, conftrm with

I ENTER and give start command f).
@ The VSD will now measure some motor parameters.
The motor makes some beeping sounds but does not
t rH
Fig. t
:fi:.ro:.'ffi :%":,T [ :ffl;:ffi::: U'l'* ".
Example of menu nauigation wlten entering motor tinue.
uoltage
12. Use Anlnl as input for the reference value. The default
range ts 4-20 mA. If you need a 0- 10 V reference value,
+.I step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting change switch (S 1) on control board.
ffitm

13. Switch offpower supply.

Jre step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting
14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in figure
below.
.+ step to next menu on the same level
gr
x
12

{-
ils
step to previous menu on the same level 1

13
2
Reference 14
3
4-2O mA 15

+ increase value or change selection 4

5
to

17
6

decrease value or change selection 7

1B

19
I
20
I
21

Remote control 10

11
22

exampel external signals are used to control the VSD/

IJr::
A standerd A-pole motor for 400 V an external srarr button
Fig. 2 Corunecting reference signal

and a reference value will also be used.

15. Ready!
Switch on the mains 16. Switch on power supply.
C[ose the door to the VSD. Once the mains is switched on,
the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 seconds. Run the VSD
Now the installation is finished, and you can press the start
Set the Motor Data button to start the motor.
Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The
This example wifl show that the main connections are OK
motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational
and that the motor will run with the load.
data in the VSD.

Change settings using the keys on the control panel. Default toggle loop
Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started. Figure 3 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains
the necessary menus that need to be set before starting. Press
1. *
Press to display menu [200], Main Setup.
Toggle to enter menu l2ll] then use the Next k.y to enter
2. Press ;{ and then * to display menu L220), Moror the sub menus ITLZ) to l21A] and enter the parameters.
'When
Data. you press the Toggle key again, menu l22l] is dis-
played.
3. Press ;{ to display menu 1221] and set moror voltage.
4. Change the value using the + and keys. Confirm
with *.
 0-l0 v
4"20 mA

/./

Fig. 3 Default toggle hop

Overview of the main menu

[100] Preferred view. Displayed at power-up. Shows
actual values (default: speed and torque).
t200] Main Setup. Main settings to get the inverter opera-
ble e.g. motor data, autoreset and language.
Fig. 4 Connection example.
t300] Process and Application parameters. Settings more
relevant to the application such as Reference
Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, etc.
lnput configuration with the switches
t400] Shaft power monitor and process protection. The
monitor function enables the VSD to be used as a
load monitor to protect machines and processes
against mechanical overload and underload.

t500] lnputVoutputs and virtual connections. All settings

for analogue and digital inputs and outputs.

t600] Logical functions and timers. All settings for condi-

tional signals are entered here.
[700] View operation and Status. Viewing all the operatio- Fig. 5 Location of switches and connectors.
nal data like frequency, load, power, current, etc.
The switches S 1 to 54 are used to set the input configuration
[800] View Trip log. Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip
for the 4 analorue inputs Anlnl, AnInZ, AnIn3 and AnIn4
memory.
as described in table 2. See Fig. 5 for the location of the
t900] Service information and VSD data. Electronic type
switches.
label for viewing the software version and VSD
tYPe'
Table 2 Switch settings

Control connections lnput Type Switch

S1
Table 1 Description of used terminals.
Voltage U

Anlnl
Function (Default)
S1
Terminal Name Current (default) U

2 Anln 1- Process reference, default: speed S2

Voltage IU
7 Common Signal ground i*;1 - ".ii:i:

Anln2
I Digln 2 RunR; rotation right
Cu rrent (defa u lt)
S2 U

LL +24Y +24VDC Supply voltage

S3 o
L2 Common Signal ground (lf desired) Voltage IU co I

s{
O
13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed (lf desired) Anln3 rl
I

S3 r{
Current (default) U o
t4 AnOut 2 0 to max torque (lf desired) c!
cf)
t-
r{
22 Digln 8 Reset S4 o
Voltage U
O)
I

(o
Anln4 O)
cr)
S4 I

Current (default) U rl
o
m
C
o
l-
P
o
E
lrJ

Emotron AB, Mdrsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsingbor& Tel: +46 42 76 99 OO, Fax: +46 42 16 99 49
www.gmotron.com
Emotron FDU 2.O
INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISH

Sofrware versi on 4.3X

Document number: 0l-4428-01

Edition: r3
Date of release: 30-01-201 1
@ Copyright Emotron AB 2005 - 201 I
Emotron retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the
rexr, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not
be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB.
Safety lnstructions
lnstruction manual
Read this instruction manual before using the AC drive
(Freque nqr co nYerter) .
The following symbols can appear in this manual. Always
read these first before continuing:
NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoid
problems.
CAUTION!
Failure to fullovrr these instructions can result in
malfunction or damage to the AC drive.
WARNING!
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO THE
USER IN ADDITION TO SERIOUS DAMAGE TO
THE AC DRIVE.
HOT SURFACE!
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in iniury to the user.
Handling the AC drive
Installation, commissioning, demounting, taking
measurements, etc, of or on the AC drive may only be
carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task.
The installation must be carried out in accordance with local
standards.
Opening the AC drive
WARNING!
Always switch off the mains voltage before
opening the AC drive and wait at least
Tminutes to allow the buffer capacitors to
discharge.
Always take adequate precautions before opening the AC
drive. Although the connections for the control signals and
the switches are isolated from the main voltage, do not
touch the control board when the AC drive is switched on.
Precautions to be taken with a
connected motor
If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the
driven machine, the mains voltage must always be
disconnected from the AC drive first. \Wait at least 7 minutes
before starting work.
Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Earthing
The AC drive must always be earthed via the mains safery
earth connection.
Earth leakage current
CAUTION!
This AC drive has an earth leakage current
which does exceed 3.5 mA AC. Therefore the
minimum size of the protective earth
conductol must comply with the loca! safety regulations
for high leakage current equipment which means that
according the standatd IEC618OO-$1 the protective
earth connection must be assuled by one of following
conditions:
Use a protective conductor with a cable cross'
section of at least 1O mm2lot coppel (Cu) or 16 mm2
for aluminium (Al).
2. Use an additional PE wire, wlth the same cable
cross-section as the used orlginal PE and malns
supply wiring.
Residual current device (RCD)
compatibility
This product cause a DC current in the protective
conductor. tVhere a residual current device (RCD) is used
for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only a
Typ. B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product.
Use RCD of 300 mA minimum.
EMC Regulations
In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely
necessary to follow the installation instructions. All
installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC
Directive.
Mai ns voltage selection
The AC drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage
range listed below.
FDU48: 230-480 V
FDU52: 440-525 Y
FDU69: 500-690 V
Voltage tests (Megger)
Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before
all the motor cables have been disconnected from the AC
drive.
Condensation
Ifthe AC drive is moved from a cold (storage) room ro a
room where it will be installed, condensation can occur.
This can result in sensitive components becoming damp. Do
not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has
evaporated.

lncorrect connection
The AC drive is not protected against incorrect connection
of the mains voltage, and in particular against connection of
the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V and \W. The AC
drive can be damaged in this way.

Power factor capacitors for improving

CoSg
Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet.

Preca utions d u ri ng Autoreset

til[hen the automatic reset is active, the moror wi[ restart
automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been
removed. If necessary take the appropriate precaurions.

Transport
To avoid darnxge, keep the AC drive in its original
packaging during transport. This packaging is specially
designed to absorb shocks during transport.

lT Mains supply
The AC drives can be modified for an IT mains supply,
(non-earthed neutral), please contact your supplier for
details.

Heat warning

HOT SURFACE!
Be aware of specific parts on the AC drive
having high temperature.

DGlink residual voltage

WARNING!
After switching off the mains supply,
dangerous voltage can stlll be present in the
AC drive. When opening the AC drive for
installi ng and/or commissioning activities
wait at least 7 minutes. ln case of malfunc'tion a
gualified technician should check the Dc-link or wait for
one hour before dismantling the AC drive for repair.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Gontents

Safgty I nStrUCtlOnS ..r.r.r..rirr.!rr rrrrrr!!rrrrrrrr....'... 1 4.6 28

3
5. GgttinB Staft(Bd.........!r..r.rrrrrrr..:r...r.rrrrttr....... 29
COntgntS rrrrrrr..:rr.r..r.rrrr.rr.trrr.rr.rrrrrr.rrrrrrrrrrrrr....
5.1 Connect the mains and motor cables 29
t-. lntfOdUCtiOn..tr.r.!rrr.r.rrrrrrtrr.:rrrrrr..!rr.!:.rr..rr.......5 5.1.1 Mains cables 29
L1, Delivery and unpacking.. 5 5.I.2 Motor cables 29
1,.2 Using of the instruction manual...... ........ 5 5.2 Using the function keys 29
1.3 Type code number.. 5 5.3 Remote control ..... 30
1,.4 Standards.. 6 5.3.1 Connect control cables 30
I.4.7 Product standard for EMC 6 5.3.2 Switch on the mains .. 30
1.5 Dismantling and scrapping.. 7 5.3.3 Set the Motor Data ........ 30
1,.5.1, Disposa! of old electrical and electronic 5.3.4 Run the AC drive 30
equipment 7
5.4 Local control ....,.. . 31
1.6 Glossary... 8
5.4.7 Switch on the mains .. 31
1.6.1 Abbreviations and symbols. 8
5.4.2 Select manual control...... 31
I.6.2 Definitions. 8
5.4.3 Set the Motor Data 31
2. MOUnting rrrr..r.r....rrr..rrr.r.rrrrrrrrrrrrrr:r.r.!rr........r.. 9 5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value ..-.. 31

2.t Lifting instructions 9 5.4.5 Run the AC drive 31

2.2 Stand-alone u nits 10 6. AppliCatiOnSr.rrrr.rrr.rrtrrrr..r..rrr.rr.rtr..r.rr.r.!.'..... 33
2.2.1, Cooling.. . 10
6.1 Application overview... . 33
2.2.2 Mounting schemes..... . 10
6.1.1 Pumps ...33
2.3 Cabinet mounting. 13
6.L.2 Fans 33
2,3.I Cooling.... 13
6.1.3 Compressors ..... ...- 34
2.3.2 Recommended free space in front of cabinet...... 13 6.L.4 Blowers .. 34
2.3.3 Mounting schemes..... L4
7. Main FgatUfBS ,.....r..r..rrrrrtr...r...rrrrr.r.rr.r.r...... 35
3. lnStallatiOn rr.rrr:.rrrr.r..r!!:.....r.rr.....r.rrr...rrrrrrrt. 15
7.7 Parameter sets 35
3.1 Before installation 15
7.!.L One motor and one parameter set.. 36
3.2 Cable connections for model 003 lo O74 15
36
7.1,.2 One motor and two parameter sets
3.2.! Mains cables 15
36
7.1,.3 Two motors and two parameter sets
3.2,2 Motor cables 16
7.L.4 Autoreset at trip . 36
3.3 Connection of motor and mains cables for
7.I.5 Reference priority... 36
model 090 and up . 18
3.3.1 Connection of mains and motor cables on lP2O 7,7.6 Preset references. 37
modules . 19 7.2 Remote control functions ... 37
3.4 Cable specifications 20 7.3 Performing an ldentification Run 40
3.5 Stripping lengths.. 20 7.4 Using the Control Panel Memory.. 40
3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses 2L 7.5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400] ......... 40
3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables..... 2I 7.5.L Load Monitor [410] .. 40
3.6 Thermal protection on the motor 2I 7.6 Pump function 42
3.7 Motors in parallel 27 7.6.1, lntrod uction 42
7.6,2 Fixed MASTER ..... 43
4. Gontro! COnngCtiOnS.......,.r.rr..!.t't..rr.rr..rrrrrrr 23
7.6.3 Alternating MASTER .... 43
4.1, Control board.... 23
7.6.4 Feedback'Status' input 43
4.2 Terminal connections .... 24
7.6.5 Fail safe operation 44
4.3 lnputs configuration
7.6.6 PID control 45
with the switches.. 24 .

4.4 Connection example . 25 7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master. 46

4.5 Connecting the Control Signals 26 7.6.8 Checklist And Tips 47
4.5.1, Cables 26 7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/Stop Transitions .... 48
4.5.2 Types of control signals .. 27
8. EMC and Maching Dlrectiverr,,r,r.rr.r.rrrrr.r.r. s1
4.5.3 Screening. 27
4.5.4 Single-ended ordouble-ended connection? ......... 27
8.1 EMC standards. 51

4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA)..... 28

8.2 Stop categories and emergency stop 51

4.5.6 Twisted cables 28 9. Operation via thg Control Pane!..,.....'......... 53

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
9.1 General ..... 53 11.6 Logical Functions and Timers t6001 ...... L4I
9.2 The control panel 53 71,.6.L Comparators [610] ... I4I
9.2.7 The display 53 1,r.6.2 Logic Output Y [620] L51,
9.2.2 lndications on the display 54 11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630] ... LS
9.2.3 LED indicators... 54 1"1,.6.4 Timerl t6401 .. 155
9.2.4 Control keys 54 11.6.5 Timer2 [650] ..... 156
9.2.5 The Toggle and LoclRem Key ... 54 1,L.7 View Operation/Status [700] .. . 158
9.2.6 Function keys 56 LT.7.T Operation [710]. .. 158
9.3 The menu structure.. 56 I1_.7.2 Status l2Al . 160
9.3.1 The main menu ..... . 56 LL.7.3 Stored values [730] ... 163
9.4 Programming during operation.. 57 11.8 View Trip Log [800] ... 165
9.5 Editing values in a menu ..... 57 11.8.1 Trip Message log t8101 ... 165
9.6 Copy current parameter to all sets 57 1,1-.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - t8901 .... ..... 1Go
9.7 ProSramming example 58 11.8.3 t8A0l
Reset Trip Log ... 106
10. Sgrial communlcation r.rrr.!r.rrr.!r.r..r.r.rrrrrrrrrt 59 11.9 System Datat9001 ,.. 167
7!.9.7 VSD Data [920] ..
10.1 Modbus RTU 59 LGT

IO.2 Parameter sets 59 L2. Troubleshootlng, Diagnoses and

10.3 Motor data 60 MaintenanCe ...t.rrrrrrr..rr.rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr.trrrrr.rrr.. 169
IO.4 commands
Start and stop 60
10.5 Reference signal ...
T2.T Trips, warnings and limits .. 169
60
L2.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ...... L7O
10.5.1 Process value 60
L2.2.7 Technically qualified personnel.... . lTA
10.6 Description of the Elnt formats 61
L2.2.2 Opening the AC drive .... ... I7O
L7.. Functional Dgscriptionrrrrrrrrrrrrrrtr!..rt.......,.rt 63 12.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ...... 17O
IL.L t1001
Preferred View 63 12.2.4 Autoreset Trip ..... L7O
L7.1,1 1st Line [110]..... 63 L2.3 Maintenance 7T 4
II.1,.2 2nd Line lL2Ol 64
13. OptiOnS......r..rrrrr.rrrr.rrr.rrtrrrrrrrrr..rr...rrrrrrrrr .... L7 5
1,1,.2 Main Setup [200] 64
1,I.2.1, Operation [210]. 64
13.1 Options for the control panel ... I7S

LI.2.2
13.2 Handheld Control Panel 2.O.. ... LTs
Remote Signal Level/Edge 121,A) 68
13.3 EmoSoftCom I7S
17.2.3 Mains supply voltage l21.B) 68 L3.4 Brakechopper...... ... LTG
LL.2.4 Motor Data t22oj . 69 13.5 l/O Board... ... L7T
11,.2.5 Motor Protection [230] .. 74 13.6 Encoder..... L77
1,I.2.6 Parameter Set Handling t24}l 77 13.7 PTC/PT100 . 777
II.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions t2501 ....... 80 13.8 Serial communication and fieldbus..... .. r.78
L1.2.8 Serial Communication [260] ..... 88 13.9 Standby supply board option..... 1-78
11.3 Process and Application Parameters [300] 91 13.10 Safe Stop option L79
7I.3.I Set/View Reference Value t3101 ...... 91 13.11 Output chokes ..... 181
II.3.2 Process Settings [320] .. 91 73.r2 Liquid cooling.. ..... 181
L1.3.3 Start/Stop settings t3301 .... 95 L4. TgChnical Data ...r.!,.rrr.rrr.rrrrrrr.rrr.rrrrrrrrrrr.rrr 183
11-.3.4 Mechanical brake control... 99
L4.T Electrical specifications related to model 183
11-.3.5 Speed t3401 103 14.2 General electrical specifications... r87
11.3.6 Torques [350]... . 105 14.3 Operation at higher temperatures .. 188
L1.3.7 Preset References [360].. 7O7 1,4.4 Operation at higher switching frequency. 188
11.3.8 PID Process Control t3801 109 L4.5 Dimensions and Weights.... 189
11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] ..... ..... 1,I2 74.6 Envi ron mental conditions 190
1,!.4 Load Monitor and Process Protection t4001 118 L4.7 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands L91,
LI.A.I Load Monitor t4101 ..... 118 1,4.7 .1, According IEC ratings 191
7!.4.2 Process Protection 14201..... .... !23 74.7,2 Fuses and cable dimensions according to
NEMA ratings
11.5 l/Os and Virtual Connections [500] ...... L25 193
1,4.8 Control signals.... 195
11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] ..... 1'25
7L.5.2 Digital lnputs t5201 .... 131 15. MenU LiSt rrrrr.rr.rr.rr.r.rrrrr.r.r..rrrt.r!.r.rrrrrr....rrrr L97
l-1.5.3 Analogue Outputs t53ol .. l-33
7I.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] ..... ... L37 lndeX ...rrr!!rrrrrrrr.rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr..r.r.r.rr.rrrrrr.r.... 2Os

11.5.5 Relays [550] . 139

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560] I4O

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
!-. lntroduction
Emotron FDU is used most commonly to control and
protect pump and fan applications that put high demands
on flow control, process uptime and low maintenance costs.
It can also be used for e.g. compressors and blowers. The
used moror control method is V/Hz-control. Several options
are available, listed in chapter 13. page 175, that enable you
to customize the AC drive for your specific needs.
NOTE: Read this instrustion manual carefully before
starting installation, connestion or working with the AC
drive.
Users
This instruction manual is intended for:
. installation engineers
o maintenance engineers
o oPerators
o all AC drives. \7ith this code number the exact type of the
service engineers
Motors
The AC drive is suitable for use with stand ard 3-phase
asynchronous motors. Under certain conditions it is possible
to use other types of motors. Contact your supplier for
details.
7..2 Using of the instruction
manual
\Within this instruction manual the abbreviation 'AC drive"
is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a
single unit.
Check that the sofrware version number on the first page of
this manual matches the sofnryare version in the AC drive.
See chapter 1 1.9 page 167
\7ith help of the index and the table of contents it is easy to
track individual functions and to find out how to use and set
them.
The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so that
it is always easy to access in case of an emergency.
1.3 Type code number
Fig. 1 gives an example of the rype code numbering used on
drive can be determined. This identification will be required
fur .ype specific information when mounting and installing.
The code number is located on the product label, on the
front of the unit.
FDU48-T75-54CE A NNNNA N

Position number:
1, 2 3 4 56 7 8 910LLL2L3L4 15 16 t7 L8

!-.7. Delivery and unpacking Fig. I Typ, cod,e number

Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier
immediately of any damage found. Do not install the AC
Poslti on Position
drive if damage is found.
for OO3- for O9O- Gonfiguration
The AC drives are delivered with a template for positioning 074 1500
the fixing holes on a flat surface. Check that all items are
FDU
present and that the type number is correct. L L AC drive type
VFX

48=4OO V mains
2 2 Supply voltage 52=525 V mains
69:690 V mains
-003=2.5 A
Rated current (A)
3 3
contin uous
-1K5=1500 A

2O=lP20
4 4 Protection class
54=1P54

-=Blank panel
5 5 Control panel
C=Standard panel

E=Standard EMC
(Category C3)
6 6 EMC option F=Extended EMC
(Category C2)
!=lT-Net

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 lntroduction

Position Position
for OO3- for O9O-
L.4 Standards
Conflguration The AC drives described in this instruction manual comply
074 1500 with the standards listed in Table 1. For the declarations of
-=No chopper conformity and manufacturer's certificate, contact your
Brake chopper supplier for more information or visit www.emotron.com.
7 7 B=Chopper built in
option
D=DC+/_ interface

8 8
Stand-by power -=No SBS t-.4.1 Product standard for EMC
supply option S=SBS included
Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, second edition of 2oo4
Safe stop option defines the:
-=No safe stop
I (Only valid for
T-Safe stop incl. First Environment (Extended EMC) as environmenr that
090-1500)
includes domestic premises. It also includes establishments
9 10 Brand label A=Emotron directly connected without intermediate transformers ro a
Painted AC drive A-Sta ndard paint low voltage power supply nerwork that supplies buildings
10 (Only valid for B=White paint used for domestic purposes.
003-074) RAL9OlO
Catego ry C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated
Coated boards, - =Standard boards voltage< 1.000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a
LL !1,
option V-Coated boards movable device and, when used in the first environmenr, is
intended to be installed and commissioned only by
T2 t2 Option position 1 N=No option "
C-Crane l/O professional.
13 13 Option position 2
E=Encoder Second environment (Srandard EMC) includes all other
P=PTC/ PT100 establishments.
l=Extended I/O
T4 T4 Option position 3 Catego ry C3: PDS of rated voltage < I .000 V intended for
S-Safe Stop (only
003-074) use in the second environment and not intended for use in
the ftrst environmenr.
N-No option
D=DeviceNet Catego ry C4: PDS or rated voltage equal or above I .000 V
Option position,
15 15 P-Profibus or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use
comm unication
S=RS232/485 in complex systems in the second environment.
M=Modbus/TCP
The AC drive complies with the product standard
16 16 Software type A=Sta ndard EN(IEC) 61 800-3 :2004 (A,ry kind of metal screened cable
Motor PTC. (Only N-No option may be used). The standard AC drive is designed to meet the
L7
valid for OO3-A74) P=PTC requirements according ro caregory C3.

--Glands not By using the optional "Exrended EMC" filter the AC drive
Gland kit.
i ncl uded fulfils requirements according ro caregory C2,
18 (Only valid for
G=Gland kit
003-074)
i ncl uded
WARNING!
ln a domestic environment this product may
cause radio inteffetence, in whlch case it
may be necessary to take adequate
additional measutes.

WARNING!
The standard AC drive, complying with
category C3, is not lntended to be used on a
low-voltage publlc network whlch supplies
domestic premises; radio lnterference is
expected if used in such a network. Contact
your supplier if you need additional
measuJes.

lntroduction Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Table 1 Standards

Market Standard Description

EMC Directive 2OO4/ 1O8IEEC

Eu ropea n Low Voltage Directive 2006/e5/EC

WEEE Directive 2002/e6/EC
Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60204-I
Part 1: General requirements.

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems

Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods.
EN(lEC)61800-3:2004
EMC Directive: Declaration of ConformiU and
CE marking

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1.

Ail EN(rEC)61800-5-1 Ed. Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy.
2.O Low Voltage Direstive: Declaration of Conformity and
CE marking

Classification of environmental conditions. Air quality chemical vapours, unit in

operation. Chemical gases 3C2, Solid particles 3S2.
lEC 6072I-3-3
Optional with coated boards
Unit in operation. Chemical gases Class 3C3, Solid particles 3S2.

UL5O8C UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment

UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment power conversion
USA >90 A only equipment.
UL 840 lnsulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for
electrical equipment.

Russia n GOST R For all sizes

1.5 Dismantling and scrapping 1.5.1Disposal of old electrical and

The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable electronic equipment
material as aluminium, iron and plastic. Each drive contains This information is applicable in the European Union and
a number of components demanding special treatment, for other European countries with separate collection systems.
example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit boards contain
small amounts of tin and lead. Ary local or national
regulations in force for the disposal and recycling of these
materials must be complied with.

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates

that this product shall be taken to the applicable collection
point for the rerycling of electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for
the environment and human health, which could otherwise
be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural
resources. For more detailed information about recycling
this product, please contact the local distributor of the
product.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 lntroduction

1.6 Glossary 7-.6.2 Definitions
In this manual the following definitions for currenr, torque
and frequency are used:
1..6.1.Abbreviations and symbols
In this manual the following abbreviations are used: Tdble 3 Definitions

Thble 2 Abbreuiations Name Descrlption Quantity

lrru Nominal input current of AC drive Anrt,ts

Abbrevlation/
Description
symbol lruor'a Nominal output current of AC drive Anrt,ts

DSP Digital sisnals processor lruor Nominal motor current Anus

AC drive Freq uency converter Pruon,t Nominal power of AC drive KW

PEBB Power Electronic Building Block Puor Motor power KW

IGBT lnsulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Truovr Nominal torque of motor Nm

Control panel, the programming and presen- Tn,tor Motor torque Nm

CP
tation unit on theAC drive
four Output frequency of AC drive Hz
Elnt Communication format
frr,tor Nominal frequency of motor Hz
U Int Communication format (Unsigned integer)
nrrnot Nominal speed of motor rpm
lnt Com m unication format (lnteger)
lct- Maximum output current Anrus
Long Communication format
Speed Actual motor speed rpm
The function cannot be changed in run mode
0 Torque Actual motor torque Nm

Sync
Synchronous speed of the motor rpm
speed

Introduction Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

2. Mounting
This chapter describes how to mount the AC drive. Recommended for AC drive models
Before mounting it is recommended that the installation is -3OO to -1500
planned out first.
o Be sure that the AC drive suits the mounting location.
o The mounting site must support the weight of the AC
drive.
. \fill the AC drive continuously withstand vibrations
and/or shocks?
. Consider using a vibration damper.
. Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air
flow, compatibiliry of the motor, etc.
o Know how the AC drive will be lifted and transported.

2.L Lifting instructions

Note: To prevent personal risks and any damage to the

unit during lifting, it is advlsed that the lifting methods
described below are used.

Recommended for AC drive models

-O9O to -250

Load: 56 lo 74 kg

Fig. 3 Remoue the roof unit and use the lfiing eyes to lifi
r ingle unit 600mm and 900mm.

Single cabinet drives can be lifted/transported safely using

the eyebolts supplied and lifting cables/chains as in
illustration Fig. 3 above.
Depending on the cable/chain angle A (in Fig. 3),
following loads are permitted:

Cable/chain angle A Permitted load

450 4800N
60" 6400N
90' 13 600N

Regarding lifting instructions for other cabinet sizes, please

contact Emotron.

Fig. 2 Lfiing AC driue model -090 to -250

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Mounting

2.2 Stand-alone units 2.2.2 Mounting schemes
The AC drive must be mounted in a vertical position against
a flat surface. Use the template (delivered together with the
AC drive) to mark out the position of the fixing holes.

Fig. 4 AC driue mounting model 003 to 1500

2.2.7. Cooling Fig. 5 FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B)

Fig. 4 shows the minimum free space required around the
AC drive for the models 003 to 1500 in order to guarantee
adequate cooling. Because the fans blow the air from the
bottom to the top it is advisable not to position an air inlet
immediately above an air outlet.
The following minimum separation berween rwo AC drives,
or a AC drive and a non-dissipating wall must be
maintained. Valid if free space on opposite side.

Table 4 Mounting and cooling

300-1500
oo3-018 026-074 090-250
cabinet
a 200 200 200 100
Fig. 6 Cable interface for mains, motor and communica-
FDU-FDU b 200 200 200 0 tion,FDU4S/52: Model 003 ro 0lS (B)
(mm) c 0 0 o 0
d 0 0 0 0
FDU-wall, a 1-00 100 100 100
wall-one b 100 100 100 0
side c 0 0 o o
(mm) 0
d 0 0 0

NOTE: When a 3OO to 15fi) model is placed between two

walls, a minimum distance at each side of 2O0 mm must
be maintained.

Fig. 7 FDU4S/52: Mod.el 003 to 018 (B), with optional

gland plate

10 Mounting Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

 30 160
o
be|

o o
Or
Lr) r.r)

Fig. t0 FDU4S/52: Modtl 061 to 074 (D)

Fig. 8 FDU4S/52: Model 026 ro 046 (C)

Glands
M20
Glands
M20

Glands Glands
M25 (026-031 M20 M50
M32 (037-046

Glands
Glands M40
M32 (026-031)
M4O (037-046)

Fig. 1 1 Cable interface for mAins, motor and communicatioru,

FDU4S/52: Model 061 to 074 (D)

NOTE; Glands for size B, C and D are available as

option kit.
Fig. 9 Cable interface fo, mAins, motor and communication,
FDU4S/52: Model 026 to 046 (C)

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Mounting LL

 Cable glands M20
Cable glands M20

Cable flexible leadthrough

Cable flexible leadthrough 023-55 /M63
oL7-42 /M50

Cable flexible leadthrough

Cable flexible leadthrough aL7 -42 /M50
att-32 /M4O

22.5 240 344.5

@
L20 g
,t\. o CIt

r
e)> ei G}
@t
osl o

Loo
L) r'l

rq
I
C1
I
!O
o)

l* (o

ii

Fig I2 FDU4S: Model 090 to 175 (E) including cable inter- Fig. l3 FDU4S: Model 210 to 250 (F)
mdins, mntor dnd communication FDU69: Model 90 to 175 (F69) including cable
face for interface mains, motor and communici.tion
for

Dimension in mm
Frame FDU model
A B c
F 2LO - 250 925 950 920

F69 90 - 775 1065 1090 1060

T2 Mounting Emotron AB OI-4428-O 1r3

2.3 Cabinet mounting 2.3.2 Recommended free space in
front of cabinet
All cabinet mounted AC drives are designed in modules, so
2,3.!- Cooling called PEBBs. These PEBBs can be folded out to be
If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the rate of replaced. To be able to remove a PEBB in the future, we rec-
airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be taken into ommend 1.30 meter free space in front of the cabinet, see
consideration.
Fig. 14.
Table 5 Flout rAtes coolingfont

c
Frame FDU Model Flow rate lm3Ttrourl

B 003-018 75
C 026 - 031 L20
C 037 - 046 !70
D 06r-074 L70 I
I

E 090 - L75 510

F 2LO - 250
800
F69 090 - 775
.J
"l
G 300 - 375 1020
H 430 - 500
1600
H69 2IO - 375
t
600 - 750

I
2400 I

t69 430 - s00

J 860 - 1000
3200
r-l
I

J69 600 - 650

K L200 - 1500
4800
K69 750 - 1000 1 300

NOTE: For the models 860 to 15OO the mentioned Fig. 14 Recommend.edfee spdce infiont of the cabinet
mounted AC driue
amount of air flow should be divided equally over the two
cablnets.

Emotron AB OL-4428-O 1r3 Mounting 13

2.3.3 Mounting schemes

o
rr)
N
N

600

Fig. 15 FDU4S: Mode I 300 ro 500 (G and H) Fig. 17 FDU4S: Modtl 560 to 1000 (l)
FDU69: Model 210 ro 375 (H69) FDU69: Model 600 to 650 (169)

o
lr)
c.,l
ot

il,ll

Fig 16 FDU48: Modrl 600 to 750 (I) Fig 18 FDU4S: Model 1200 to 1500 (K)
FDU69: Modrl 430 to 500 (169) FDU69: Model 750 to 1000 (K69)

L4 Mounting Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

3. lnstallation
The description of installation in this chapter complies with complies with category C3 which suits the Second
the EMC standards and the Machine Directive. Environment standard.
Select cable rype and screening according to the EMC
requirements valid for the environment where the AC drive
is installed.

3.1 Before installation

Read the following checklist and prepare for your
application before installation.
o Local or remote control.
. Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long motor
cables page 18.

Motors in parallel, refer to men:u l2l31 page 65.

Functions used.

Suitable AC drive size in proportion to the Screen connection

of motor cables
motor/application.
If the AC drive is temporarily stored before being connected,
Fig. I 9 Mains and motor connections, model 003'018
please check the technical data for environmental
conditions. If the AC drive is moved from a cold storage
room to the room where it is to be installed, condensation
can form on it. Allow the AC drive to become fully
acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has
evaporated before connecting the mains voltage.

3.2 Gable connections for

model OO3 to O74

3.2.7. Mains cables

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local
regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive PE
load current. I
Recommendations for selecting mains of motor cables

cables Fig. 20 Mains and motor conruections, 026-046

. To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use
screened mains cables.
. Use heat-resistant cables, +60"C or higher.
. Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local
regulations and the nominal current of the motor. See
table 49, page 191.
o The litz ground connection see fig. 23, is only necessary
if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have
an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for
mounting on an unpainted mounting plate.
Connect the mains cables according to fig. l9 or 20. The
AC drive has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter that

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 lnstallation 15

 3.2.2 Motor cables
To comply with the EMC emission standards the AC drive
is provided with a RFI mains filter. The moror cables musr
also be screened and connected on both sides. In this way a
so-called "Farad^y cage" is created around the AC drive,
motor cables and motor. The RFI currenrs are now fed back
to their source (the IGBTs) so the sysrem srays within the
emission levels.

Recom mendations for selecti ng motor

cables
Use screened cables according to specification in table 7 .
Use symmetrical shielded calrle; three phase conducrors
and a concentric or otherwise symmetricdly constructed
PE conductor, and a shield.
of motor cables
\ilf,hen the conductiviry of the cable PE conducror is
Fig. 21 Mains and motor connection, model 061 - 074
<50o/o of the conductivity of the phase conducror, a
separate PE conductor is required.
Tdble 6 Mains and motor connections
. use heat-resistant cables, +60"C or higher.
L1,L2, L3 Mains supply, 3 -phase
PE Safety earth (protected earth) Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the
nominal output current of the motor. See table 49, page
+U,V,W
Motor earth
Motor output, 3-phase
I 91.

Keep the motor cable berween AC drive and moror as

Brake resistor, DC-link short as possible.
DC-,DC+,R
con nections (optiona l)
The screening must be connected with a large contacr
surface of preferable 3604 and always at both ends, ro
NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted if the motor housing and the AC drive housing. \7hen
the DC+/DC- option or Brake Chopper Option is built-in. painted mounting plates are used, do nor be afraid ro
scrape away the paint to obtain as large contacr surface as
possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles
WARNING!
and the bare cable screening. Relying just on the
The Brake Resistor must be connected
between terminals DC+ and R. connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient.

NOTE: lt is important that the motor housing has the

WARNING! same earth potentlal as the other parts of the machine.
!n order to work safely, the mains earth must
be connected to PE and the motor earth o The litz ground connecrion, see fig. 23, is only necessary
to !.
if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have
an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for
mounting on an unpainted mounring plate.
Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V and
\(/ - \W, see Fig. 19, Fig. 20 and Fig. 2l

NOTE: The terminals DC-, DG+ and R are options.

16 lnstallation Emotron AB OI-4428-0 1r3

Switches between the motor and the
AC drive built into cabinet
AC drive
If the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenance
switches, output coils, etc., it is necessary that the screening
is continued by using metal housing, metal mounting plates, (option)
etc. as shown in the Fig. 23. Mains

Metal EMC cable glands

Screen connection
Output coil (option)
of signal cables

Screened cables

Unpainted mounting plate

Metal connector housing

Mains
(L1, L2,L3,PE)

Brake resistor
(option)

Fig. 23 AC driue in a cabinet on (t mounting Plate

Fig. 24 shows an example when there is no metal mounting

plate used (e.g. if IP54 AC drives are used). It is important
Motor cable
shield connection to keep the "circuit" closed, by using metal housing and
cable glands.
Fig, 22 Screen connection of cables.

P^y special attention to the following points:

. If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to prevent
subsequent corrosion. Repaint after making connections!
o The fastening of the whole AC drive housing must be
electrically connected with the mounting plate over an
area which is as large as possible. For this purpose the
removal of paint is necessary.An alternative method is to Metal EMC cable
connect the AC drive housing to the mounting plate glands
with as short a length of litz wire as possible.
Screened cables
. Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever
possible. Metal housing

o If the AC drive is rnounted in a standard cabinet, the

Brake
resistor lcoils
internal wiring must comply with the EMC standard. (qpliq!) (opti

Fig. 23 shows an example of a AC drive built into a Metal connector housing

cabinet.

Metal cable gland Motor

Mains

Fig. 24 AC driue as stand alorue

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 lnstallation L7

Connect motor cables
1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive
3.3 Connection of motot and
housing. mains cables for model
2. Put the cables through the glands. O9O and up
3. Strip the cable according to Thble 8.
4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor ter- AC drive FDU48-O9O and up, FDU69-090 and
minal. up
5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the To simplify the connection of thick moror and mains cables
ftxing screws. to the AC drive, the cable inter face plate can be removed.
(r. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to
the motor and brake chopper cable screens.

Placing of motor cables

Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as possi-
ble, especially from control signals. The minimum distance
berween motor cables and control cables is 300 mm.

Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables.

The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of
90".

Long motor cables

If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m (for
powers below 7 .5 kW please contact Emotron), it is possible
that capacitive current peaks will cause tripping at overcur-
rent. Using output coils can prevent this. Contact the sup-
plier for appropriate coils.

Switching in motor cables

Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In the
event that it cannot be avoided (..g. emergency or mainte-
nance switches) only switch if the current is zero. If this is
not done, the AC drive can trip as a result of current peaks.

Clamps for screening

Cable interface

Motor cable
DC+, DC-, R (optional)
Mains cable

Fig. 25 Connecting m0t0r and mains cables

l. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive

housing.
2. Put the cables through the glands.
3. Strip the cable according to Thble B.
4. Connect the stripped cables ro the respective mains/
motor terminal.
5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the
cable in the clamp with good electrical contict ro the
cable screen.
6. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the
fixing screws.

18 lnstallation Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

AC drive model 48-300 & 69-2LO and up 3.3.1 Connection of mains and
motor cables on lP2O modules
The Emotron IP 20 modules are delivered complete with
factory mounted cables for mains and motor. The length of
the cables are app. 1100 mrn. The cables are marked Ll,L2,
L3 for mains connection and U, V \W for motor connec-
tion.
For detailed information about use of the IP20 modules,
please contact Emotron.

Motor connection
U

V
W

Mains Connection

L1
L2
L3

Ground / earth Mains cables Motor cables

co n n ection L7., L2, L3 U,V,W
bus bar

Fig. 27 IP20 module size G, with qty 2 x 3 mains cables and

qty2x3motorcables.

Fig. 26 Connect motor cables and mains cables to the

terminak and earth/ground to the bus bar.

AC drive models 4S-300 A 69-210 and up are supplied

with power clamps for mains and motors, f.r connection of
PE and earth there is a bus bar.

For all rype of wires to be connected the stripping length

should be 32 mm.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 lnstallation 19

 3.4 Cable specifications
Table 7 Cable spectfications

Cable Cable specification

Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the

Mains
voltage used.

Symmetrica! three conductor cable with

concentric protection (PE) wire or a four
Motor
conductor cable with compact low-impedance
concentric shield for the voltage used.
Control cable with low-impedance shield,
Control
screened.

3.5 Stripping lenglhs

Fig. 29 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for
motor and mains cables.

Table 8 Stripping lengths flr mains and motor cables

Mains cable Motor cable

Model
a b a b c
Mains cables otor cables (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
LL, L2, L3 U,V,W
003-018 90 10 90 10 20
Fig. 28 IP20 module size H/H69 uith qty 3 x 3 Mains cables 026-046 150 L4 150 T4 20
and qty 3 x 3 motor cables.
061 -O74 110 L7 110 L7 34
090-175 160 16 160 16 4L
FDU48-2LO-250
L70 24 L70 24 46
FDU69-090-175

Mains

Fig. 29 Stripping kngths for cables

20 lnstallation Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

3.5.1 Dirnension of cables and fuses 3.6 Thermal protection on the
Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14.7, page
191 .
motor
Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan.
The cooling capaciry of this built-in fan is dependent on the
3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains frequency of the motor. At low frequenry, the cooling
and motor cables capaciry will be insufficient for nominal loads. Please
conracr the motor supplier for the cooling characteristics of
Thble 9 Model FDU4S/52 003 to 046 the motor at lower frequenry.

Brake chopper Mains/motor WARNING!

Depending on the cooling characteristics of
Tightening torque, Nm 1,.2-r.4 r.2-I.4
the motor, the application, the speed and the
load, lt may be necessaty to use forced
Table 10 Model FDU4S/52 061 to 074 cooling on the motor.

All cables 6O A All cables 73 A

Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the
Tightening torque, Nm 2.8 5.0 motor. Depending on the rype of motor thermistor fitted,
the optional PTC input may be used. The motor thermistor
Thble 1 I Model FDU4B 090 to 109 gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the
motor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions,
Brake chopper Mains/motor Motor I2t type l23il and Motor I2t currenr 12321.
Block, mm2 95 95
Cable diameter, mm2 16-95 16-95 3.7 Motors in parallel
Tightening torque, Nm L4 74 It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total
current does not exceed the nominal value of the AC drive.
Table 12 Model FDU4B 146 to 175 The following has to be taken into account when setting the
motor data:
Brake chopper Mains/motor
Men u l22Ll The motors in parallel must have the.
Block, mm2 95 150
Motor Voltage: same motor voltage.
Cable diameter, mm2 16-95 35-95 L2O-LsC
Men u 1222) The motors in parallel must have the
Tightening torque, Nm L4 M 24 Motor Frequency: same motor frequency.
Men u 12231 Add the motor power values for the
Table 13 Model FDU4S 210 to 250 and FDU69 090 to Motor Power: motors in parallel.
175
Men u 12241
Add the current for the motors in parallel.
Motor Current:
Brake chopper Mains/motor
Men u 12251 Set the average speed for the motors in
Block, mm2 1-50 240 parallel.
Motor Speed:
Cable diameter, mm2 35-95 L20-L50 35-70 95-244
Men u 12271 Set the average Cos PHI value for the
Tightening torque, Nm L4 24 !4 24 Motor Cos PHI: motors in parallel.

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 !nstallation 2L

lnstallation Emotron AB 0!-4428-0113
4. Control Gonnections

4.7. Control board WARNING!

Fig. 30 shows the layout of the control board which is where Always switch off the malns voltage and wait
at least 7 minutes to allow the DC capacltors
the parts most important to the user are located. Althorgh
to discharge before connecting the control
the control board is gdvanically isolated from the mains, for
signals or changing posltion of any switches. lf the
safery reasons do not make changes while the mains supply
option External supply is used, switch of the mains to
is on!
the optlon. This is done to prevent damage on the
control board.

x4 1'

-****;_# Option
'L*or.****,,o,***'.o.**o.o.*"1#
Comn6unication
.,#1+1ff1<\ -

Y|.-*'""{\
b.+qts+l'.d.c
ti''+la-so{'::ldr*{

--6""ry\
ET" JS
\i ""tx' ,'
'\,t${g'r,

Switches

rSlu r52u r53u lS4u

":J
Control
signals R02
12 13 L4 15 16 L7 18 19 20 21 22 41, 42 43
Relay outputs
r Ao1 AO2 r- Dl4 Dts Dl6 Dl7 DO1 DO2 Dl8
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 x2 31 32 33

+1OV Al1 A,2 Al3 Al4 -1OV r Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 +24V x3

Fig. 30 Contol board layout

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Contro! Connections 23

4.2 Terminal connections Tdble 14 Control signak

The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is Terminal Name Functlon (Default)
accessible after opening the front panel.
31 N/C 1
The table describes the default functions for the signals. The Relay 1 output
inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as 32 COM 1 Trip, active when the AC drive is
in a TRIP condition.
described in chapter 11. page 63. For signal specifications 33 N/O 1
refer to chapter 1 4. page 183.
4L N/C 2
Relay 2 output
42 COM 2 Run, active when the AC drive is
NOTE: The maximum total combined current for outputs
sta rted.
Lt ,2O and 21 is 1OOmA. 43 N/O 2
51 COM 3 Relay 3 output
NOTE: lt is possible to use external 24V if connection to 52 N/O 3 off
Common (15).

I4 NOTE: N/C ls opened when the relay is active and N/O is

Thble Control signals
closed when the relay is actlve.
Terminal Name Function (Default)

Outputs
+10 v
4.3 lnputs configuration
+10 VDC supply voltage
T
with the switches
6 -10 v -10 VDC supply voltage
The switches S I to 54 are used ro ser the input configuration
7 Common Signal ground for the 4 analogue inputs Anlnl, Anln2, AnIn3 and AnIn4
+24Y +24 VDC supply voltage as described in table 15. See Fig.30 for the location of the
T7
switches.
!2 Common Signal ground

15 Common Signal ground Table 15 Switch settings

Digital inputs lnput Signal type Switch

8 Digln 1 RunL (reverse)
Voltage
51 ru
9 Digln 2 RunR (forward) Anlnl
l*:ffi
10 Digln 3 off Current (default)
s1 1 "...
y-
tffi::::I
16 Digln 4 off
Voltage
52ru
n::.::::ffiffi#]
L7 Digln 5 off Anln2
18 Digln 6 off Current (default)
s2ru
i:,ffi.:.::"{
19 Digln 7 off
Voltage
53ru
il'""**"ffiffi't
22 Digln 8 RESET Anln3
Digital outputs Current (default)
53ru***",.,.,:,":l
iiffi
20 DigOut 1 Ready
Voltage
54ru r..s- j+}!X'iii+Ft*

iffii
':{4'i:fi

27 Digout 2 Brake Anln4

Analogue inputs Current (default)
54ru
t#iffi..,....,",.i
2 Anln 1 Process Ref

3 Anln 2 off NOTE: Scallng and offset of Anln1. - Anln4 can be

4 Anln 3 off configured uslng the software. See menus [5L21, [515],
t5181 and t51BI in section 11.5, page L25.
5 Anln 4 off
Analogue outputs
NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs Anout 1. and An0ut 2 can
13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed be configured using the software. See menu [53O]
section 11.5.3, page 133
L4 AnOut 2 0 to max torque

Relay outputs

24 Control Connections Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

4.4 Connection example
Fig. 31 gives an overall view of aAC drive connection exam-
ple.

Alternative for :

potentiometer cofitrol * *

+10 VDC
Anln 1: Reference
0-10v
4-20mA Anln 2
Anln 3 Common

Anln 4 AnOut 1

-10 VDC AnOut 2

Common Digout 1

Digln 1:RunL* Digout 2

Digln Z:RunR*

Fieldbus option
Option board
or PC

* Default setting
** The switch 51 is set to U NG_06-F27

Fig. 3I Connectioru example

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Control Connections 25

4.5 Connecting the Gontro!
Signals

4.5.1Cables
The standard control signal connections are suitable for
stranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm2 andfor solid wire up to
2.5 mm2.

OCfOOCfOO
OOOOC]OOO
OOCfOCOC)
OC)OOOOCJ-
OOC]OO

Control signals

Fig. 34 Connecting the control signak, 061 to 074

Control signals

Fig. 32 Connecting tlte control signals, 003 to 0l B

Control signa ls

signa ls

Fig. 3i Connecting tlte control signals, 026 to 046 Fig. 35 Connecting the control signals, 090 to 250

26 Control Connections Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3


NOTE: The screening of control signal cables is
necessary to comply with the immunity levels glven in
the EMC Dlrective (it reduces the nolse level).
NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor and
mains cables.
4.5.3 Screening
For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the
screening is connected to both ends: the AC drive side and
the at the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig.36.
It is strongly recommended that the signd cables be allowed
to cross mains and motor cables at a 90o angle. Do not let
the signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motor
cable.

4.5.2Types of control signals 4.5.4Si ngle-ended ot dou ble-ended

Always make a distinction berween the different types of
signals. Because the different rypes of signals can adversely
affect each other, use a separate cable for each rype. This is
often more practical because, for example, the cable from a
pressure sensor may be connected directly to the AC drive.
'We can distinguish berween the following types of control
signals:
connection?
In principle, the same measures applied to motor cables
must be applied to all control signal cables, in accordance
with the EMC-Directives.
For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4.5.2 the best
results are obtained if the screening is connected to both
ends. See Fig. 36.

Analogue inputs
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 014-20 mA) normally NOTE: Each installation must be examlned carefully
used as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedback before applying the proper EMC measurements.
signals.

Analogue outputs
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V 014-20 mA) which
change slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, these
are control or measurement signals.

Digital
Voltage or current signals (0-10 V 0-24Y,014-20 mA)
which can have only rwo values (high or low) and only o
ccasion ally change in value.

Data
Usually voltage signals (0-5 V O-10 V) which change rapidly
and at a high frequenry, generally data signals such as
RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc.

Relay
Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive
loads (auxiliary relay,lamp, valve, brake, etc.).

Signal Tightening
Maximum wire size Gable type
type torque EKerna! control
(e.9. in metal housing)

Ana logue Rigid cable: Screened

O.L4-2.5 mm2
Digital Screened
Flexible cable:
0.5 Nm
Data O.j3-L.S mm2 Screened
Cable with ferrule:
Relay O.25-I.5 mm2 Not screened

Example:
The relay output from a AC drive which controls an aaa
auxiliary relay can, at the moment of switching, form a
source of interference (emission) for a measurement signal
Fig. 36 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal
cables.
from, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is advised
to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Control Connections 27

4.5.5 Current signals ((O)4-2O mA) 4.6 Connecting options
A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to The option cards are connected by the optional connecrors
disturbances than a 0- 10 V signal, because it is connected to X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig.3A, page 23 and
an input which has a lower impedance (250 f)) than a mounted above the control board. The inputs and ourpurs

H:J"!'i-ff 1 #,il J:ff I:t iffi.r :f[' :n 3 "" of the option cards are connected in the same way as other
control signals.
fI*:
4.5.6Twisted cables
Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference
if the cables carrying them are "rwisted". This is certainly to
be recommended if screening cannot be used. By rwisting
the wires the exposed areas are minimised. This means that
in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF)
interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it
is therefore important that the return wire remains in
proximiqy to the signal wire. It is important that the pair of
wires is fully rwisted over 360'.

28 Control Connections Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

-
b. Getting Started
This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the Thble I6 Mains and motor connection
'We
quickest way to get the motor shaft turning. will show
L1, L2, L3 Mains supply, 3 -phase
you rwo examples, remote control and local control.
PE Safety ea rth
tWe assume that the AC drive is mounted on a wall or in a

cabinet as in the chapter 2. page 9. +

U,V,W
Motor earth
Motor output, 3-phase
First there is general information of how to connect mains,
moror and control cables. The next section describes how to
use the function keys on the control panel. The subsequent WARNINGI
examples covering remote control and locd control describe ln order to work safely the mains earth must
be connected to PE and the motor earth to
how to program/set the motor data and run the AC drive
and motor. +.

5.1 Gonnect the mains and 5.2 Using the function keys
motor cables
Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local
regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive
load current.

5.1.1 Mains cables

1. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 37 . The AC drive
has, as standard, a built-in
RFI mains filter that complies
with category C3 which suits the Second Environment
standard.

5.7..2 Motor cables

2. Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 37. To comply with Fig. 38 Example of menu nduigation when entering motor
uohage
the EMC Directive you have to use screened cables and
the motor cable screen has to be connected on both
sides: to the housing of the motor and the housing of the
step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting
AC drive.

step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting

AC drive
TFr-Jitter I step to next menu on the same level
Mains

i:i:::i::i;::;:t::::l::::::::ii

ittiru:.ii,i step to previous menu on the same level

i.',..ffi'i
Metal EMC cable
glands increase value or change selection

Screened cables

Metal housing
Output
coils
(option)

Metal connector housing

Metal cable gland

Mains

Fig. 37 Connection of mains and motor cables

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Getting Started 29

5.3 Remote control 5.3.3 Set the Motor Data
In this example external signals are used ro conrrol the AC Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The
drive/motor. motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational
data in the AC drive.
A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V an exrernal start button
and a reference value will also be used. Change settings using the keys on the control panel. For
further information about the control panel and menu
structure, see the chaprer 9 . page 53.
5.3.1 Connect control cables
Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started.
Here you will make up the minimum wiring fur starting. In
this example the motor/Ac drive will run wirh right rora- 1. Press ii#;i to display menu t2001, Main Setup.
tion.
2. Press i:.ffii and rhen i i,, to display menu 12201, Moror
To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control Data.
cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mmz o, solid wire
up to 2.5 mm2.
3. Press iffi to display menu l22l] and ser moror voltage.

4. Change the value using the ii,i*.'.,i and keys. Conftrm

3. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Com-
with ffi.
,.;.:.*..,;

.
mon) and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 39.
4. Connect an external start button berween terminal 1 I
5. Set motor frequency 1222).

(+24 VDC) and 9 (Digln2, RUNR) as in Fig. 39. 6. Set motor power [223).

7. Set motor currenr 1224).

B. Set motor speed 12251.

9. Set power factor (cos ,$ [227].
10. Selen supply voltage level used [218]
ll.1229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, conftrm with iffir,
and give start command ffi.

The AC drive will now measure some moror paramerers,

The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft
does not rotate. \7hen the ID run is finished after about
one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press
i,H, ro
continue.
12. Use Anlnl as input for the reference value. The default
range is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference value,
change switch (S 1) on control board and set [512] Anln
I Set-up to 0- l0V.
13. Switch off power supply.
14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outpurs as in
Fig. 39.
15. Ready!
16. Switch on power supply.

Fig. 39 Wiring
5.3.4 Run the AC drive
Now the installation is finished, and you can press the
5.3.2 Switch on the mains external start button to start the motor.
Close the door to the AC drive. Once the mains is switched
on, the internal fan in the AC drive will run for 5 seconds.
\[hen the motor is running the main connections are OK.

30 Getting Started Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

5.4 Local control
Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry
out a test run.
Use a 40A V motor and the control panel.

5.4.L Switch on the mains

Close the door to the AC drive. Once the mains is switched
on, rhe AC drive is started and the internal fan will run for 5
seconds.

5.4.2 Select manual control

Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started.
1. Press lffi to display menu [200], Main Setup.
2. Press 1ffii to display menu [210], Operation.
3. Press ,ffii to display menu l2ll], Language.
4. Press ,iffii to display menu l2l4), Reference Control.
:i':.+i..'
5. Select Keyboard using the key "nd Press ..ffi,:
to
confirm.
6. Press :1ffi1 to get to menu l2l5l, Run/Stop Control.
7. Select Keyboard using the key ...'.*.;.., and press .ffi., to
confirm.
8. Press.1$1to get to previous menu level and then ., to
display menu 1220), Motor Data.

5.4.3 Set the Motor Data

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor.

9. Press ;ffi, to display menu l22ll.

10. Change the value using the :,.:.,#.1:,
and .ii:t,.: keys. Conftrm
with.ffii
11. Press 1ffi, to display menu 1222).
I 2. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered.
13. Presr iii rwice and then ::Hi.:r
to display menu [100],
Preferred View.

5.4.4 Entet a Reference Value

Enter a reference value.
14. Presr ffi,i until menu [3001, Process is displayed.

15. Prest ..ffi:i to display menu [310], SetA/iew reference

value.

16. Use ,t . :...;#...., and p.rt to enter, for example, 300

.,'.:'*+;.'.

rpm. \We select a low value to check the rotation

direction without damaging the application.

5.4.5 Run the AC drive

Press the ,ffi,, key on the control panel to run the motor
forward.
If the motor is running the main connections are OK.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Getting Started 31

Getting Started Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
 Applications
This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many dif-
ferent applications/duties in which it is suitable to use AC
drives from Emotron. Further on you will find application
examples of the most common applications and solutions.

6.1 Application overview

6.1.tPumps
Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu

Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Sends
4L!-4L9,4LCL- 4rC9
the pump and cause downtime. warning or activates safety stoP.

Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to
running at low speed or been stationary for a while. run at full speed at certain intervals, then return 362-368, 560, 640
Reduces the pump's efficiency. to normal speed.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the
demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and level required. Sleep function activated when 320,380,342,354
equipment stressed. none is needed.

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe, a Pump Curve Protection detects deviation.
4L7-4L9, 47C1--41C9
valve not fully opened or a worn impeller. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.

Water hammer damages the pump when stopped. Smooth linear stops protect the equipment. 331-336
Mechanical stress on pipes, valves, gaskets, seals. Eliminates need for costly motorized valves.

6.!..2Fans
Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu

Starting afan rotating in the wrong direction can be Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct 219,341"
critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a fire. direction and proper function.

Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong way.

Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop before
Starting causes high current peaks and mechanical 219,33A,335
starting. Avoids blown fuses and breakdown.
stress.

Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with motor
321-,354
high energy consumption and equipment wear. speed gives more exact control.

Motor runs at same speed despite varying

demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and
equipment stressed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filtet a
damper not fully opened or a worn belt.
PID continuously adapts to the level required.
320,380,342,354
Sleep function is activated when none is needed.
Load Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning
4r1,-4r9, 4LCL-4LC9
is sent or safety stop activated.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Applications 33

6.1.3 Compressors

Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu

Compressor is damaged when cooling media
enters the compressor screw.
Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks,
stress on the equipment and excessive air use.
Motor runs at same speed when no air is
compressed. Energy is lost and equipment
stressed.
Overload situation is quickly detected and safety
41,I_4TA
stop can be activated to avoid breakdown.
Load Curve Protection function detects deviation.
Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
4I7-4I9, 4!Ct-4LCg
PID continuously adapts to the level required.
320,390, 342,354
Sleep function activated when none is needed.

Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to e.g. Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.
the compressor idling. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
4L7-4L9, 4IC1,-41C9

6.l..[Blowers
Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu

Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. PID function continuously adapts pressure to the
Wasted energy and risk of production stop. level required.
320,390

Motor runs at same speed despite varying PID continuously adapts air flow to level required.
demands. Energy is lost and equipment stressed. Sleep function activated when none is needed.
320,390, 342,354

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken damper, a Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.
valve not fully opened or a worn belt. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
47r-4L9, 4LCL-41C9

Applications Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

7. Main Features
This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of Select and copy parameter set
the AC drive. The parameter set selection is done in men u 1241] , Select
Set. First select the main set in men v 1241], normally A.
Adiust all settings for the application. Usually most
7.7. Parameter sets parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work
'When
Parameter sets are used if an application requires different by copying set A>B in men u 12421. Parameter set A is
settings for different modes. For example, a machine can be copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set
used for producing different products and thus requires two that need to be changed. Repeat for C and D if used.
or more maximum speeds and acceleration/deceleration '$fith menu
1242), Copy Set, it is easy to coPy the complete
times. With the four parameter sets different control options of to another parameter set.
contents a single parameter set
can be configured with respect to quickly changing the
If, for example, the parameter sets are selected via digital
behaviour of the AC drive. It is possible to adapt the AC inputs, Digln 3 is set to Set Ctrl I in menu 1523) and Digln
drive online to altered machine behaviour. This is based on 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu 1524), they are activated as in
the fact that at any desired moment any one of the four Thble 17.
parameter sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via the
digital inputs or the control panel and menu l24l). Activate the parameter changes via digitd input by setting
menu l24ll, Select Set to Digln.
Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital
input. Parameter sets can be changed during operation and Table I7 Parameter set
stored in the control panel.
Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2
NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter set is A o o
Motor data L-4, (entered separately), language,
communication settings, selected set, local remote, and B L 0
keyboard locked. C 0 1,

D L 1,
Define parameter sets
til7hen using parameter sets you first decide how to select
different parameter sets. The parameter sets can be selected NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is immedlately
via the control panel, via digital inputs or via serial ac,tivated. The new parameter settings will be astivated
communication. AJI digital inputs and virtual inputs can be on-line, also during Run.
configured to select parameter set. The function of the
digital inputs is defined in the menu [520]. NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A.
Fig. 40 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via
any digital input configured to Set Ctrl I or Set Ctrl 2. Examples
Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the
Parameter Set A setup of a AC drive to adapt quickly to difFerent application
Run/Stop
requirements. For example when
. a process needs optimized settings in different stages of
Torques
the process, to
- increase the process qualiry
Controllers - increase control accu racy
- lower maintenance costs
Limits/Prot. - increase operator safery
'S7ith
these settings a large number of options are available.
-Max Alarm Some ideas are given here:

M ulti frequency selection

Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be
selected via the digital inputs. In combination with the
parameter sets , 28 preset references can be selected using all
4 digiral inputs: DigI nl, 2 and 3 for selecting preset
reference within one parameter set and Digln 4 and Digln 5
Fig. 40 Selecting the parameter sets for selecting the parameter sets.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Main Features 35

Bottling machine with 3 different products one motor must stop before changing ro an other moror.
Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds . Select parameter set A in menu
1 l24l).
when the machine needs to be set up. The 4th paramerer ser
can be used for "normal" remote control when the machine 2. Select motor Ml in menu l2l2l.
is running at full production. 3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g.
inputs and outputs.
Manual - automatic control
If in an application something is filled up manually and then 4. Select parameter set B in menu l24ll.
the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, Select M2 in menu
5. l2l2).
this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control
and one for the automatic control.
6. Enter motor data and settings for other paramerers e.g.
inputs and ourputs.

7.!..1 One motot and one parameter

T.L.[Autoteset at trip
set For several non-critical application-related failure
This is the most common application for pumps and fans. conditions, it is possible ro auromatically generare a reset
Once default motor M 1 and parameter set A have been command to overcome the fault condition. The selection
selected: can be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum
number of automatically generared restarts allowed can be
l. Enter the settings for motor data.
set, see menu l25l], after this the AC drive will sray in fault
2. Enter the settings for other paramerers e.g. inputs and condition because external assistance is required.
outputs
Example
The motor is protected by an internal protection for thermal
7.L.2One motol and two parameter overload. \[hen this prorecrion is acrivated, the AC drive
sets should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before
.W.hen
resuming normal operation. this problem occurs
This application is useful if you for example have a machine
three times in a short period of time, exrernal assistance is
running ar r\ /o different speeds for different products.
required.
Once default motor Ml is selected:
The following settings should be applied:
1. Select parameter set A in menu l24l).
' Insert maximum number of resrarts; set menu l25l] to
2. Enter motor data in menu 12201. 3.

3. Enter the settings for other paramerers e.g. inputs and . Activate Moto r I2t to be automatically reser; set menu
outPuts. l25[l to 300 s.
4. If there are only minor differences berween the settings . Set relay 1, menu [551] to AutoRst Tlip; a signal will be
in the parameter sets, /ou can copy parameter set A to available when the maximum number of restarts is
parameter set B, menu 1242). reached and the AC drive srays in fault condition.

5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and ourpurs. . The reset input musr be constantly activated.

Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B.

7.7..5 Reference priority
The active speed reference signal can be programmed from
7.7..3Two motots and two patameter several sources and functions. The table below shows the
priority of the different functions with regards to the speed
sets reference.
This is useful if you have a machine with rwo motors thar
can not run at the same time, such as a cable winding Table 18 Reference priority
machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then rurns
the wheel with the other moror. Jog Preset
Motor Pot Ref. Signal
Mode Reference

On/Of'f On/Ott On/Otf Option cards

On On/Ott On/Otf Jog Ref

off On On/Off Preset Ref

off off On Motor pot commands

36 Main Features Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

7,7..6 Preset references 7.2 Remote control functions
The AC drive is able to select fixed speeds via the control of Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions
digital inputs. This can be used for situations where the
As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands are
required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values,
programmed for remote operation via the inputs on the
according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 preset
terminal strip (terminals 1 -22) on the control board. \7ith
references can be set for each parameter set, which can be
the function Run/Stp Ctrl t2l5) and Reset Control 1216l,
selected via alldigital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrll ,
this can be selected for keyboard or serial communication
Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The amount digital inputs used
control.
that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of Preset
References available; using I input gives 2 speeds, using 2
inputs gives 4 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 8 speeds. NOTE: The examples ln this patagtaph do not cover all
possibilitles. Only the most relevant combinatlons ale
Example given. The starting point is always the default setting
The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 I 300 / 800 rprn, (factory) of the AG drlve.
requires the following settings:
. Set Digln 5 as first selection input; ser 1525) to Preset
Default settings of the Run/Stop/
Ctrll.
En able/ Reset fu nctions
. Set Digln 6 as second selection input; set \Zq to Preset
The default settings are shown in Fig. 41. ln this example
CrrlZ.
the AC drive is started and stopped with Digln 2 and a reset
. Set menv l34l], Min Speed to 50 rpm. after trip can be given with Digln 8.
o Set menu [362], Preset Ref I to 100 rpm.
. Set menu [363], Preset Ref 2 rc 300 rpm.
. Set menu [364], Preset Ref 3 to 800 rpm.

\7ith
these settings, the AC drive switched on and a RUN -"i:
command given, the speed will be: f.ii
tS

. 50 rpm, when both Digln 5 and Digln 6 are low. ,i 17

o 100 rpm, when Digln 5 is high and Digln 6 is low.

. 300 rprn, when Digln 5 is low and Digln 6 is high.
RunR
. 800 rpm, when both Digln 5 and Digln 6 are high. Reset
+24 Y

Fig, 41 Default setting Run/Reset commands

The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation is

determined by the setting of the digital inputs.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Main Features 37

Enable and Stop functions
Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously.
The choice ofwhich function is to be used depends on the
application and the control mode of the inputs (Level/Edge
[21A]).
NOTE: ln Edge mode, at least one digital input must be
programmed to "stop", because the Run commands are
otherwise only able to start the AC drive.
Reset and Autoreset operation
If the AC drive is in Stop Mode due ro a trip condition, rhe
AC drive can be remotely reset by pulse ("low" to "high"
"
transition) on the Reset input, default on Digln 8.
Depending on the selected control method, a resrart takes
place as follows:
Level-control
If the Run inputs remain in their position the AC drive will
start immediately after the Reset command is given.

Enable
Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the
input is made LO\f, the output of the AC drive is
immediately disabled and the motor will coast.
CAUTIONI
lf the Enable functlon is not programmed to a
dlgltal input, it is considered to be active
internally.
Edge-control
After the Reset command is given a new Run command
must be applied to start the AC drive again.
Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active.
The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu Autoreset
l25o).
NOTE: lf the control commands are programmed for
Keyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible.

Stop
If the input is low then
the AC drive will stop according to
the selected stop mode set in menu t3fg] Stop Mode. Fig.
42 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and
the Stop Mode=Decel [338].

To run the input must be high.

NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast I33BI will give the same

behaviour as the Enable input.

STOP
(STOP=DECEL)

OUTPUT
SPEED

ENABLE

OUTPUT
SPEED

(06-F104_NG) (or if Spinstart is selected)

Fig. 42 Functionality of the Snp and Enable input

38 Main Features Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Ru n I nputs Level-control led.
The inputs are set as default for level-control. This means
that an input is activated by making the input continuously
"High". This method is commonly used if for example,
PLCs are used to operate the AC drive.
CAUTION!
Level-controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the
Machine Direstive, if the inputs are directly
used to start and stop the machine.
The examples given in this and the following paragraphs
follow the input selection shown in Fig. 43.
Run lnputs Edge-controlled
Menu t2lA] Start signal Level/Edg. must be set to Edge to
activate edge control. This means that an input is activated
by , "low" to "high" transition or vice versa.
NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the Machine
Directive (see chapter EMG and Machlne Direc{ive), lf
the lnputs are dlrestly used for starting and stopplng the
machine.
See Fig. 43. The Enable and Stop input must be active
continuously in order to accept any run-right or run-left
command. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 45
gives an example of a possible sequence.

rNrlls_ _l

ENABLE

STOP

RUN R

RUN L

OUTPUT
Fig. 43 Example of wiringfor Run/Stop/Enabb/Reset inputs
STATUS
\rt I ,-a I Vr\J
]

The Enable input must be continuously active in order to

accept any run-right or run-left command. If both RunR Right rotation
and RunL inputs are active, then the AC drive stops
according to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 44 gives an Left rotation
example of a possible sequence.
Standstill

Fig. 45 Input and output status for edge-control

Irrvnuis l

ENABLE

STOP

RUN R

RUN L

Fig. 44 Input and output status for leuel-control

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Main Feature 39

7.3 Performing an
ldentification Run
To get the optimum performance out of your AC drive/
motor combination, the AC drive musr measure the
electrical parameters (resistance of srator winding, etc.) of
the connected motor. See menu 1229], Motor ID-Run.
7.4 Using the Control Panel
Memory
Data can be copied from the AC drive to the memory in the
control panel and vice versa. To copy all data (including
parameter set A-D and motor data) from the AC drive to the
control panel, select Copy to CPl244), Copy to CP.
To copy data from the control panel to the AC drive, enrer
the me nu L24J], Load from CP and select what you wanr ro
copy.
The memory in the control panel is useful in applications
with VSDs without a control panel and in applications
where several AC drives have the same setup. It can also be
used for temporary storage of settings. U.se a conrrol panel to
upload the settings from one AC drive and rhen move the
control panel to another AC drive and download the ser-
tings.
NOTE: Load from and copy to the AC drive is only
possible when the AC drive is ln stop mode.
AC drive @
Fig. 46 Copy and load parameters betrueen AC driue and
control panel
40 Main Features
7.5 Load Monitor and Process
Protection [400]
7.5.L Load Monitor [410]
The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a
load monitor. Load monitors are used ro prorecr machines
and processes agairlsr mechanical overload and underload,
such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt
failure on a fan or a pump dry running. The load is
measured in the AC drive by the calculated motor shaft
torque. There is an overload alarm (Mo Alarm and Max
Pre-Alarm) and an underload alarm (Min Alarm and Min
Pre-Alarm).
The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and
underload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed range. This
function can be used in constant load applications where the
torque is not dependenr on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt,
displacemenr pump, screw pump, erc.
For applications with a rorque that is dependent on the
speed, the Load Curve monitor rype is preferred. By
measuring the actual load curve of the process,
characteristically over the range of minimum speed to
maximum speed, an accurate protection at any speed can be
established.
The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. The
pre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the alarms can be
monitored on the digital or relay ourpurs.
The autoset function auromatically sers the 4 alarm levels
whilst running: maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm,
minimum alarm and minimum pre-alarm.
Fig. 7 .6 gives an example of the monitor functions for
constant torque applications
Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Main Features
7.6 Pump function All additional pumps
starter, Yl L or D.O.L.
can be acrivared via an AC drive, soft
switches.

7.6.1 lntroduction
A maximum of 4 pumps can be controlled with the standard
FDU AC drive.
R:SlavePumpl
If I/O Board options are installed, a ma:rimum of 7 pumps R:SlavePump2

can be controlled. The I/O Board can also be used as a gen-

R:SlavePump3
eral extended I/O. R:SlavePump4

The Pump Control function is used to conrrol a number of R:SlavePump5

drives (pumps, fans, erc., with a maximum of 3 additional R:SlavePump6

drives per I/O-board connected) of which one is always

driven by the FDU. Other names for this kind of controllers
are 'Cascade controller' or 'Hydrophore controller'.
Pressur e
Depending on the flow, pressure or remperarure, additional
pumps can be activated via the appropriate signals by the
output relays of the FDU and/or the I/O Board. The sysrem
is developed in such away thar one FDU will be the masrer
of the system.
Select relay on the control board or on an option board. The
relays are set to functions for controlling pumps. In the pic-
tures in this section, the relays are named R:Function, e.g.
R:SlavePump I , which means a relay on the control board or Fig. 4S Pressure control u.,ith pump control option
on a option board set to function SlavePump 1 .
Pumps in parallel will operare as a flow controller, See Fig.
47.

Pumps in series will operare as a pressure conrroller see Fig.

48. The basic control principle is shown in Fig. 42.

NorE: Read thls instruction manual carefully before

commencing installation, connectlng or worklng with
the AC drive with Pump Control option.

FREQUENCY (master pump P)

Stop pump

P6=on FLOW/
PRESSURE

Fig. 47 Flow control with pump control option

TIM E

(50-PC-3_1)

Fig. 49 Basic Conrrol principle

42 Main Features Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

7.6.2 Fixed MASTER
This is the default setting of the Pump Control. The FDU
controls the Master pump which is always running. The
relay outputs start and stop the other pumps P1 to P6,
depending on flow/pressure. In this configuration a maxi- R: SlavcPump6
R: SlavePump5
R: SlavePump4
mum of 7 pumps can be controlled, see Fig . 43. To equalize R: SlavePump3
R: SlavePump2

the lifetime of the additional pumps it is possible to select R: SlavePumpl

the pumps depending on the run time history of each pump. R: Ma6terPump6
R: MasterPump5
R: MasterPump4
R: MastcrPump3
R: MasterPump2
R: MastcrPumpl

See menu:
t3e3l to [3e6]
t5531 to [55C]

Fig. 51 Alternating MASTER Control

NOTE: The pumps MUST have all the same power.

See menu:
t3931 Select Drive
t39Hl to [39N] Run Time 1- 6, Pump 7.6.4 Feedback'Status' input
t5541 to [55C] Relays In this example the additional pumps are controlled by an
other kind of drive (..g. soft starter, frequency inverter, etc.).
The digital inputs on the I/O Board can be programmed as a
Fig. 50 Fixed MASTER control
"Error" input for each pump. If a drive fails the digital input
will monitor this and the PUMP CONTROL option will
NOTE: The pumps MAY have dlfferent powers, however not use that particular drive anymore and automatically
the MASTER pump MUST always be the largest. switch ro another drive. This means that the control contin-
ues wirhout using this (faulry) drive. This function can also
be used to manually stop a particular pump for maintenance
7.6.3 Alternating MASTER purposes, without shutting down the whole pumP system.
With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the FDU Of course the maximum flow/pressure is then limited to the
all the time. After the AC drive is powered up or started maximum pump power of the remaining Pumps.
again after a stop or sleep mode the Master pump is selected
via the relay set to function Master Pump. section7.6.7 on
page 44 shows a detailed wiring diagram with 3 pumps. The
purpose of this function is that all pumps are used equally, so
the lifetime of all pumps, including the Master pump, will
be equalized. Maximum 6 pumps can be controlled with
this function.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Main Features 43

 See menu:
t5291 to [52H] Digital lnput
[554] to [55C] Relay

R:SlavePump3

R:SlavePump2

R:SlavePumpl

feedback Dl:PumplFeedb
Dl:Pump2Feedb
inputs Dl:Pump3Feedb

Fig. 52 Feedback "Status" input

7.6.5 Fail safe operation obtained by using the NC conracrs of the pump control
relays. These can be programmed for each individual addi-
Some pump systems must always have a minimum flow or
pressure level, even if the frequenry inverter is tripped or
tional pump. In this example pumps P5 and P6 will run ar
damaged. So at least 1 or 2 (or maybe all) additional pumps
maximum power if the inverrer fails or is powered down.
must keep running after the inverter is powered down or
tripped. This kind of "safe" pump operation can be

See menu:
t5541 to [55C] Relays
[55D4] to [55DC] Mode

R:SlavePump6
R:SlavePump5
R:SlavePump4
R:SlavePump3
R:SlavePump2
R:SlavePumpl

Fig, 53 Exampk ,f "Fail safe" operdtion

44 Main Features Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

7.6.6 PID control
til(/hen using the Pump Control option it is mandatory to
activate the PID controller function. Analogue inputs AnInl
to AnIn4 can be set as functions for PID set values and/or
feedback values.

See menu:
t3811 to [3851
t5531 to [55C]
l{L]-lto [41C]

R:SlavePump6
R:SlavePump5
R:SlavePump4
R:SlavePump3
Set R:SlavePump2
R:SlavePumpl
Value

Feedback
Value

ow / l'ressu re
measurement (NG_5O-PC-8_1)

Fig. 54 PID control

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Main Features 45

7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master
Fig. 48 and Fig. 49 show the relay functions MasterPumpl-
6 and SlavePump I -6. The Master and Additional contactors
also interlock with each other to prevent dual powering of
the pump and damage to the inverter. (KlM/KlS, K2M/
K2S, K3M/K3S). Before running, the FDU will select a
pump to be Master, depending on the pump run times.
CAUTIONI
The wiring for the Alternating Master control
needs special attentlon and should be wired
exactly as descrlbed here, to avoid
destructive short clrcuit at the output of the
inverter.

PE
L1
L2
L3

Fig. 55 Pou.,er connections for Alternating MASTER circuit

with 3 pumps

r e-rinr- I E'zfri tr,ni srii

I l- l- Br,Rt l- l- s-zlnf
I Master Slave I Master J Slave ; Master I Slave
I Pumpl Pumpl I Pump2 I Pump2 I Pump3 1 Pump3
t_ _ _ t_ _ _ t_ _ _ _ t_ - _ _ l- - - -
- -

(NG_50-PC-11_3)

Fig. 56 Control connections for Alternatirug MASTER circuit

uith 3 pumps

46 Main Features Emotron AB AL-4428-01r3

7.6.8 Checklist And Tips

1. Main Func'tions

Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use:

-'Altematng MASTER' function
ln this case the "Master' pump can be alternated, although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the
"Fixed MASTER" function described below. The l/O Board option is necessary.
-'Fixed MASTER' function:
One pump is always the master, only the additional pumps alternate.
Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions, so it not possible to switch
between these 2 functions later on. For further information see section 7.6.2, page 4]-.

2. Number of pumps/drives

lf the system consists oi 2 or 3 pumps the l/O Board option is not needed. However, this does mean that the following
functions are notthen possible:
- "Alternating MASTER" function
- With isolated inputs
With the l/O Board option installed, the maximum number of pumps is:
- 6 pumps if "Alternating MASTER- function is selected. (see section 7.6.3 on page 41)
- 7 pumps if "Fixed MASTER'function is selected. (see section 7.6.2, page 41)

3. Pump size

- "Altematlng MASTER' function:

The sizes of the pumps must be equal.
-'Fixed MASTER' function:
The pumps may have different power sizes, but the master pump (FDU) must always have the greatest power.

4. Programming the Dlgltal inputs

lf the digital inputs are used, the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback.

5. Programming the Relay outputs

After the Pump controller is switched on in menu 1391] the number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) must be set in menu [392]
(Number of Drives). The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePumpl-6 and if Alternate master is used,
MasterPumpl-6 as well.

6. Equal Pumps

lf all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band, because the
maximum pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains (SOHz). This can give a
very narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flovpressure. By setting the maximum frequency of the
inverter only slightly above 5OHz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on
the mains. Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer
period of time, which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading.

7. Minimum Speed

With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed, because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan will
be low until 30-50% of the nominal speed (depending on size, power, pump properties, etc.). When using a minimum
speed, a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Main Features

7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/ relay in this example srarrs the pump directly on line. of
course other start/stop equipment like a soft starrer could be
Stop Transitions controlled by the relay ourpur.

Starting an additional pump

This ftgure shows a possible sequence with all levels and
functions involved when a additional pump is started by
means of the pump control relays. The starting of the sec-
ond pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The

Flow Set view ref. t3101

\f Feedback Ftow

time

Master pump
Speed

Max speed
t3431 Upper band

I
I
I
Transition Speed Start
t3eEl

Min speed
l34rl

H! H time
Start delay t399I Settle time start [39D]

2nd pump

Speed

Start ramp depends

on start method

Start command time

Fig. 57 Time sequ€nce starting an additional pump

48 Main Features Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Stopping an additional pump
This ftgure shows a possible sequence with all levels and
functions involved when an additional pump is stopped by
means oF the pump control relays. The stopping of the sec-
ond pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The
relay in this example stops the pump directly on line. Of
course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could be
controlled by the relay output.

[310]

Feedback Flow
f

time

Master pump
Speed

Max speed
t3431 Upper band

Transition Speed Stop

t3eGI

Min speed
134Ll Lower band i
--l- I
I
I
I
I

time
Stop delay [39A] lsettte time stop t39FI

2nd pump
-i
Speed

Stop ramp depends

on start method

time

(NG_s0-PC-zO_I)

Fig. 5S Time sequence stopping an additional pump

Emotron AB Ot-4428-01r3 Main Features 49

Main Features Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
8. EMC and Machine Directive

8.1 EMC standards
The AC drive complies with the following standards:
EN(IEC)6 1 800-3 :Z}}4Adjustable speed electronic power
drive systems, part 3, EMC product standards:
NOTE: With option Safe Stop, a "Safe Torque Off (STO)"
stop according EN{EC 62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO
13849-t2OO6, can be achieved.
See chapter 13.10 page L79

Standard: category C3, fot systems of rated supply volt-

age< 1000 VAC, intended for use in the second environ-
ment.

Optional: Catego ry C2, for systems of rated supply

voltage 1.000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a
<

movable device and, when used in the first environment, is

intended to be installed and commissioned only by
experienced person with the necessary skills in installing
and/or commissioning AC drives including their EMC
asPects.

8.2 Stop categories and

emergency stop
The following information is important if emergency stop
circuits are used or needed in the installation where a AC
drive is used. EN 60204-1 defines 3 stop categories:

Category 0: Uncontrolled STOP:

Stopping by switching off the supply voltage. A mechanical
stop must be activated. This STOP may not be
implemented with the help of a AC drive or its input/output
signals.

Category L: Controlled STOP:

Stopping until the motor has come to rest' after which the
mains supply is switched off This STOP may not be
implemented with the help of a AC drive or its input/output
signals.

Category 2: Controlled STOP:

Stopping while the supply voltage is still present. This
STOP can be implemented with each of the AC drives
STOP command.

WARNING!
6020+1, specifies that every machine
EN
must be provided with a category O stop. lf
the application prevents this from being
implemented, this must be explicitly stated.
Furthermore, every machine must be provided with an
Emergency Stop function. This emergency stop must
ensure that the voltage at the machine contaGts, which
could be dangerous, is removed as quickly as possible,
without resulting in any other dangel. ln such an
Emergency Stop situatiotr, o category O or 1. stop may be
used. The choice will be decided on the basis of the
possible risks to the machine.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 EMC and Machine Direstive 51

EMC and Machine Directive Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
9. Operation via the Control Panel

This chapter describes how to use the control panel. The AC Area A: Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4
drive can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel. digits).

Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the

9.1 General
Area C:
AC drive is set for Local operation.
Shows the heading of the active menu.
The control panel displays the status of the AC drive and is
used to set all the parameters. It is also possible to control Area D: Shows the status of the AC drive (3 digits).
the motor directly from the control panel. The control panel The following status indications are possible:
can be built-in or located externally via serial
Acc Acceleration
communication. The AC drive can be ordered without the
Dec Deceleration
control panel. Instead of the control panel there will be a
12t Active I2t protection
blank panel.
Run Motor runs
Thp Tlipped
NOTE: The AC drive can run without the control panel stp Motor is stopped
being connected. However the settings must be such \rL Operating at Voltage limit
that all control signals are set for external use. SL Operating at Speed limit
CL Operating at Current limit
TL Operating at Torque limit
9.2 The control panel OT Operating at Temperature Limit
LV Operating at Low Voltage
sbv Operating from Standby power supply
SST Operating Safe Stop, is flashing when
<-- LC Display
activated
LCL : Operating with low cooling liquid level
+- LEDs Area E: Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor
parameter.
+- Control Keys
Area F: Shows the setting or selection in the active menu.
This area is empry at the 1 st level and Znd level
<- Toggle Key menu. This area also shows warnings and alarm
messages. In some situations this area could
indicate "+++" or " - - -" please see further
\
;^.
Function Keys information in chapter 9 .2.2 page 54

300 Process Appl

STPET
Fig. 59 Control panel
Fig. 6l Example lst leuel menu

9.2.1The display
The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each with 22O Motor Data
space for 16 characters. The display is divided into six areas. STPET
The different areas in the display are described below:
Fig. 62 Example 2nd leuel m€nu

A B C
22L Motor VoIt
stpEIMl i 400

Fig. 63 Example 3d leuel menu

DE
Fig. 60 The display

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Operation via the Control Panel 53

 9.2.4 Control keys
The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Reset
4L6L Max Alarm commands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set for
sttr>E! 0.1s remote control. Activate the control keys by selecting
Keyboard in the menus Ref Control l2l4] and Reset Ctrl
Fig. 64 Example 4th leuel menu 1216).

If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital

g.2.2lndications on the display inputs, this input musr be active ro allow Run/Stop
The display can indicate "+++" or "- - -" if a parameter is out commands from the control panel.
of range. In the AC drive there are parameters which are
dependent on other parameters. For example, if the speed
Titble 20 Control keys

reference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to a

gives a sta rt with
value below 500, this will be indicated with "+++" on rhe RUN L:
left rotation
display. If the minimum speedvalue is set over 500, "- - -"
is displayed.
stops the motor or resets
STOP/RESET:
the AC drive after a trip
9.2.3 LED indicators .,.:'i.:1i.,.$Sffi
.:,::: 11i1r1:1:11',
jL:r1-i'
'.,.,,,.,.'1,'
:'i:1

The symbols on the control panel have the following gives a sta rt with
functions: RUN R:

ftA
right rotation

NOTE:It is not possible to simultaneously activate the

Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely
from the terminal strip (termin als L-22).
Run Trip Power
Green Red Green

Fig. 65 LED indicarions 9.2.5The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key

This k.y has rwo functions: Toggle and
Ttlble 19 LED indication
switching berween Loc/Rem function.
Function Press one second to use the toggle function
Symbol
ON FTASHING OFF Press and hold the toggle key for more than
five seconds to switch berween Local and Remote function,
POWER depending on the settings in l2l7ll and l2l72l.
Power on Power off
(8reen)
til7hen editing values, the toggle key can be used to
change
AC drive the sign of the value, see secrion 9. 5, page 57 .
TRIP (red) Warning/Limit No trip
tripped
Motor speed
RUN Motor shaft
increase/
Motor Toggle function
(green) rotates stopped
decrease [Jsing the toggle function makes it possible to easily srep
through selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop can
contain a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loop
NOTE: lf the control panel is built in, the back light of the
contains the menus needed fur Q"ick Setup. You can use the
display has the same function as the Power LED in Table
toggle loop to create a quick-menu for the paramerers that
19 (Blank panel LEDs).
are most importance to your specific application.

NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than
five seconds without pressing either thc +, - or Esc key,
as this may activate the LoclRem function of this key
instead. See menu l2L7l.

54 Operation via the Control Panel Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Add a menu to the toggle loop Loc/Rem function
1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. The Loc/Rem function of this k.y is disabled as default.
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing Enable the function in menu l2l7l) and/or 12172).
the + k.y. \7ith the function Loc/Rem you can change between local
and remote control of the AC drive from the control panel.
Delete a menu from the toggle loop
The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the Digln,
1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle key.
see menu Digital inputs [520]
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing
the - k.y. Change control mode
1. Press the Loc/Rem k.y for five seconds, until Local? or
Delete all menus from the toggle loop Remote? is displayed.
1. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing
2. Confirm with Enter.
the Esc k.y.
3. Cancel with Esc.
2. Confirm with Enter. The menu Preferred view [100] is
displayed. Local mode
Local mode is used for temporary operation. \7hen switched
Default toggle loop
to LOCAL operation, the AC drive is controlled via the
Fig. 66 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains the
defined Local operation mode, i.e. l2l7l I and l2l72l. The
necessary menus that need to be set before startirg. Press
actual status of the AC drive will not change, e.B. Run/Stop
Toggle to enter menu [2ll] then use the Next k.y to enter
conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the
the sub menus l2l2l to [21A] and enter the parameters. 'W.hen
tVhen you press the Toggle key again, menu l22l) is same. the AC drive is set to Local operation, the
display will show E i, area B in the display.
displayed.
The AC drive will be started and stopped using the keys on
the control panel. The reference signal can be controlled
using the + and - keys on the keyboard, when in the menu
[3 t O1 according to the selection in Keyboard Reference
Sub menus menu 1369).
.:iii::ii:::;i:ti;ii

:iiiiffil Remote mode

,lrll$Ili;i..,,
\7hen the AC drive is switched to REMOTE operation, the
AC drive will be controlled according to selected control
methods in the menu's Reference Control l2l4], Run/Stop
Control l2l5l and Reset Control 1216l. The actual oPera-
tion srarus of the AC drive will reflect the status and settings
of the programmed control selections, e.g. Start/StoP status
and settings of the programmed control selections,
acceleration or deceleration speed according to the selected
reference value in the menu Acceleration Time l33ll I
Deceleration Time l3lZl.
To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the AC
drive control, a "Loc/Rem" function is available on the
Sub menus 'When
Digital Outputs or Relays. the AC drive is set to
Local, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active high,
in Remote the signal will be inactive low. See menu Digital
Outputs [540] and Relays t5f Ol.

Fig. 66 Default togle loop

lndication of menus in toggle loop

Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a I
in area B in the display.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Operation via the Control Panel 55

9.2.6 Function keys
The function keys operate the menus and are also used for
programming and read-outs of all the menu settings.

Thble 2l Function keys

200
step to a lower menu MAIN MENU

level 'l'obo'l
ENTER key: i
confirm a changed _ ____/ ...,...,.,,1

setting
ENTER
step to a higher
,,,:,'ll'-:,:,:i::: ::;:l menu level
,.:l,:,ffi:.:..i:.::'
:
i
:
:
:: :
:
::: :j :
:
:
I
j: i: i
: : : I : I ;: :: : I :
:
:: : :: :; : I :; :; :;
I
:
:
:: :: ESCAPE key: ignore a changed
l.l:..,ii:.:Cmg.1..:ii;:1iil. setting, without
conf irm ing

step to a previous
menu within the same
PREVIOUS key: level
go to more significant
digit in edit mode

step to a next menu

....i.i.,.'.iffi
within the same level
..',.,.,.,...,,
NEXT key:
go to less significant
.;-:.:'j j i.:-:.i-:.:-i-:-; :-:.:,: :.:,:-:,:.:.:,:.:-

i:iii,i..:f--*ffi i.,..i;,.,i Fig. 68 Menu structure

...ii;..t:..:..:i:,.,.f :t:i:i::ti:.:::ii::t:tl.;.!.ii digit in edit mode

decrease a value 9.3.1The main menu

- key:
:iri:i:r:ili:ili:r:rmr:::rt::r:r::::
change a selection This section gives you a short description of the functions in
the Main Menu.

+ key:
increase a value 100 Preferred View
change a selection Displayed at power-up. It displays the actual process value as
default. Programmable for many other read-outs.

Fig. 67 Menu structure 2OO Main Setup

Main settings to get the AC drive operable. The moror data

9.3 The menu structure

settings are the most imporranr. Also option utiliry and ser-
tings.
The menu structure consists of 4 levels:
300 Process and Application Parameters
Settings more relevant to the application such as Reference
Main Menu
The first character in the menu number. Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, erc.
1st level
2nd level The second character in the menu number. 400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process
3rd level The third character in the menu number.
Protection
The monitor function enables the AC drive to be used as a
4th level The fourth character in the menu number. load monitor to prorect machines and processes against
mechanical overload and underload.
This structure is consequently independent of the number
of menus per level.
For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu (Set/
View Reference Value 1310]), or it can have 77 selectable
menus (menu Speeds [340]).

NOTE: lf there are more than 10 menus within one level,

the numberlng continues in alphabetic order.

56 Operation via the Control Panel Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

500 lnputs/Outputs and Virtual Alternative 2
Con nections Press the + or - k.y to enter edit mode. Then press the Prev
All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here. or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of
the value that should be changed. The cursor will make the
600 Logical Functions and Timers selected character flashes. Move the cursor using the Prev or
All settings for conditional signals are entered here. Next keys. When you press the + or - keys, the character at
the cursor position will increase or decrease. This alternative
700 View Operation and Status
is suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. from 2
Viewing all the operational data like frequency, load, power,
s to 400 s.
current, etc.
To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. This
800 View Trip Log makes it possible to enter negative values.
Viewing the last l0 trips in the trip memory.
Example: til7lren you press Next the 4 will flash.
900 Service lnformation and AC drive Data
Electronic rype label for viewing the software version and 331 Aec Time
AC drive rype. StpE 4.00s
Flashing
9.4 Programming during Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit

operation mode.

Most of the parameters can be changed during operation

without stopping the AC drive. Parameters that can not
changed are marked with a lock symbol in the display.
be
NOTE: lf you try to change a funstion during operation
that only can be changed when the motor is stopped, the
message "Stop First" is displayed,
9.6 Copy current parameter to
all sets
\Mhen a parameter is displ ayed, press the Enter key for
5 seconds. Now the text To all sets? is displayed. Press Enter
to copy the setting for current parameter to all sets.

9.5 Editing values in a menu

Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in
rwo different ways. Enumerated values like the baud rate can
only be changed with alternative 1.

262L Baudrate
Stp 38400

Alternative 1,
til7hen you press the + or - keys to change a value, the cursor
is flashing to the left in the display and the value is increased
or decreased when you press the appropriate key. If you keep
the + or - keys pressed, the value will increase or decrease
continuously. \7hen you keep the key pressed the change
speed will increase. The Toggle k.y is used to change the
sign of the entered value. The sign of the value will also
change when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm the value.

331 Acc Time

stpEII 2.00s
I Flash ing

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Operation via the Control Panel 57

9.7 Programming example
This example shows how to program a change of the Acc. 100 Orp Menu 1-00 appears
Tirne set from 2.0 s rc 4.0 s.
StpEI 0.0 after power-up.
The flashing cursor indicates that a change has taken place
but is not saved yet. If at this moment, the power fails, the
change will not be saved.

Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed and
to go to other menus. 2OO MAIN SETUP Press Next for menu
StPE t20ol.

300 Process Press Next for menu

STPET t3001.

310 SeE/VLevr Ref Press Enter for menu

S TPET [310].

330 Run/Stop Press Next two times

StPE for menu [330].

331 Acc Time Press Enter for menu

STPEI 2 .00s t3311.

31 Acc Time Keep

,:,:::,1::l i;,::;l:,

key pressed
StpEII
,.'liis;.:'..'

2.oOs untildesired value has

been reached.
Flash ing

331 Acc Time Save the changed

value by pressing
StpEI 4.00s Enter.

Fig. 69 Programming example

58 Operation via the Control Panel Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

10. Serial communication
The AC drive provides possibility for different types of serial
communication.
. Modbus RTU via RS2321485
. Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet
. Industrial Ethernet as Modbus/TCP

tO.!. Modbus RTU

The AC drive has an asynchronous serial communication
interface behind the control panel. It is also possible to use
the isolated RS232 1485 option board (if installed).
The protocol used for data exchange is based on the Modbus
RTU protocol, origin ally developed by Modicon. The Fig. 70 R5232 connector behind the control panel
physical connection is RS232.TheAC drive acts as a slave
with address 1 in a master-slave configuration. The
communication is half-duplex. It has a standard non return
LO.2 Parameter sets
zero (NRZ) format. information for the different parameter
f:T*unication
The baud rate is fixed to 9600 (Control panel RS232 port).
The different parameter sets in the AC drive have the
The character frame format (always 1 I bits) has:
following DeviceNet instance numbers and Profibus slot/
. one start bit index numbers:

' eight data bits

Parameter Modbu s/DevlceNet Profibus
. r\4/o stop bits lnstance number Slot/lndex
set
o no parity
A 43001-43556 I68/L6O to L7O/2O5
Itis possible to temporarily connect a personal computer
B 4400L-44529 !72/L4O to I74/ 185
with for example the software EmoSoftCom (programming
and monitoring sofrware) to the RS232 connector on the c 45001 -45529 L76/1,20 to L78/ 165
control panel. This can be useful when copying parameters D 46001 -46529 1.8O/1:O0 to L82/L45
berween AC drives etc. For permanent connection of a
personal computer you have to use one of the
Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43556. The
communication option boards.
parameter sets B, C and D contains the same type of
information. For example paramercr 43123 in parameter set
NOTE: This RS232 port ls not isolated.
A contain the same rype of information as 44123 in
parameter set B.
WARNING! A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a
Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection Profibus slot/index number according to description in
depends on the ground pins of both ports
section section 1 1.8 .2, p^ge 166.
being the same potential. Problems can
occur when conneEting two ports of e.g. machinery and
computers where both ground pins are not the same
potential. This may Gause hazardous ground loops that
can destroy the RS232 ports.

The control panel RS232 connestion is not galvanically

isolated.

The R5232/485 option board from Emotron ls

galvanical ly isolated.

Note that the control panel RS232 connectlon can

safely be used in cornbination with commercial available
isolated USB to RS232 converters.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Serial communication 59

10.3 Motor data 10.5 Reference signal
Communication information for the different motors. \When menu Reference Control
l2l4l is set ro "Com" rhe
following parameter data should be used:
Modbus/DevlceNet Profibus
Motor
lnstance number Slot/lndex Defa ult 0

M1 4304I-43048 168/20O to 168/20T Range -16384 to 16384

M2 44041,-44048 172/!80 to 174/1.87 Corresponding to -1:OO% to 100% ref

M3 45041,-45048 176/ 160 to L76/L67

Com munication information
M4 4604r-46048 18O/ L O to 180/ I47
Modbus /DeviceNet
42905
lnstance number
M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, M3, and
M4 contains the same type of information. For example Profibus slot /lndex 1:68/64
paramercr 43043 in motor Ml contain the same type of Fieldbus format lnt
information as 44043 in M2.
Modbus format lnt
A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a
Proftbus slot/index number according to description in
section section 1 1.8 .2, p^ge 166. 10.5.1 Process value
It is also possible to send the Process value feedback
signalover a bus (..g. from a process or remperarure sensor)
LO.4 Start and stop commands for use with PID Process controller [380].
Set start and stop commands via serial communication.
Set menu Process Source l32l] to F(Bus). Use following
parameter data for the process value:
Modbus/DeviceNet
Functlon
lnstance number
Defa u lt 0
4290r Reset
Range -16384 to 16384
Run, active together with either
Corresponding to -1:OO% to 100% ref
42902 RunR or RunL to
perform sta rt.
Com m un ication information
42903 RunR
Modbus /DeviceNet
42904 RunL 42906
lnstance number

Profibus slot /lndex 168/65

Note! Bipolar reference mode ls activated if both RunR
and RunL is active. Fieldbus format lnt
Modbus format lnt

Example:
(See Emotron Fielbus manual for detalied information)
'We
would like to conrrol the AC drive over a bus sysrem
using the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message by
arso
il: r.T,H x,::^'J JL :J,?XlJ )!,!l,T ;# ;.Hil'
process value.This is done by setting menu
12662) FB Sign al 2 rc 42905 and menu 126631FB Sign al 3
rc 42906.

NOTE! lt is possible to view the transmitted plocess

value in control panel menu Operatlon [71O]. The
presented value is depending on settings in menus
Process Min l324land Process Max [325].

60 Serial communication Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

10.6 Description of the Elnt A signed number should be represented
omplement binary number, like below:
as a rwo

formats Value Binary

A parameter with Eint format can be represented in rwo
different formats (F). Either as a I 5 bit unsigned integer
-B 1000
format (F= 0) or a Emotron floating point format (F=1).
-1 10 01
The most significant bit (B 15) indicates the format used.
Seedetailed description below.
Allparameters written to a register may be rounded to the
-2 1 110
number of significant digits used in the internal system. -1 1111
0 0000
The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit word
1 0001
for the two different EInt formats:
2 0010

815 814 813 B12 811 BlO 89 BB 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 BO 6 0110

F:1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 1 0111
E:O B14 B13 BT2 B11 B1O 89 BB 87 86 85 84 83 B2 81 BO

The value represented by the Emotron floating point format

If the format bit (B I 5) is 0, then all bits may be treated as a
is m. 10e.
standard unsigned integer (UInt)
To convert a value from the Emotron floating point format
If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as this:
to a floating point value, use the formula above.
Value = M * 10^E, where M=ml0..m0 represenrs a
To convert a floating point value to the Emotron floating
rwo- complement signed mantissa and E= e3..e0 represents a
point format, see the C-code example below.
two- complement signed exponent.
Example, floating point format
The numbe r 1.23 would be represented by this in Emotron
floating point format,
NOTE: Parameters with Elnt format may return values
both as 15 bit unsigned int (F=O) or in Emotron floating
point (F=1).
F EEEE MMMMM}{MMMMM
1 1110 00001111011
Example, resolution E:-2
If you write the value 1004 to a register and this register has
M:723
3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000.
In the Emotron floating point format (F=l), one l6-bit The value is then 123x10-2 = 1.23
word is used to represent large (or very small numbers) with
3 signiftcant digits. Example 15bit unsigned int format
The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number
If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals)
number berwe en A427 67 , the I 5 bit Unsigned integer 72.k is within the range 0-32767,which means that the
format (F=0) may be used. 15-bit fixed point format may be used.
The value will then be represented as:
Detailed description of Emotron floating point
format
B15 B14 813 8]-2 B11 B1O 89 BB 81 86 85 84 83 82 81 BO
e3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. Gives a value 00000 00001 001000
range:
-8..+1 (binary 1000 .. 0111)
m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa. Gi-ves a value \7here bit l5 indicates that we are using the fixed point
range: format (F=0).
*1024..+1023 (binary
10000000000 . . 01111111111 )

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Serial communication 61

Programming example:

typedef struct
{
int m:L7; // mantissa, -L024..L023
int e: 4; // exponent -8..1
unsigned j-nt fz L; // format, 1->special emoint format
) eint16;
/ /________
unsigned short int float to elnt16(float value)
{
eintl 6 etmp;
int dec-0;
while (f loor (val-ue ) !: value && dec<16)
{
dec**; value*-1 0;
)
if (va1ue>:0 && vafue<:32767 Cc dec::0)
* (short int *) &etmp: (short int) value;
else if (val-ue>:-l-000 cc val-ue<0 && dec::0)
i
etmP. e:0,'
etmP. f:1;
etmp.m: (short int) value;
l
else
{
etmP. m:0;
etmP. f:1;
etmp.e:-dec;
if (value>:0)
etmp.m:1; // Set sign
else
etmp.m=-1-; // Set sign
value:fabs 1va1ue);
while (val-ue>1000 )
{
etmp.e++; // increase exponent
val-ue:vaIue/ 10;
]
value*:0.5; // round
etmp.m:etmp.m*val-ue; / / make signed
)
return (* (unsigned short int *) &etmp) ;
)
/ / ________
float eint16_to_f1oat (unsigned short int vafue)
{
float f;
eint16 evalue;
evalue:* (eint16 *) &va1ue;
if (evafue. f)
{
if (evalue.e):0)
f: ( int ) evalue .m*powl0 (evalue.e);
else
f: ( int ) evalue .m/powl0 (abs (eval-ue.e));
)
else
f -va l-ue ;

return f;

62 Serial communication Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

LL. Functional Description
This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the
software. You will find a short description of each function 100 ( 1st Line )
and information about default values, ranges, etc. There are StpE ( 2nd Line )
also tables containing communication information. You will
find the Modbus, DeviceNet and Fieldbus address for each Fig. 7I Display functions
parameter as well as the enumeration for the data.

L7..!..!. I.st Line t11OI

NOTE: Functions marked with the sign cannot be
changed durinEl Run Mode.
I Sets the content of the upper row in the menu
[100] Preferred View."

Description of table layout 110 1st Line

StpE Process VaI
lMenu no. Menu namel
se].ected va].uel Defa u lt: Process Val
lstatus Dependent on menu
Defa u lt:
Process Val 0 Process value
Selection or lnteger value of
Description Speed L Speed
ra nge selection
Torque 2 Torque

Process Ref 3 Process reference

Resolution of settings
Shaft Power 4 Shaft power
The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter
is 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed values which are El Power 5 Electrical power
presented with 4 significant digits. Thble 22 shows the rrent
Cu rrent 6 Cu
resolutions for 3 significant digits.
Output volt 7 Output voltage
Thble 22
Freq uency 8 Freq uency

3 Digit Resolution DC Voltage I DC voltage

0.01-9.99 0.01 Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature

10.0-99.9 0.1 Motor Temp * TI Motor temperature

100-999 T AC drive Sta-

T2 AC drive status
tus
1000-9990 10
Run Time 13 Run Time
10000-99900 100
Energy L4 Energy

Mains Time 15 Mains time

L1,.!. Preterred View [1OO]
This menu is displayed at every power-up. During * The "Motor temp" is only visible if you have the option
operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed PTC/PTI00 card installed and a PTl00 input is
when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. The selected in menul236l.
au.rromatic return function will be switched off when the
'tbggle and Stop k.y is pressed simultaneously. As default it Communication information

displays the actual current.

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43001
Profibus sloflindex L68/ 160
100 Orp
StpEI 0.0 Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

Menu [100], Preferred View displays the settings made in
menu [110], lst line, and [120] ,2nd line. See Fig.7l.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Fu nctiona I Description 63

LL.L.z 2nd Line [120] L7..2 Main Setup [2OO]
Sets the content of the lower row in the menu The Main Setup menu contains the mosr importanr serrings
[100] Preferred View. Same selection as in men,, [110]. to get the AC drive operational and ser up for the
application. It includes differenr sub menus concerning the
LzO 2nd Line control of the unit, motor data and prorection, utilities and
automatic resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneously
StpE Curren be adapted to build in options and show the required ser-
Defa ult I Current tings.

LL.2.L Operation t21OI

Selections concerning the used motor, AC drive mode,
control signals and serial communication are described in
this submenu and is used to set the AC drive up for the
application.

Language l21,Ll
Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the
language is set, this selection will not be affected by the Load
Default command.

zLL Langruage
StpE English
Defa u lt: English

English 0 English selected

Svenska L Swedish selected

Nederlands 2 Dutch selected

Deutsch 3 German selected

Fra nga is 4 French selected

Espa frol 5 Spanish selected

Pyccrufi 6 Russian selected

Ita lia no 7 Ita lia n selected

eesky 8 Czech selected

Turkish I Turkish selected

Communication i nformation

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43OLT

Profibus sloVindex L68/ !7O

Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt

64 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

 Select Motor 12L21 Refe re nce contro I l2L4l
This menu is used if you have more than one moror in your To control the speed of the motor, the AC drive needs a
application. Select the motor ro define. It is possible to reference signal. This reference signal can be controlled by
define up to four differenr morors, M1 to M4, in the AC remote source from the installation, rhe keyboard of the AC^
drive. drive, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select the
required reference control for the application in this menu.
2L2 Select Moto=
stpE! M1 2L4 Ref Control
StpEI Remote
Defa u lt: M1

M1 0 Defa u lt: Remote

M2 L The reference signal comes from the

Motor Data is connected to selected Remote o analogue inputs of the terminal strip
M3 2 motor.
(terminals L-22).
M4 3 Reference is set with the + and - keys on
Keyboard t the Control Panel. Can only be done in
Communication information menu SeVView reference t3101.

The reference is set via the serial

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 430L2 communication (RS 485, Fieldbus.)
Com 2
See section section 10.5 for further
Profibus slot/index 1:68/r77 information.
Fieldbus format U !nt The reference is set via an option. Only
Modbus format U lnt Option 3 available if the option can control the
reference value.

Drive Mode 12L31 NOTE: lfthe reference is switched from Remote to

This menu is used ro ser the control mode for the moror. Keyboard, the last remote reference value will be the
Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made in default value for the control panel.
menu Process source, L3Zt1.
o YlHz Mode (output speed l7tZ1 in rpm) .
Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 430!4

Profibus slot/index 1:68/773
2L3 Drive Mode
stpE! v/Hz Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt
Defa u lt: Y/Hz
All contro! loops are related to frequency
control. ln this mode multi-motor applica-
tions are possible.
NOTE: All the functions and menu
Y/Hz 2 read-outs with regard to speed and rpm
(e.9. Max Speed = 15OO rpffi, Min
Speed=O rpm, etc.) remain speed and
rpffi, although they represent the output
frequency.

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43013

Profibus slot/index 768/L72
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functiona I Description 65

Run/Stop Control 1215I Reset Control1216I
This function is used to select the source for run and stoP \7hen the AC drive is stopped due to a failure, a reset
commands. Start/stop via analogue signals can be achieved command is required to make it possible to restart the AC
by combining a few functions. This is described in the drive. Use this function to select the source of the reset
Chapte r 7 .2 page 37 . signal.

2L5 Run/Stp CtrI 2LG Reset Ctrl

StpEI Remote StpEI Remote
Defa u lt: Remote Defa ult: Remote

The start/stop si$nal comes from the digital The command comes from the inputs of
Remote 0
inputs of the terminal strip (terminals L-22), the terminal strip (terminals L-22).
Remote 0
For settings, see menu group [330] and
The command comes from the command
t5201. Keyboard 1,
keys of the Control Panel.
Keyboard 7 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel.
The command comes from the serial
The starVstop is set via the serial Com 2
communication (RS 485, Fieldbus).
communication (RS 485, Fieldbus.) See
Com 2 The command comes from the inputs of
Fieldbus or R5232/485 option manual for Remote +
deta ils. 3 the termina! strip (terminals L-22) or the
Keyb
keyboard.
Option 3 The start/stop is set via an option.
The command comes from the serial
Com +
4 communication (RS485, Fieldbus) or the
Com munication info rmation Keyb
keyboa rd.

43015 The command comes from the inputs of

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no:
Psrn+Keyb the terminal strip (terminals L-22), the
Profibus slot/index 1:68/!74 5
+Com keyboard or the serial communication
Fieldbus format U lnt (RS485, Fieldbus).

Modbus format U lnt The command comes from an option.

Option 6 Only available if the option can control
the reset command.

Communication informatio n

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43016

Profibus slot/index L68/ L75
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Fu nstional Description Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 Local/Remote key function l2LT)
The Toggle k.y on the keyboard, see section 9.2.5, page 54,
has nvo functions and is activated in this menu. As default
the key is just ser ro operare as a Toggle k.y that moves you
easily through the menus in the toggle loop. The second
function of the key allows you to easily swap berween Local
and normal operation (set up via l2l4) and lzlfl) of the AC
drive. Local mode can also be activated via a digitd inpur. If
both l2l7ll and l2l72l is set to Standard, the function is
disabled.
2L7L LocRefctill
StpEI Standar
Lock Code l2L8)
To prevent the keyboard being used or ro change the setup
of the AC drive and/or process control, the keyboard can be
locked with a password. This menu, Lock Code [218], is
used to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password
*291"
to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If the
keyboard is not locked (default) the selection "Lock Code?"
will appear. If the keyboard is already locked, the selection
"LJnlock Code?" will appear.
\Mhen the keyboard is locked, paramerers can be viewed
but
not changed. The reference value can be changed and the
AC drive can be started, sropped and reversed if these
functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard.

Defa u lt: Sta nda rd

zLA Lock Code
Standa rd 0 Local reference control set via l2L4l
stpfi 0
Remote 7 Local reference control via remote
Defa u lt: 0
Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard
Range: 0-9999
Com 3 Local reference control via communication

Communication information Rotation 12L91

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43009 Overall limitation of motor rotation direction
This function limits the overall rotarion, either ro left or
Profibus sloVindex 168/ 168 right or both directions. This limit is prior to all other
Fieldbus format U lnt selections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run-Left
command will be ignored. To define left and right rotarion
Modbus format Ulnt
we assume that the moror is connected U-U, V-V and \tr-\f.

Speed Direction and Rotation

2L72 LocRunCtrl The speed direction can be controlled by:
StpEI Standar . RunR/RunL commands on the control panel.
Defa u lt: Sta nda rd o RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip
Standard o Local Run/Stop control set via l2LSl (terminals I -22).

Remote L Local Run/Stop control via remote . Via the serial interface options.
Keyboa rd 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboard . The parameter sets.

Com 3 Local Run/Stop control via communication

Commun ication informati on

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43010

Profibus slot/index Right
168/L69
Fieldbus format lnt Left
U
*-.-
Modbus format Ulnt

Fig. 72 Rotation

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Functiona I Description 67

In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor. CAUTION!
Level controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the
Machine Directive if the inputs are dlrectly
2L9 Rotation
used to start and stop the machine.
stpE! R+L

Defa u lt: R+L NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the
Speed direction is limited to ri$ht
Machine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 51) if the
7 rotation. The input and key RunL are inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine.
R
disa bled.

L 2
Speed direction is limited to left rotation. L7,.2.3 Mains supply voltage t2LBl
The input and key RunR are disabled.

R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed. WARNING!

Com municati on information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no:
This menu must be set according to the AC
drlve product lable and the supply voltage
used. Wrong setting might damage the AC
drive or brake lesistor.
43019

Profibus slot/index 168/L78

In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected to
Fieldbus format Ulnt the AC drive can be selected. The setting will be valid for all
parameter sets. The default setting, Not defined, is never
Modbus format Ulnt
selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected.

Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not be

LL.2.2 Remote Si$nal Level/Edge affected by the Load Default command 12431.

t21AI Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting

In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for af l21Bl.
RunR, RunL and Reset that are oPerated via the digital
inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are default set for NOTE: The setting is affected by the Load from CP
level-control, and will be active as long as the input is made command [245] and if loading parameter file via
and kept high. \Mhen edge-control is selected, the input will EmoSoftGom.
be activated by the low to high transition of the input. See
Chapte r 7 .2 page 37 for more information.
18 Supply Vo1ts
StpEI Not defin
ZL,A Level/Edge
StpEI Leve1 Defa u lt: Not defined

lnverter default value used. Only valid if

Defa u lt: Level Not Defined 0
this parameter is never set.
The inputs are activated or deactivated
220-240V L Only valid for FDU48
by a continuous high or low signal. ls
Level o
commonly used if, for example, o PLC is 380-415 V 3 Only valid for FDU 48/52
used to operate the AC drive.
440-480 V 4 Only valid for FDU 48/52
The inputs are activated by a transition;
7 for Run and Reset from "low" to "high" 500-525 V 5 Only valid for FDU52/69
Edge
uhigh" to "low".
and for Stop from 550-600 v 6 Only valid for FDU69

660-690 V 7 Only valid for FDU69

Communication info rmation

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43020

Profibus slot/index L68/ L79 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43381

Fieldbus format Ulnt Profibus sloVindex L7O/3O
Modbus format U lnt Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OI-4428-O1r3

L7..2.4 Motor Data l220l Motor Frequency 12221
In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the AC drive Set the nominal motor frequency.
to the connected motor. This will increase the control
accuracy as well as different read-outs and analogue ourpur
signals.
222 Motor Freq
Motor M I motor data entered will
is selected as default and
3 stpEIMl: SoH,z
be valid for motor Ml. If you have more than one moror Defa ult 5O Hz
you need to select the correcr motor in men t lzl2] before
Range: 24-3OO Hz
entering motor data.
Resolution tHz
NOTE t The parameters for motor data cannot be
changed during run mode. Communicatio n information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43042

NOTE 2: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole
motor according to the nominal power of the Ac drive. Profibus slotlindex 168/2OL
Fieldbus format Long, t=! Hz
NorE 3: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if
Modbus format Elnt
the sets is set for different motors.

NOTE 4: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can Motor Power t223)
be revert to default setting in menu [243], Default)Set. Set the nominal motor power. If paralell motors, set the
value as sum of motors power.

WARNING!
Enter the correct motor data to prevent 223 Motor Power
dangerous situations and assule correct c StpEIMl : (PN9M) k
control.
Defa u !t: PNOMVSD

Motor Voltage l22Lj Range: LW-I2O% x Px6y

Set the nominal motor voltage. Resolution 3 significant digits

2L Motor Vo1ts NOTE: The Motor Power value wlll always be stored as a
c StpEMl: 400 3 diglt value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higher
powels.
400 V for FDU48
Defa u lt: 500 V for FDU52 Communication information
690 V for FDU69
Range: 100-700 v Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43043
Resolution 1V Profibus slot/index L68/2O2
Long,
Fieldbus format
NorE: The Motor volts value will always be stored as a 3 1=1 W
digit value with a resolution of 1V. Modbus format Elnt

Communication information PNou is the nominal AC drive power.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4304!

Profibus sloVindex 168/2OO

Long,
Fieldbus format
1=0.1 V
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB 01-4428-0113 Functiona I Description 69

Motor Current 12241 Motor Poles 12261
If paralell motors, set the \When the nominal speed of the motor is 3500 rpm, the
Set the nominal motor current.
value as sum of motors current. additional menu for entering the number of poles, 12261,
appears automatically. In this menu the actual pole number
can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the AC
224 Motor Curr drive.
0 StpEIMl: (Iuor)
Defa u lt: luor (see Note 2 page 69) 226 Motor Poles
Range: 25-I2O%xluorr,1
3 StpEMl: 4

Defa u lt: 4
Communication info rmation 2-744
Range:

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43044

Communication information
Profibus slot/index L68/2O3
Long, Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43046
Fieldbus format
1=0.1 A
Profibus sloVindex L68/2O5
Modbus format El nt
Fieldbus format Long, t=t pole

Modbus format El nt
NOTE: The default settlngs are for a standard 4-pole
motor according to the nominal power of the AC drlve.

Motor Cos g 12271

Motor Speed 12251 Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor).

Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed.

227 Motor Cos<p
25 Motor Speed 3 StpEIMl: CoseNou
c StpEIMl: (Duor)rpn Defa u lt: Cosgxsn,1 (see Note 2 page 69)
Defa u lt: nruor (see Note 2 page 69) Range: 0.50 - 1.00
Ra nge: 50 - 18000 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digits Communication informatio n

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43047

WARNING!
Do NOT enter a synchronous (no-load) motor Profibus sloVindex 1:68/206
speed. Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01

Modbus format Elnt

NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automatically
changed when the motor speed is changed.

NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a

dangerous situation for the driven application due to
high speeds.

Communicat ion information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43045

Profibus slot/index L68/2O4
Ulnt
Fieldbus format
L=7. rpm

Modbus format U lnt

70 Functional Description Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3

Motor ventilation 1228) Motor ldentification Run 12291
Parameter for setting the
flpe of motor ventilation. Affects This function is used when the AC drive is put into
the characteristics of the I't motor protection by lowering operation for the first time. To achieve an optimal control
the actual overload current at lower speeds. performance, fine tuning of the motor parameters using a
motor ID run is needed. During the test run the display
shows "Test Run" flashing.
228 Motor Vent
0 StpEIMl : SeJ.f To activate the Motor ID run, select "Short" and press
Enter. Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to
Defa u lt: Self start the ID run. If menu

None 0 Limited l2t overload curve. l2l9l Rotation is set to L the RunR k.y is inactive and vice
versa. The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stop command

Self T
Normat l2t overload curve. Means that the
motor stands lower current at low speed.
Expanded l2t overload curve. Means that the
Forced 2 motor stands almost the whole current also
at lower speed.
via the control panel or Enable input. The parameter will
automatically return to OFF when the test is completed.
The message "Test Run OKI" is displayed. Before the AC
drive can be operated normally again, press the STOP/
RESET k.y on the control panel.

During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate.
Communication information The AC drive measures the rotor and stator resistance.

Modbus Instance nolDeviceNet no: 43048

Profibus sloVindex !68/2O7
229 Motor ID-Run
Fieldbus format U lnt c StpEIMl: off
Modbus format U lnt
Defa u lt: Off, see Note

\ilfhen the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected and off 0 Not active
the current level is limited to 55o/o of rated moror currenr. Parameters are measured with injected DC
Short L
\With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected and current. No rotation of the shaft will occur.
the current for overload is limited to 87o/o from 20o/o of
synchronous speed. At lower speed, the overload current Communication information
allowed will be smaller.
tVhen the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43049
is
selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90o/o from Profibus slot/index !68/2O8
rated motor current at zero speed, up to nominal motor
Fieldbus format U lnt
current at 7Ao/o of synchronous speed.
Modbus format U lnt
Fig. 73 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal
Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation type
selected. NOTE: To run the AG drive it is not mandatory for the lD
RUN to be executed, but without it the performance will
not be optimal.
Xlnom for l2t

1.00
NOTE: lf the lD Run is aborted or not completed the
0.90
o.87 messa$e "lnterrupted!" will be displayed. The previous
data do not need to be changed in this case. Check that
the motor data are correst.
0.55

FiS. 73 12 t curues

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Funstional Description 7L

Motor Sound l22\l Encoder Pulses l22cl
sound characteristic of the AC drive output stage by
Sets the Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This
changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. Generally parameter describes the number of pulses per rotation for
the motor noise will go down at higher switching frequen- your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For more informa-
cies. tion please see the encoder manual.

22A Motor Sound 22C Enc Pu1ses

c stpEIMl: I stpfiMl: 1024
Defa u lt: F Defa u lt: LO24

E 0 Switching frequency 1.5 kHz Range: 5- 16384

F 7 Switching frequency 3 kHz

Com munication information
G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz

Switching frequency 6 kHz, random fre- Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43052
H 3
quency (+750 Hz)
Profibus sloVindex 168/2rL
Switching frequency and PWM mode Fieldbus format Long, t=7. pu lse
Adva nced 4
setup via l22E)
Modbus format Elnt

Com munication info rmation

Encoder Speed t22Dl
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43050 Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This
Profibus slot/index L68/2O9 parameter shows the measured motor speed. To check if the
encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder Feedb ack l22B] to
Fieldbus format U lnt
Off run the AC drive at any speed and compare with the
Modbus format U lnt value in this menu. The value in this menu l22Dl should be
about the same as the moror speed lll2).lf you get the
wrong sign for the value, swap encoder input A and B.
NOTE: At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may
become necessary. lf the heat slnk temperature gets too
h:gh the switching frequency is decreased to avoid 22D Enc Speed
tripping. This is done automatically in the AC drlve. The
default switching frequency is 3 kHz.
I stpEIMl :

Unit: rpm

Encoder Feedback Resolution: speed measured via the encoder

1228_1
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This
parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from the Communication information
motor to the AC drive.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 42917

22B- Encoder Profibus sloVindex 168/7O

0 stpEIMl: off Fieldbus format lnt

Defa u lt: off Modbus format lnt

off o Encoder feedback disabled

On L Encoder feedback ena bled

Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43051

Profibus sloVindex L68/2rO
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

72 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Motor PWM l22El PWM Random l22E3l
Menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties
P\KA4 = Pulse \7idth Modulation).
22E3 PWM Random
Stplil Off
PWM Fswitch l22E1l
Defa u lt: off
Set the P\XA4 switching frequency of the AC drive
off 0 Random modulation is Off.

Random modulation is active. Random fre-

22E1 PVilM Fswitch On T quency variation range is t 1,/8 of level set
StpFil 3.00kHz in lE22E1l.
Defa u lt: 3.00 kHz
Communication informatio n
Ra nge 1.50 - 6.00kHz

Resolution 0.01kHz Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43055

Profibus slot/index L68/214
Communication information
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43053 Modbus format U lnt
Profibus slot/index L68/2L2
Fieldbus format Long, t-t{z Encoder Pulse counter l22F)
Only visible if the Encoder option is installed. Added menu/
Modbus format El nt parameter for accumulated QEP (Quadrature Encoder
Pulse) encoder pulses. Can be preset to any value within bus
PWM Mode l22E2l format used (lnt - 2 byre, Long = 4 byte).

22E,2 PWM Mode 228 Enc Puls Ctr

StpIil Standard Stplil 0
Defa u lt: Sta nda rd Defa u lt: 0

Sta nda rd 0 Sta nda rd Resolutione L

Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine

Sine Filt L Communication informatio n
Filters

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 429L2

NOTE: Switching frequency is fixed when "Sine Filt" is
selected. This means that it is not possible to control the Profibus slot/index 768/7I
switching frequency based on temperature.
Long,7=tquad
Fieldbus format
encoder pulse
Communication information
Modbus format lnt

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43054

Notel For a LO24 pulse encoder l22Fl wlll count
Profibus slot/index 168/2r3 LO24 * 4= 4096 pulses per turn.
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Fu nctional Description 73

L7..2.5 Motor Protection t23OI Motor l2tCurrent 12321
This function protects the motor against overload based on Sets the current limit for the motor I2t protection.
the standard IEC 60947-4-2.

232 Mot t2t Curr

Motor lztType 123L1 stpEl 1008
The motor protection function makes it possible to protect
the motor from overload as published in the standard IEC Defa u lt: 1:OO% of lMs,
60947-4-2.It does this using Motor I2t Current, 1232) as a Ra nge: 0-150o/o of ln,1or
reference. The Motor I2t Tim e 1233) is used to define the
time behaviour of the function. The current set in 1232) can
Commun ication information
be delivered infinite in time. If for instance in 1233) a time
of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig. T4isvalid. The
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43062
value on the x-axis is the multiple of the current chosen in
lZ32). The time 1233) is the time that an overloaded motor Profibus sloVindex 168/22L
is switched off or is reduced in power at 1 .2 times the
Fieldbus format Long, L:to/o
current set in 1232).
Modbus format Elnt

23L Mot t2E Type

StpEIMl: rri NOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], the
value must be above the no-load current of the motot.
Defa u lt Trip

off 0 l2t motor protection is not active. Motor l2tTi me t233I

When the l2t time is exceeded, the AC Sets the time of the I2t function. After this time the limit for
Trip 7
drive will trip orl "Motor 121". the I2t is reached if operating with l20o/o of the I2t current
This mode helps to keep the inverter run- value. Valid when start from 0 rpm.
ning when the Motor l2t function is just
before tripping the AC drive. The trip is NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor.
replaced by current limiting with a maxi-
Limit 2
mum current level set by the value out of
the menul232l. ln this way, if the reduced
current can drive the load, the AC drive 233 Mot I't Time
continues running. stpEIMl: 60s
Defa u lt: 60s
Com munication information
Ra nge: 60- 1200 s
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43061

Profibus sloVindex 1:68/224 Commun ication information

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43063
Modbus format U lnt
Profibus stot/index L68/222
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
NOTE: When Mot l2t TYpe=Limit, the AC drlve can control
the speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor current. Modbus format Elnt

74 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 l

,
:

\"'' :

.\ \
\\ \\
\,,,,)L,.... \\
*}.rry*
\r,
\\:\ \
\\ \-

1"4 1.5 1.6 1-7

Actual output current/ l2t-current

Fig. 74 12 r function

Fig. 74 shows how the function integrates the square of the Menu 1234) PTC contains functions to enable or disable the
motor current according to the Mot I2t Curr 12321and the PTC input. Here you can select and activate PTC and/or
Mot I2t Tim e [233]. PT100.
tilfhen the selection Thip is set in men u 1231] the AC drive
trips if this limit is exceeded. 4 Thermal Prot
'When the selection Limit is set in men u
1231] the AC drive stpE! off
reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95a/o or closer to
Defa ult: off
the limit, so that the limit cannot be exceeded.
PTC and PT1O0 motor protection are
off 0
disabled.
NOTE: lf it is not possible to reduce the current, the AC
drive will trip after exceeding 11oo/o of the limit. Enables the PTC protection of the motor
PTC T
via the insulated option board.

Example Enables the PT1OO protection for the

PTlOO 2
In Fig. 74 rhe thick grey line shows the following example. motor via the insulated option board.
o Menu 1232) Mot I2t Curr is set to 1 00o/o. Enables the PTC protection as well as the
1.2 x l00o/o -- l20o/o p1Q+PT10C 3 PT10O protection for the motor via the
insulated option board.
. Menu 12331Mot I2t Time is set to 1000 s.
This means that the AC drive will trip or reduce after 1000 s Communication information
if the current is 1 .2 times of 100o/o nominal motor current.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43064
Therma I Protection 12341 Profibus sloVindex L68/223
Only visible if the PTC/PTI00 option board is installed. Set Fieldbus format Ulnt
the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor. The
motor thermistors (PTC) must comply with DIN 44081I Modbus format U lnt
44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PTI00
option board. NOTE: PTC option and PT1OO selections can only be
selected in menu 12341 lf the option board is mounted.

Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3 Funstional Description 75

 NOTE: lf you select the PTC option, the PT1OO inputs are PT100 lnputs 12361
ignored. Sets which of PTl00 inputs that should be used for thermal
protection. Deselecting not used PTl00 inputs on the PTC/
PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs, i.e.
Motor Class t2351 extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used.
Only visible if the PTC/PTI00 option board is installed. Set
the class of motor used. The trip levels for the PTl00 sensor
be set according to the setting in this 236 PT100 Inputs
;*,iltomatically srpE! Pr100 L+2+3
Defa u lt: PT10O L+2+3
235 Mot Class PT100 1, PT10O 2, PT1,00 7.+2, PT100
StpEI F 140"c Selection: 3, PT1O0 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT1O0
t+2+3
Defa u lt: F 1400C
PT100 1- L Channel 1 used for PT100 protection
A 100"c 0
PT100 2 2 Channel 2 used for PT1OO protection
E 1150C 7
PT100 t+2 3 Channel t+2 used for PT100 protection
B 1200C 2
PT100 3 4 Channel 3 used for PT100 protection
F 140"C 3
PT100 1+3 5 Channel 1+3 used for PT100 protection
F Nema 145"C 4
PT1O0 2+3 6 Channel 2+3 used for PT100 protection
H 165"C 5
Channel t+2+3 used for PT100 protec-
PT10O L+2+3 7
tion
Communication in fo rmation

Communication informatio n
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43065
Profibus sloVindex L68/224 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43066
Fieldbus format U lnt Profibus sloVindex L68/225
Modbus format U lnt Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt
NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 1OO.

NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 1OO thermal

protection if PT1OO is enabled in menu 12341.

76 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB 07-4428-0 1r3

Motor PTC 1237) L7,.2.6 Parameter Set Handling t240l
In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is There are four different parameter sets available in the AC
enabled. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081144082. drive. These parameter sets can be used to set the AC drive
Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PTIOO option board up for different processes or applications such as different
for electrical specification. motors used and connected, activated PID controller,
This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor <2 kohm) different ramp time settings, etc.
is
connected to terminals Xl :78-79. A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception
To enable the function:
of the Global parameters . The Global parameters are only
able to have one value for all parameter sets.
1 . Connect the thermistor wires to X1 : 78-79 or for testing Following parameters are Global: [2] 1] Language, l2l7)
the input, connect a resistor to the terminals. Use resistor Local Remot e, l2l 8l Lock Code , 12201 Motor Data, l24l)
value ber'ween 50 and 2000 ohm. Select Set, 12601 Serial Communication and [2lB]Mains
Menu 12371will now appear. Supply Voltage .

2. Enable input by setting ment 12371 Motor PTC=On.

NOTE: Actual timers are common for all sets. When a set
If enabled and <50 ohm a sensor error trip will occur. The is changed the timer funstionality will change accordlng
message "Motor PTC" is shown. to the new set, but the timer value will stay unchanged.
If the function is disabled and the PTC or resistor is
removed, the menu will disappear after the nexr power up
Select Set l24I)
Here you select the parameter set. Every menu included in
NOTE: This optlon ls available only for (size B to D)
the parameter sets is designated A, B, C or D depending on
FDU48/ 52-OO3-O74.
the active parameter set. Parameter sets can be selected from
the keyboard, via the programmable digital inputs or via
237 Motor PTC serial communication. Parameter sets can be changed during
the run. If the sets are using different motors (M I to M4)
stpfiI off the set will be changed when the motor is stopped.
Defa u lt: off
off 0 Motor PTC protection is disabled 24L Select Set
On L Motor PTC protection is enabled
srpE
Defa u lt: A
Communication information
Selection A, B, C, D, Digln, Com, Option

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43067 A 0

Profibus sloVindex 768/226 B L Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter

C 2 sets A, B, C or D.
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt D 3

Parameter set is selected via a digital

Digln 4 input. Define which digital input in menu
[520], Digital inputs.
Parameter set is selected via serial
Com 5
communication.
The parameter set is set via an option.
Option 6 Only available if the option can control the
selection.

Communication i nformatio n

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43022

Profibus slot/index L68/ 181
Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Fu nctional Description 77

The active set can be viewed with functio n l72l) FI status. Load Default Values lnto Set 12431
\7ith this function three different levels (factory settings)
NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if can be selected for the four parameter sets.
'When loading
this also would imply a change of the motor set (M2- the default settings, all changes made in the software are set
M4). to factory settings. This function also includes selections for
loading default settings to the four different Motor Data
Sets.
Copy Set 12421
This function copies the content of a parameter set into
another parameter set.
243 Defau].tlset
srpE
242 Copy Set Defa u lt: A
stpE! A>B A 0

Defa u lt: A>B B t Only the selected parameter set will revert
C 2 to its default settings.
A>B 0 Copy set A to set B

A>C 1, Copy set A to set C D 3

A>D 2 Copy set A to set D All four parameter sets will revert to the
ABCD 4
default settings.
B>A 3 Copy set B to set A
All settings, except l21.I), 122!1-l22Dl,
B>C 4 Copy set B to set C Factory 5 t26Ll and [9231, will revert to the default
B>D 5 Copy set B to set D settings.

C>A 6 Copy set C to set A M1 6

C>B 7 Copy set C to set B M2 7 Only the selected motor set will revert to its

C>D 8 Copy set C to set D M3 8 default settings.

D>A I Copy set D to set A M4 9

D>B 10 Copy set D to set B All four motor sets will revert to default
ML234 10
settings.
D>C lT Copy set D to set C

Communication information
Communication info rmation

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43023

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4302L
Profibus sloVindex L68/L82
Profibus sloVindex 168/ 180
Fieldbus format U lnt
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt

NOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus
NOTE: The actual value of menu [310J will not be copied are not regarded as settings and will be unaffested.
into the other set.

A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copied NOTE: lf "Factory" is selected, the message "Sure?" is
displayed. Press the + key to display "Yes" and then
into parameter set B.
Enter to confirm.

NOTE: The parameters in menu [220], Motor data, are

not affested by loadlng defaults when restoring
parameter sets A-D.

78 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Copy All Settings to Control Panel12441 Load Settings from Control Panel 12451
All the settings
can be copied into the control panel This function can load all four parameter sets from the
including the motor data. Start commands will be ignored control panel to the AC drive. Parameter sets from the
during copying. source AC drive are copied to all parameter sets in the target
AC drive, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D.
244 Copy to CP Start commands will be ignored during loading.

0
StpEI No copy
Defa lt: No Copy
45 Load from CP
u

I StpEI No Copy
No Copy o Nothing will be copied
Defa lt: No Copy
copy ! Copy all settings
u

No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded.

Com munication information A 1, Data from parameter set A is loaded.

B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43024
C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded.
Profibus sloflindex 1:68/783
D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded.
Fieldbus format U lnt
Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D are
Modbus format U lnt ABCD 5
loaded.

Parameter set A and Motor data are

NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied A+MOt 6
loaded.
into control panel memory set.
Parameter set B and Motor data are
B+MOt 7
loaded.

Parameter set C and Motor data are

C+Mot 8
loaded.

Parameter set D and Motor data are

D+MOt 9
loaded.

Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data

ABCD+Mot 10
are loaded.
M1 1,L Data from motor 1 is loaded.

M2 T2 Data from motor 2 is loaded.

M3 13 Data from motor 3 is loaded.

M4 L4 Data from motor 4 is loaded.

M1M2M3
M4
15 Data from motor t, 2,3 and 4 are loaded.

Ail 16 All data is loaded from the control panel.

Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43025

Profibus sloVindex ]L68/L84
Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt

NOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect the
value in menu [31O].

Emotron AB 0!-4428-0113 Funstional Description 79

L7..2.7 Tri p Autores et/Trip Conditions Example:
. Autoreset = 5
[250] . 'Within 10 minures 6 trips occur
The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not
affect the process will be automatically reset. Only when the o At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because the
failure keeps on coming back, recurring at deftned times and Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already.
therefore cannot be solved by the AC drive, will the unit give
. To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input high to
an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required.
low and high again to maintain the Autoreset function.
For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you The counter is reset.
can select to control the motor down to zero speed according
to set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer.
25L No of Trips
Also see section 12.2, page 170. stpflI 0
Autoreset example:
Defa ult: 0 (no Autoreset)
In an application it is known that the main supply voltage
sometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called "dip". Range: 0- 10 attempts
That will cause the AC drive to trip an "l.Jndervoltage
alarm". Using the Autoreset function, this trip will be Communication information
acknowledged automatically.
. Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 4307L
continuously high. Profibus sloVindex L68/23O
. Activate the Autoreset function in the menu l25ll, Fieldbus format U lnt
Number of trips.
Modbus format Ulnt
. Select in menus 12521 to [25N] the Thip condition that
are allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoreset
function after the set delay time has expired. NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp
time.

Number of Trips l25Ll

Ary number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This means Over temperature t2521
'$7'hen
that after a trip, the AC drive will restart automatically Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. the
according to the number of attempts selected. No restart time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
attempts will take place unless all conditions are normal. is active.

If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more trips

than the selected number of attempts, the Autoreset cycle 252 Overterrp
will be interrupted. No Autoreset will then take place.
stpE! off
If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoreset
counter decreases by one. Defa u lt: off

If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the trip off 0 off
message hour counter is marked with an '?\". 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

If the Autoreset is full then the AC drive must be reset by

"
normal Reset. Com munication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43072

Profibus sloVindex L68/23L
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s

Modbus format Elnt

NOTE: An auto reset ls delayed by the remaining ramp

time.

80 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Overvolt D t253I Overvolt t2551
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. tVhen the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. tWhen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.

253 Overvolt D 255 Overvolt

stpE! off stpE off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off 0 off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information Comm un ication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43077

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43075
Profibus slot/index L68/236
Profibus slot/index 1:68/234
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus format Elnt
Modbus format El nt

NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp Motor Lost t2561
time. Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active.
Overvolt G 1254)
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the 256 Motor Lost
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active.
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off
254 Overvolt G off o off
stpE! off 1-3600 1-3600 1-36O0 s

Defa u lt: off

off o off NOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected in menu
14231.
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information
Communication information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43083
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43076
Profibus sloVindex 1:68/242
Profibus sloVindex L68/235
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus format El nt
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functiona I Description 81

Locked Rotor 12571 Undervoltage [259]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. \Mhen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.

257 Locked Rotor 259 UndervoJ.tagre

stpE! off stpE off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off o off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information Com munication information

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43086 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43088
Profibus slot/index L68/245
Profibus sloVindex 768/247
Field bus format Long, 1-1 s
Field bus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus format Elnt
Modbus format El nt

Power Fault t2581

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active.
Motor l2tt25Al
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. \7hen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active.

258 Power Fau1t

stpE! off 25A LIotor I't
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off
off o off Defa u lt: off

1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1--3600 s
Com munication information
Com munication information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43087
Profibus slot/index 768/246 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43073

Field bus format Long, 1=1 s Profibus slot/index L68/232

Modbus format El nt Field bus format Long, 1:1 s

Modbus format El nt

Motor l2tTrip Type t25Bl

Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I2t trip.

25B Motor t2t TT

stpE! rrip
Defau lt: Trip

Trip 0 The motor will trip

Deceleration L The motor will decelerate

82 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Communication information Prc [25E]
'W'hen
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. the
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43074 time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
Profibus sloVindex 1:68/233 is active.

Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format lnt
25E PTC
U
stpE! off
lt: off
Pr100 t25cl Defa u

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. \7hen the off 0 off
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s
is active.

Com munication information

25C PT100
stpE! off Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43084
Profibus sloVindex 168/243
Defa u lt: off
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
off 0 off
Modbus format El nt
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information PTC Tri p Type t25Fl

Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43078
Profibus sloVindex !68/237 25r. PTC TT
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s stpE! rrip
Modbus format El nt
Defa u lt: Trip

Selection: Same as menu [25B]

PT1-00 Trip Type t25Dl
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. tWhen the Com munication information
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43085
Profibus slot/index 168/244
25D PT1OO TT
Fieldbus format Ulnt
StpE Tri
Modbus format U lnt
Defa u lt: Trip

Selection: Same as menu [258]

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43079

Profibus sloVindex L68/238
Fieldbus format Uint

Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functiona I Description 83

External Trip t25cl Communication Error [251]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. W'lren the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. \Mhen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.

25G Ext Trip 25f Com Error

stpE! off stpfi off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off 0 off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information Communicatio n information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43080 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43089
Profibus sloVindex L68/239 Profibus slot/index 168/248
Fieldbus format Long, 1:1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format El nt Modbus format El nt

External Trip Type t25HI Cornmunication Error Trip Type l25Jl

Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip. Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip.

25H Ext Trip TT 25J Com Eruor TT

StpE Tri stpE! rrip
Defa ult: Trip
Defa u lt: Trip
Selection: Same as menu [258]
Selection: Same as menu [258]

Com munication information

Commun ication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43081

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43090
Profibus sloVindex 768/24O
Profibus sloVindex !68/24e
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

84 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB 0!-4428-0113

Min Alarm [25K] Max Alarm l25MI
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. til7hen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.

5K Min A1arm 25M I'Iax Alarm

stpE off stpE! off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off 0 off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43091 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43093
Profibus sloVindex L68/250 Profibus sloVindex 768/252
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format El nt Modbus format Elnt

Min Alarm Trip Type [251] Max Alarm Trip Type t25Nl
Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip. Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip.

5L Min Alarm TT 25N tlax A1arm TT

StpE Trip stpE! rri
Defa u lt: Trip lt: Trip
Defa u

Selection: Same as menu [25B] Selection: Same as menu [258]

Commun ication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43092 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43094
Profibus slot/index 768/25r Profibus sloVindex 1:68/253
Fieldbus format U lnt
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functiona I Description 85

Over current F t25ol Over Speed t25QI
'When
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. \7hen the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.

25O Over curr F 25Q Over speed

stpE! off stpE! off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off 0 off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43082 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43096
Profibus slot/index 168/24r Profibus slot/index 1:69/O

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s

Modbus format El nt Modbus format Elnt

Pump t25Pl External Motor Temperature [25R]

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. tVhen the Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. Vhen
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the
is active. function is active.

25P Pump 25R Ext Mot Temp

stpE! off stpfi off
Defa u lt: off Defa u lt: off
off 0 off off 0 off
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s 1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Comm unication in formation Communication i nformation

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43095 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43097
Profibus slot/index 168/254 Profibus sloVindex L68/239
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s

Modbus format Elnt Modbus format Elnt

86 Functional Description Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

 External Motor Trip Type t25sl Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U]
Select the preferred way ro reacr ro an alarm trip. Select the preferred way ro reacr ro an alarm trip.

25S Ext Mot TT 25U LC Leve]. TT

stpE! rrip stpE! rri
Defa ult: Trip Defa u lt: Trip

Selection: Same as menu [25B] Selection: Same as menu [258]

Communication in formation Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43098 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43100
Profibus sloVindex L68/240 Profibus sloflindex 169/4
Fieldbus format U lnt Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt

Liquid cooling low level l25Tl Brake Fault t25vl

Delay time srarts counting when the fault disappears. \[hen Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip, activate
the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the auto reset and specift delay time.
fi.rnction is active.

25V Brk Fau1t

25T LC Leve1 StpEl off
stpfi off Defa u lt off
Defa u lt: off
off o Autoreset not activated.
off 0 off
1- 3600s 1 - 36OOs Brake fault auto reset delay time.
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s

Communication information
Communication information
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43070
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43099 Profibus sloVindex 768/22e
Profibus sloVindex L69/3 Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus format El nt
Modbus format Elnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functional Description 87

L7..2.8 Serial Communication [260] Address [2622]
Enter the unit address for the AC drive.
This function is to define the communication parameters for
serial communication. There are two ryPes of options
available for serial communication, RS2321485 (Modbus/ NOTE: This address ls only used for the isolated R5232/
RTU) and fieldbus modules (Profibus, DeviceNet and 485 option.
Ethernet).
For more information see chapter Serial communication and
respective option manual.
2622 Address
stpE! 1

Comm Type 126ll Defa u lt: 1,

Select RS232 1485 1262) or Fieldbus 1263). Selection: 7-247

26L Com Tree Fieldbus t2631

3 stpEI RS 232 / 48s Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus
Press
communication.
Defa u lt: R5232/48s
R5232/485 0 R5232/485 selected
263 Fieldbus
Fieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet or STPET
Fieldbus 7
Modbus/TCP)

Address [2631]
NOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a
soft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module. Enter the unit address of the AC drive.

263L Address
RS232/485 1262) stpE! 62
Enter to set up the parameters for RS2321485
Press
(Modbus/RTU) communicatiotr. Defa u lt: 62
Range: Profibus 0- L26, DeviceNet 0-63
262 RS232/485 Node address valid for Profibus and DeviceNet
stp
Process Data Mode 12632)
Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further
Baud rate 1262L) information, see the Fieldbus option manual.
Set the baud rate for the communication.

NOTE: Thisbaud rate is only used for the isolated

2632 PrData Mode
RS.232/485 option. StpEI Basic
Defa u lt: Basic
262L Baudrate None 0 Control/status information is not used.
stpE! e600
4 byte process data control/status
Basic 4
Defa u lt: 9600 information is used.

2400 o 4 byte process data (same as Basic

Extended 8 setting) + additional proprietary protocol
4800 T
for advanced users is used.
9600 2 Selected baud rate
19200 3
38400 4

88 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB AI-4428-01r3

Read/Write [2633] Communication Fault 1264)
Select read/write to control the inverrer over a fieldbus
Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. For
network. For further informarion, see the Fieldbus option further details please see the Fieldbus option manual.
manual.
Communication Fault Mode 12641-l)
2633 Read/Wrlte Selects action if a communication fault is detected.

StPE
264L ComFIt Mode
Defa u lt: RW stpE! off
RW o
Defa u lt: off
Read 7
off 0 No communication supervision.
Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging
process without writing process data. Select RW in normal RS232 / 485 selected:
cases to control inverter. The AC drive will trip if there is no
communication for time set in parameter
126421.
Additional Process Values 126341 Fieldbus selected:
Trip L
Define the number of additional process values senr in cyclic The AC drive will trip if:
messages. 1. The internal communication between
the control board and fieldbus option is
lost for time set in parameter 126421.
2634 AddPrVa1ues 2. lf a serious network error has occurred.
stpE! 0 RS232 / 485 selected:
The AC drive will give a warning if there is
Defa u lt: o
no communication for time set in
Range: o-8 parameter [26421.
Fieldbus selected:
Warning 2
The AC drive will give a warning if:
1. The internal communication between
the control board and fieldbus option is
lost for time set in parameter !p6a21.
2. lf a serious network error has occurred.

NOTE: Menu l2L4l and/or t2151 must be set to COM to

astivate the communication fault function.

Commun ication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43037

Profibus slot/index !68/re6
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Funstiona I Description 89

Communication Fault Time t26421) Gateway 126541
Deftnes the delay time for the trip/warning.
2654 Gateway
2642 ComFIt Time 0. 0. 0. 0
StpEI 0.5s
Default: I 0.0.0.0
Defa u lt: 0.5 s

Ra nge: 0.1-15 s DHCP [2655]

Communication info rmation 2655 DHCP

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43038

stpE! off
Profibus slot/index L68/Le7 Defa u lt: off

Long, 1=0,1 s
Selection: On/Otf
Fieldbus format

Modbus format Elnt

Fieldbus Signals t266I
Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. For
Ethernet t2651 further information, see the Fieldbus option manual.
Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP). For further
information, see the Fieldbus option manual. FB Signal 1 - LG 126611-[266G]
Used to create a block of parameters which are read/written
NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted to via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameters
activate the below settings. For example by toggling possible.
parameter [26{. Non-initialized settings indicated by
flashlng display text.
66L FB Signal. 1

lP Address [2651]
stpE! 0

Defa u lt: 0
51 IP Address Ra nge: 0-65535
0. 0. 0. 0
Commun ication information
Default I 0.0.0.0

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4284L-4281:6

MAC Address [2652) Profibus sloVindex 167 /2L5-L67 /23O
Fieldbus format U lnt
2652 !,IAC Address Modbus format U lnt
stp8!000000000000
Default I An unique number for the Ethernet module. FB Status t2691
Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please see
Subnet Mask [2653] the Fieldbus manual for detailed information.

2653 Subnet Mask 269 FB Status

0. 0. 0. 0 stp
Default I 0.0.0.0

90 Fu nctional Descri ption Emotron AB Ot-4428-01r3

 11.3 Process and Application Commun ication information

Parameters [3OO] Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 42991,

These paramerers are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum
Profibus slot/index 168/r5O
process or machine performance.
Fieldbus format Long
The read-out, references and actual values depends on
selected process source, l32tl: Modbus format Elnt

Table 23
NOTE: The actual value in menu [3tO] ls not copied, or
SeleEted process Unit for reference and loaded from the control panel memory when Gopy Set
source Resolution 12421, Copy to CP 12441or Load from CP 12451 is
actual value
performed.
Speed rpm 4 digits
Torque o/
/o 3 digits
NorE: lf the MotPot func-'tion is used, the reference value
OC
PTlOO 3 digits ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot t333] and
Freq uency Hz 3 digits Dec MotPot t334] settings. Actua! speed ramp will be
limited according to Acc Time t33q and Dec Time [332J.

L1,.3.1 Set/View Reference Value NOTE: Write access to this parameter is only allowed
t310I when menu "Ref Gontrol I2L41is set to Keyboard. When
Reference control is used, see sestlon "1o.s Reference
View reference value signal" on page 6O
As default the menu [3 t O1 is in view operation. The value of
the active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayed
according to selected process source, l3zt] o. the process L1'3.2 Process Settings t320I
unit selected in menu 'sflith
1322]. these functions, rhe AC drive can be ser up to fit the
application. The menus [110], [120], [310], [3e 4-068)
Set reference value and lzttl use the process unit selected in l3zll and l3zz1
If the function Reference Control L2l4] is ser ro for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3lh. This makes it
"Keyboard", the reference value can be set in menu Set/View
possible to easily ser up the AC drive for the required process
Referen.. [310] or as a moror potentiometer with the + and requirements, as well as for copying the range of a feedback
- keys (default) on the control panel. Selection is made with sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximum
parameter Keyboard Reference Mode in menu 136gl. The in order to establish accurare acrual process information.
ramp times used when setting rhe reference value with
MotPot, function selected in 136g] are according ro menus
Acc MotPo r 1333) and Dec MotPo t 13341. Process Source l321-l
The ramp times used for the reference value when Normal Select the signal source for the process value that controls
function is selected in men u 13691, are according ro Acc the motor. The Process Source can be set to act as a function
Time l33ll and Dec Time l3lZ). of the process signal on AnIn F(AnIrr), a function of the
Menu [3 t O1 displays on-line the actual reference value motor speed F(Speed), , function of the shaft torque
according to the Mode Settings in Thbl e 23. F(Torque) or as a function of a process value from serial
communication F(Bus). The right function ro select
depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process.
310 Set./VLew ref If the selection Speed, Torque or Frequency is ser, the AC
Stp 0 drive will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value.
Defa u lt: 0 rpm
Example
Process Source t321-l and Process Unit An axial fan is speed-conrrolled and there is no feedback
Dependent on:
[3221 signal available. The process needs to be controlled within
Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] fixed process values in "m3/hr" and a process read-out of the
air flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is rhat the air
Torque mode 0 - max torque [351J
flow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selecting
Min according to men u 13241- max accord- F(Speed) as the Process Source, the process can easily be
Other modes
ing to menu [325] controlled.
The selection F(xx) indicates rhat a process unit and scaling
is needed, set in men vs 1322)-32A1. This makes it possible
to e.g. use pressure sensors ro measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Fu nctiona I Description

selected, the source is automatically connected to the AnIn Process Unit 13221
which has Process Value as selected.

322 Proc Unit

32L Proc Source STPET
stpfiI Spee
Defa u lt: rpm
Defa u lt: Speed
off 0 No unit selection
Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID ,/o
F(Anln) o L Percent
control, [330].
"C 2 Degrees Centigrade
Speed T Speed as process referencel
"F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit
PTlOO 3 Temperature as process reference.
bar 4 bar
F(Speed) 4 Function of speed
Pa 5 Pasca I

F(Bus) 6 Function of com munication reference

Nm 6 Torque
Freq uency 7 Frequency as process referencel
Hz 7 Freq uency

l. O,rly when Drive mode l2l3) is set to Speed or Y lHz. rpm 8 Revolutions per minute

m3/h 9 Cubic meters per hour

NOTE: When PT1OO is selected, use PTTOO channel 1on gavn 10 Gallons per hour
the PTCIPTI.OO option board.
fts/n LT Cubic feet per hour
User L2 User defined unit
NOTE: lf Speed, Torque or Frequency ls chosen in menu
t3211 Proc Source, menusl322l- [328] are hidden.
Communication information

NOTE: The motor control method depends on the Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43303
selection of drive mode [213], regardless of selected
process source, [321]. Profibus slot/index L69/2O7

Fieldbus format U lnt

NOTE: lf F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321]see section Modbus format U lnt

10.5,1 Process value.

Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43302

Profibus sloVindex L69/206
Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB A!-4428-0113

 User-defined Unit t323I No. for serial No. for seria!
Character Character
This menu is only displayed if user is selected in menu comm. comm.
l3ZZ1. The function enables the user to define a unit with six
e 48 97
symbols. Use the Prev and Next k.y ro move the cursor ro
required position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll down e 49 98
the characrer list. Confirm the character by moving the f 50 ? 99
cursor to the nexr position by pressing the Next k"y. 51 100
e @

h 52 n
101
No. for serial No. for serial
Character Gharacter I 53 LO2
comm. comm.
o
I 54 103
Space 0 m 58
2
) 55 IO4
0-9 1- 10 n 59
k 56 3
105
A T7 n 60
57
B L2 o 61
C 13 o 62 Example:
D T4 o 63 Create a user unit named kPa.
E 15 p 64 1 . \7hen in the menu 1323] press Next ro move the cursor
F 76 q 6s to the right mosr position.
G t7 r 66 2. Press the + k.y until the characrer k is displayed.
H 18 S 67
3. Press Next.
19 t 68
4. Then press the + k.y until P is displayed and confirm
J 20 u 69 with Nexr.
K 27 u 70
5. Repeat until you have entered kPa.
L 22 V 7T
M 23 w 72
323 User Unit
N 24 X 73
SIPET
o 25 v 74
P 26 z 75 Default: I tt,to characters shown
o
a 27 a 76
Communicatio n information
R 28 a 77
S 29 o 78
43304
T 30 ! 79 43305
U 31 80 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no:
43306
43307
U 32 # 81 43308
V 33 $ 82 43309
W 34 o/
/o 83 L69/2O8
X 35 & 84 L69/zoe
Y 36 Profibus slot/index L6e/2LO
85
L69/277
Z 37 ( 86 L69/272
A 38 ) 87 L69/2L3
A 39 * 88 Fieldbus format U lnt
o 40 + 89 Modbus format Ulnt
a 4T 90
a 42 \When sending a unit name you send one character at a time
91
b 43 starting at the right mosr position.
92
c 44 / 93
d 45 94
e 46 95
e 47 96

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Fu nctional Description

 Com mun ication information
Process Min 13241
This function sets the minimum process value allowed.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 433L2
Profibus sloVindex L69/216
324 Process Min
stpE! 0 Fieldbus format U

Ulnt
lnt

Modbus format
Defa u lt: 0

0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed),

Range: F(Torque)) Process
-10000- +10000 (F(Anln, PT10O, F(Bus)) unit
Process
Max
[325]
Com mun ication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43310

Profibus slot/index L6e/21.4

Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001

Modbus format El nt

Ratio=Quadratic
Process Max t3251
This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency is

selected. The function sets the value of the maximum

process value allowed.
Min Max
Speed SPeed
t3411 t3431

325 Process t'Iax Fig. 75 Ratio

STPET 0

Defa u lt: o F(Value), Process Min 13271

Range: o.ooo-10000 This function is used for scding if no sensor is used. It offers
you the possibiliry of increasing the process accuracy by
scaling the process values. The Process values are scaled by
Commun ication info rmation
linking them to known data in the AC drive. \7ith F(Value),
Proc Min 13271the precise value at which the entered
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 433L!
Process Min l3Z+1is valid can be entered.
Profibus sloVindex 169/2L5
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001 NOTE: lf Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu
t321] Proc Source, menus [322]- t3281 are hidden.
Modbus format Elnt

327 F (VaI) Prt'Iin

Ratio t3261 stpE! Mi
This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque is
selected. The function sets the ratio berween the actual Defa u lt: Min
process value and the motor sPeed so that it has an accurate
According to Min Speed setting in
process value when no feedback signal is used. See Fig.75. Min _L
t3411.
According to Max Speed settin$ in
326 Ratio Max -2
t3431.
StpEI Linear 0.000-10000 o-10000 0.000-10000
Defa u lt: Linear
Communication informatio n
Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torque
Process is quadratic related to speed/ Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43313
Quadratic L
torq ue
Profibus slot/index L69/2L7
Fieldbus format Long, L=7- rpm

Modbus format Elnt

Funstional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 F(Value), Process Max t3281
This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers
F(Value)
you the possibiliry of increasing the process accurac y by PrMax 1500
scaling the process values. The process values are scded by [328]
linking them to known data in the AC drive. 'S7ith F(Value),
Proc Max the precise value at which the entered Process Max
1525) is valid can be entered.

NOTE: lf speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu

lS2Ll Proc source, menus [322]- 13281 are hidden.
F(Value
PrMin 150

328 F (va1) PiMax 1327)

STPET
10 1OO
Defa u lt: Max process Max [32b]
Process Min [324]
Min -L Min
Fig. 76
Max -2 Max

0.000-
10000
0-10000 0.000-10000 L1'3.3 Staft/Stop settings t33OI
Submenu with all the functions for accelerarion,
deceleration, starting, stopping, etc.
Commun ication inforrnation

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4331.4 Acceleration Time t331I

The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the
Profibus slot/index L69/2r8
motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal moror speed.
Fieldbus format Long, 7=7 rpm
Modbus format El nt NOTE: lf the Acc Tlme is too short, the motor is
accelerated according to the Torque Llmit. The astual
Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value
Example set.
A conveyor belt is used ro rranspom bottles. The required
bottle speed needs to be within 10 to I 00 bottles/s. Process
characteristics: 331 Acc Time
l0 bottles/s = 150 rpm StpEI 10.0s
100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm
The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the Defa u lt: 10.0 s
conveyor belt. Ra nge: 0.50-3600 s

Set-up:
Communication information
Process Min 13241 = 10
Process Max 13251 = 100
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43LOL
Ratio ?Zq = linear
F(Value), ProcMin 13271 = 150 Profibus slot/index r6e/5
F(Vhlue), ProcMax l3Zt1 = 1500
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
\with this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked to
Modbus format El nt
known values which results in an accurare control.

Fig. 77 shows the relationship bemeen nominal motor

speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The same is
valid for the deceleration time.

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Fu nctiona I Description

 Acceleration Ti me Motor Potentiometer
rpm
I3331
It is possible to control the speed of the AC drive using the
Nominal
tOOr. motor potentiometer function. This function controls the
Speed "rrl
speed with separate up and down commands, over remote
signals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settings
Max Spee6l 8o% nv61
which can be set in Acc MotPot 1333) and Dec MotPot
ltt+1.
If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration
time for the MotPot up command. The acceleration time is

defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer

value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed.

(06-F12)

333 Acc MotPot

Fig, 77 Acceleration time artd mdximum speed
StpEI 16.0s
Fig. 78 shows the seftings of the acceleration and Defa u lt: 16.0 s
deceleration times with resPect to the nominal motor speed.
Range: 0.50-3600 s

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43103

Profibus sloVindex L6e/7

Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s

Modbus format Elnt

Acc Time [331] Dec Time t3321

(NG_oGF',lr) Deceleration Ti me Motor Potentiometer
Fig. 7S Acceleration dnd deceleration times t3341
If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration
time for the MotPot down command. The deceleration time
Deceleration Time t3321 is defined as the time it takes for the motor Potentiometer
The deceleration time is deftned as the time it takes for the value to decrease flrom nominal speed to 0 rpm.
motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm.

334 Dec MotPot

332 Dec Time StpEI 16.0s
StpE 10.0s
Defa u lt: 16.0 s
Defa u lt: 10.0 s
Range: 0.50-3600 s
Ra nge: 0.50-3600 s

Communication information
Com mun ication i nformation
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43LO4
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L42
Profibus sloVindex L6e/8
Profibus slot/index L69/6
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01
Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.01 s
Modbus format El nt
Modbus format Elnt

NOTE: lfthe Dec Time is too short and the generator

energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, the
motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit.
The actual deceleration time may be longer than the
value set.

Fu nctional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 Acceleration Time to Minimum speed Deceleration Time from Minimum
t335I Speed t3361
If minimum speed, l34t]>0 rpm, is used in an applicarion, If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be
the AC drive uses separare ramp times below this level. \7ith used to set the deceleration time from the minimum speed
Acc>MinSpeed 1335) and DeccMinSpeed Blel you can ser to 0 rpm at a srop command. The ramp time is defined as
the required ramp times. short times can be used ro prevenr the time it takes for the moror ro decelerate from the
damage and excessive pump wear due too little lubrication at nominal moror speed to 0 rpm.
lower speeds. Longer times can be used to fill up a sysrem
smoothly and prevenr warer hammer due to rapidly
exhausting air from the pipe sysrem. 336 Dec{vIin Spd
If a Minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be
StpEI 10.0s
used to ser the acceleration time to the minimum speed at a Defa ult: 10.0 s
run command. The ramp time is defined as the time it takes
for the motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor Range: 0.50-3600 s
speed.
Communication information

335 AcclMin-EFcI Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no:

StpEI 10.0s 43106
Profibus sloVindex 769/rO
Defa u lt: 10.0 s
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Ra nge: 0.50-3600 s
Modbus format Elnt

Communication information
Acceleration Ramp Type t3371
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43105 Sets the rype of all the acceleration ramps in a paramerer ser.
Profibus slot/index See Fig. 80. Depending on the acceleration and deceleration
76e/e
requiremenrs for the application, the shape of both the
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 ramps can be selected. For applications where speed changes
Modbus format Elnt need to be started and stopped smoothly, such as a conveyor
belt with materials that can drop following a quick speed
change, the ramp shape can be adapted to a s-shape and
prevent speed change shocks. For applications that are nor
critical in this, the speed change can be fully linear over the
Nom
complete range.
t2251
Max speed
[343]
337 Acc Rmp
[331]
StpEI Linear
Defa u lt: Linea r

Linear 0 Linear acceleration ra mp.

Fig. 79 S-Curve T S-shape acceleration ramp.

NOTE: For S-curve ramps the ramp times, t331] and

[332], defines the maximum acceleration and
deceleration rated, i.e. linear part of S-curye, fust as for
the lineal ramps. The S-curves are implemented so that
for a speed step below sync speed the ramps are fufly
s-shaped while for larger steps the mlddle part will be
linear. Therefore will a s-curve ramp from 0 -sync speed
take 2 x Time while a step from o-2 x sync speed will
take 3 x Time (middle part O.Ssync speed - l..ssync
speed linear). Also valid for menu [332], D.eceleration
ramp type.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Fu nctional Description

Com munication information Start Mode t3391
Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command is
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43rO7 given.
Profibus slot/index L69/LL

Fieldbus format Ulnt 339 Start Mode

lnt
stpElast
Modbus format U

Defa u lt: Fast (fixed)

rpm
The motor flux increases gradually. The
Fast 0 motor shaft starts rotating immediately
once the Run command is given.

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43109

Profibus slot/index r6e/L3
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

-----+ t Spinstart t33Al

The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is already
Fig. 80 Shape of acceleration rdmP
rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and
control it to the desired speed. If in an application, such as
Deceleration Ramp Type t3381 an exhausting fan, the motor shaft is already rotating due to
Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters lna external conditions, a smooth start of the application is
parameter set Fig. 81. required to prevent excessive wear. \With the spinstart=on,
the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detecting
the actual speed and rotation direction, which depend on
338 Dec RmP motor size, running conditions of the motor before the
StpEI Linear Spinstart, inertia of the application, etc. Depending on the
motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor, it
Defa u lt: Linear
can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is
Selection: Same as menu [337] caught.

Communication information 33A Spinstart

stp[I of
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43108
L69/L2 Defa u lt: off
Profibus slot/index
lnt No spinstart. lf the motor is already running
Fieldbus format U
off o the AC drive can trip or will start with high
Modbus format U lnt cu rrent.

Spinstart will allow the start of a running

On L
motor without tripping or high inrush currents

Fig. 81 Shape of deceleration rdmq

Functional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 Commun ication information
L7..3.4 Mechanical brake control
The four brake-related menus t3lCl ro [33F] can be used to
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43110
control mechanical brakes.
Profibus slot/index L69/74
Support is included for a Brake Acknowledge signal via a
Fieldbus format Ulnt digital input. It is monitored using a brake fault time
Modbus format U lnt parameter. Additional output and trip/warning signals are
also included. The acknowledge signal is either connected
from the brake conractor or from a proximiry switch on the
Stop Mode [33B] brake.
\When the AC drive is
stopped, differenr methods ro come ro
a standstill can be selected in order ro optimize the srop and
prevenr unnecessary wear, like warer hammer. Stop Mode
sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is Brake not released Brake Fault trip
given. During start and running the brake acknowledge signal is
compared to the actual brake ourput signal and if no
acknowledge, i.e. brake not released, while brake output is
338 Stop ModE
high for the Brake Fault rime t3aUl, rhen a Brake trip is
StpEI Decel generated.
Defa u lt: Decel

The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according Brake not engaged - Brake Warning and
Decel 0
to the set deceleration time.
continued operation (keep torque)
Coast L The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm. The brake acknowledge signal is compared to the actual
brake output signal at srop. If acknowledge is still active, i.e.
Communication in formation brake not engaged, while brake ourpur is low for the Brake
Engage time lSlgl then a Brake warning is generated and
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: the torque is kept, i.e. prolonging normal brake engage
43TTT
mode, until brake closes or an emergency action is needed
Profibus slot/index 76e/L5 by the operator, such as setting down the load.
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Fu nctional Description

 Fig. 82 shows the relation between the four Brake functions.
Brake Release Time t33cl
The Brake Release Time sets the time the AC drive delays
. Brake Release Time [3:C]
before ramping up to whatever final reference value is . Start Speed t3f Ol
selected. During this time a predefined speed can be
. Brake Engage Time [3f81
generared to hold the load where after the mechanical brake
finally releases. This speed can be selected at Release Speed, o Brake \Wait Time t3lPl
t33D]. Immediate after the brake release time expiration the The correct time setting depends on the maximum load and
brake lift signal is set. The user can set a digital outPut or
the properties of the mechanical brake. During the brake
relay to the function Brake. This output or relay can control
release time it is possible to aPPly extra holding torque by
the mechanical brake.
setting a start speed reference with the function start speed
t33Dl.
33C Brk Re].ease
StpEI 0.00s
Defa u lt: 0.00 s
Ra nge: 0.00-3.00 s

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43LT2

Profibus sloVindex L6e/L6

Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s

Modbus format El nt

Brake release Brake wait Brake engage

time t33cl time t33Fl time t33El

Hr I.Hffit
!l l-,1
rir
rir
Start I
t.l
I

l
I

Release Speed [33D] !-

I

Mechanical
Open
Brake
Closed

Brake Relay On
Output

off
ron mu e place wltnln
these time intervals

Fig. 82 Brake Output functions

NOTE: This function is designed to operate a mechanical

brake via the digital outputs or relays (set to brake
function) controlling a mechanical brake.

Fu nctiona I Descri Ption Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Release Speed t33Dl Wait Before Brake Time t33FI
The release speed only operates with the brake function: The brake wait time is the time to keep brake oPen and to
brake release l33C). The release speed is the initial speed hold the load, either in order to be able to speed ,rp
reference during the brake release time. immediately, or to stop and engage the brake.

3D Release Spd 33F Brk l[ait

stpE! 0 StpE 0.00s
Defa u lt: 0 rpm Defa u lt: O.0O s

Range: - 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync. Range: 0.00-30.0 s

4xmotor sync speed, 15OO rpm for L47O

Depend on:
rpm motor. Communication information

Communication information Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 437L5

Profibus sloVindex L6e/Le
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 431,L3
Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.01 s
Profibus sloVindex 1:69/L7
Modbus format El nt
Fieldbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm
Modbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm
Vector Brake t33GI
Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in the
Brake Engage Ti me t33El
The brake engage time is the time the load is held while the
mechanical brake engages. It is also used to get a firm stop
when transmissions, etc. cause "whiplash" effects. In other
33G Vector Brake
words, it compensates for the time it takes to engage a
stpE! off
mechanical brake.
Defa u lt: off
Vector brake switched off. AC drive brakes
338 Brk Engage off 0
normal with voltage limit on the DC link.
StpEI 0.00s Maximum AC drive current (lcr_) is available
On L
Defa u lt: O.OO s for braking.

Ra nge: O.0O-3.0O s
Communication information

Communication information
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 431,L6

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43TT4 Profibus slot/index L69/20

Profibus sloflindex L69/L8 Fieldbus format U lnt
Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.01 s Modbus format U lnt
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Fu nctional DescriPtion LOL

 Brake Fault trip time t33HI activated. The parameter Release Torque t3et] is used for

The "Brake Fault trip time" for "Brake not released" this purpose.
function is specified in this menu. The release torque initiates the torque reference from the
speed controller during the Brake Release Time l33C). The
release torque defines a minimum level of release (holding)
33H Brk Fau1t torque. The set release rorque is internally overruled if the
StpEl 1.00s actual required holding rorque measured at the previous
Defa u lt: 1.00s closing of brake is higher.
The release torque is ser with sign in order ro define the
Range 0.00 - 5.00s holding rorque direction.

Com munication info rmation

33f ReJ-ease Trq
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 437L7 StpEl 0t
Profibus sloVindex 169/2L Defau lt: o,/o

Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.1s Ra nge -4OOo/o to 400%

Modbus format El nt
Communicatio n information

Note: The Brake Fault trlp time should be set to longer Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43118
time than the Brake release time[33C].
Profibus sloVindex L69/22
The "Brake not engaged" warning is using the setting of Fieldbus format Long, I=LH%
parameter "Brake Engaged time [33E1". Modbus format Elnt
Following Figure shows principle of brake operation for
fault during run (left) and during srop (right).
Note! Function is deactivated if set to Ao/o.

Release torque t33ll

The Brake Release Time l33cl sers the time the VSD delays Note! Release Torque [331] has priority over torque
reference initialization by Release Speed [ggD].
before ramping up to whatever final speed reference value is
selected, to allow the brake to be fully opened. During this
time a holding torque ro prevenr roll-back of the load can be

Bra ke Bra ke
release time release time Brake wait Brake engage
33C 33C time time
ItsJ 33F 33E
Start t!
tl
Running tt
* L.- I

fo
-1 I r

Speed>o : @
I

- Brakerelay t-
ll tt
Brake acknowtedg" I [-rw'
r tt r
It
lt tt
BrakeTrip- ',,f I F l, I I

-
<33H 33H <33H I

Brake warning
Brake Fault trip time
During run During stop
* Memorized load torque level, if function activated with parameter [331] Release Torque.
** Time for operator to set down the load.

Fig. S3 Principle of Brake operationforfouh during run and during stop

LO2 Fu nctional Descri ption Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3

LL.3.5 Speed [340] Communication information
Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds,
such as Min lMax speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L22
Profibus sloflindex r6e/26
Minimum Speed l34Lj Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Sets the minimum The minimum speed will operare
speed. Modbus format Elnt
as an absolute lower limit. Used ro ensure the moror does
not run below a certain speed and to maintain a certain
performance.

34L Min Spee PID ref

stpE! 0

Defa u lt: 0 rpm

Min
Range: 0 - Max Speed speed

Dependent on: SeVView ref t31ol

1342) ' (llc_5o-pc-9-1)

NOTE: A lower speed value than

Fig. S4
the set minimum speed
can be shown in the display due to motor slip.
Maximum Speed t3431
Communication information Sets themaximum speed. The maximum speed will operate
maximum limit. This parameter is used to
as an absolute
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43L27 prevent damage due to high speed.
The synchronous speed (Sync-spd) is determined by the
Profibus slot/index L69/25
parameter motor speed 12251..
Fieldbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm
Modbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm 343 Max
stpEI syne
Stop/Sleep when less than Minimum Defa u lt: Sync Speed
Speed t342) Synchronous speed, i.e. no load
\Mith this function it is possible ro pur the AC drive in "sleep Sync Speed 0
speed, at nominal freguency.
mode" when it is running ar minimum speed for the length
1-24OO0rpm L- 24000 Min Speed - 4 x Motor Sync Speed
of time set, due to process value feedback or a reference
value that corresponds to a speed lower than the min speed
set. The AC drive will go into sleep mode after programmed Communication i nformation
time. Vhen the reference signal or process value feedback
raises the required speed value above the min speed value, Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L23
the AC drive will automatically wake up and ramp up to the Profibus sloVindex 169/27
required speed.
Fleldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm

NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priorlty than menu 13421. Modbus format UInt

NOTE; lt is not possible to set the maximum speed lower

42 Stp4din than the mlnlmum speed.
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off Note: Maximum speed [343] has priority over Min Speed
off 0 off [34q, i.e. if t343] is set below [34q then the drlve will
run at t343] Max Speed with acceleratlon times given by
1-3600 1-3600 1-3600 s [335] and 13361 respectively.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Fu nctiona I Description 103

Skip Speed I Low 1344) Skip Speed L High t3451
\Within the Skip Speed range High to Low, the speed cannot Skipspdl HI sets the higher value for the lst skip range.
be constant in order to avoid mechanical resonance in the
AC drive system.
345 SkipSpd 1 Hi
\7hen Skip Speed Low S Ref Speed < Skip Speed High, then stpfl 0
Output Speed=Skip Speed HI during deceleration and
Output Speed-Skip Speed LO during acceleration. Fig. 85 Defa u lt: O rpm
shows the function of skip speed hi and low.
Range: O-4xSyncSpeed
Between Skip Speed HI and LO, the speed with the
changes
set acceleration and deceleratiotr times. Skipspdl LO sets
Communication information
the lower value for the l st skip range.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L25
344 SkipSpd 1 Lo Profibus slot/index L69/29
stpE! 0
Fieldbus format lnt

Defa u lt: 0 rpm Modbus format lnt

Range: 0-4xMotorSyncSpeed
Skip Speed 2 Low t3461
Communication information The same function as menu 1344) for the Znd skip range.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L24

346 SkipSpd 2 Lo
Profibus slot/index L6e/28
stpE! 0
Fieldbus format lnt
Defa u lt 0 rpm
Modbus format lnt
Ra nge: O - 4 x Motor Sync Speed

Commun ication i nformation

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 431-26

Profibus slot/index L69/30

Fieldbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm

Skip Speed Hl Modbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm

Skip Speed LO
Skip Speed 2 High 1347)
The same function as menu 13451 for the Znd skip range.

347 SkipSpd 2 Hi
stpfi 0
Speed Reference
NG 06-F17 Defa u lt: 0 rpm

Fig. S5 Skip Speed Range: O - 4 x Motor Sync Speed

Commun ication i nformation

NOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped.

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43r27

Profibus slot/index !69/3L
Fieldbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm
Modbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm

LO4 Functional Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Jog Speed t3481 LL.3.6 Torques [350]
The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital Menu with all parameters for torque settings.
inputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog function
l5ZO1. The Jog command/function will automatically
generate a run command as long as the Jog command/
Maximum Torque t351I
function is active. The rotation is determined by the polarity Sets the maximum torque. This Maximum Torque oPerates
of the set Jog Speed. as an upper torque limit. A Speed Reference is always neces-
sary to run the motor.
Example
IfJog Speed = -10, thiswill give a Run Left command at Pnaor &*)x9550
Tr,aor( l,{m) _
10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 86 nvror ?pm)
shows the function of the Jog command/function.

351 I'Iax Torque

348 Jog Speed L20*
stpE! s0
STPET

Defa u lt: L2Oo/o calculated from the motor data

Defa u lt: 5O rpm

-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor sync

Range: o-400%
Range:
speed
Communicatio n information
Defined motor sync speed. Max = 4OO'/o. nor
Dependent on:
mally max-AC drive l,r"*/motoI Ino, x 100%.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43!4L
Communication in fo rmation Profibus sloVindex L69/45
Fieldbus format Long, L=to/o
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L28
Modbus format Elnt
Profibus sloVindex L69/32
Fieldbus format lnt NOTE: The Max Torque parameter wll! limit the maxmum

Modbus format lnt output current of the AC drive followin$ the relation:
LOOo/o Tmot corresponds to 1fi)% lmot.
The maximum possible setting for parameter 351 is
limited by Inom/lmot x L2Oo/o, but not higher than 4OOo/r.

Jog
NOTE: The power loss in the motor will increase by the
Freq square of the torque when operating above 7,OO'/r.4AO%
torque will result in 16OO% power loss, which will
increase the motor temperature very quickly.

Jog IxR Compensation t3521

com-
mand This function compensates for the drop in voltage over
different resistances such as (very) long motor cables, chokes
and motor stator by increasing the output voltage at a
constant frequency. IxR Compensation is most important at
Fig. S6 Jog command low frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting
torque. The maximum voltage increas e is 25o/o of the
nominal output voltage. See Fig. 87.
Selecting 'Automatic" will use the optimal value according
to the internal model of motor. "user-Defined" can be
selected when the start conditions of the application do not
change and a high starting torque is always required. A fixed
IxR Compensation value can be set in the menu [353].

Emotron AB Ot-4428-01r3 Functional Description 105

 352 IxR Comp NOTE: A too hlgh level of lxR Gompensatlon could cause

stpE! off motor saturation. This can cause a "Power Fault" trip.
The effeet of lxR Compensation is stronger with higher
powel motors.
Defa u lt: off
off 0 Function disabled
NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed.
Automatic 7 Automatic com pensation Therefore it is important that the Motor l2t Current t2321
User Defined 2 User defined value in percent. is set correctly.

Communication information
Flux Opti mization t354I
Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and the
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43742
motor noise, at low or no load conditions.
Profibus sloVindex L6e/46
Flux Optimization auromatically decreases the Y|H.z rario,
Fieldbus format Ulnt depending on the actual load of the moror when the process
Modbus format U lnt is in a steady situarion. Fig. 88 shows the area within which
the Flux Optimization is active.

354 FIux optim

stpE! off
Defa u lt: off
off o Function disabled
On T Function enabled

Com munication information

Modbus !nstance no/DeviceNet no: 43144

Profibus slot/index 169/48
f
10 20 Hz Fieldbus format U lnt

Fig. 87 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curu€ Modbus format U lnt

lxR Comp_user t3531

Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous menu.

353 IxR CompUsr

StpEI 0.0t
Defa u lt: 0.0%

Ra nge: O-25% x UruoH,r (O.L% of resolution)

Communication information
Fig. SS Flux Optimizing
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L43
Profibus sloVindex L69/47
NorE: Flux optimlzation works best at stable sltuations
Fieldbus format Long in slow changing ptocesses.

Modbus format Elnt

106 Fu nctional Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Maximum power t3551 L7..3.7 Preset References t360I
Sets maximum power. Can be used for limiting motor
power in field weakening operation. This function operates
as an upper power limit and internally limits the parameter
Motor Potentiometer t3611
Max Torque l3;tl according to : of the motor potentiometer function. See
Sets the properties

Tlimit = Plimi tlo/o) / (Actual Speed / Sync Speed) the paramerer Digln I lSZl ] for the selection of the motor
potentiometer function.

355 Max Porver

stpEl off 351 Motor Pot
StpEI Non Volatie
Defa u lt: off
Defa u lt: Non Volatile
off 0 Off. No power limit
After a stop, trip or power down, the AC
1-400 1-400 1- 4OO% of motor nominal power Volatile o drive will start always from zero speed (or
minimum speed, if selected).

NOTE: The maximum possible setting for parameter 355 Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or power
is limited by lnom/lmor x L2Oo/o, but not hi$her than down of the AC drive, the reference value
4OOo/o. at the moment of the stoP will be
Non volatile L
memorized. After a new start command
the output speed will resume to this saved
Communication information value.

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L45

Commu nication information
Profibus sloVindex L69/49
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L3L
Fieldbus format Long, L=Lo/o
Profibus sloVindex L6e/35
Modbus format El nt
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Motpot
UP

Fig. S9 MotPot function

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Functional Description LO7

 1)=
Preset Ref 1, 13621 to Preset Ref 7 selected if only one preser reference is active
1 = acrive input
t368I 0= rofl active input
Preset speeds have prioriry over the analogue inputs. Preset
speeds are activated by the digital inputs. The digital inputs
NorE: lf only Preset ctrl3 ls active, then the Preset Ref 4
must be set to the function Pres. Ref 1 , Pres. Ref 2 or Pres.
can be selected. lf Presets ctrl2 and 3 are active, then
Ref 4.
the Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected.
Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 7
preset speeds can be activated per paramerer ser. Using all
the parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds are possible. Keyboard reference mode t3691
This paramerer sers how the reference value [3 t o1 is edited.
362 Preset Ref 1
stpE! 0 369 Key Ref Mode
Defa u lt: Speed, 0 rpm
StpEI MotPot
Dependent on: Process Source [321] and Process Unill322 Defa u lt: MotPot

Speed mode 0 - max speed t3431 The reference value is edited as a normal
parameter (the new reference value is
Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] Normal 0 activated when Enter is pressed after the
Min according to men u [324) - max according value has been changed). The Acc Time
Other modes
to menu [325] t3311 and Dec Time t3321 are used.
The reference value is edited using the
Communication in formation motor potentiometer function (the new
MotPot 7 reference value is activated directly when
the key * or - is pressed). The Acc MotPot
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L32-43138
t3331 and Dec MotPot t3341 are used.
Profibus sloVindex L69/36-L69/42
Fieldbus format Long Com municatio n information
Modbus format El nt
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43139
The same settings are valid for the menus: Profibus sloVindex 769/43
1363) Preset Ref 2, with default 250 rpm Fieldbus format Ulnt
1364) Preset Ref 3, with default 500 rpm Modbus format U lnt
1355) Preset Ref 4, with default 750 rpm
13661 Preset Ref 5, with default 1000 rpm
1367) Preset Ref 5, with default 1250 rpm NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, the
[368] Preset Ref 7, with default 1500 rpm reference value ramp times are according to the Acc
MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot t3341 settings. Actual
The selection of the presets is as in Thbl e 24.
speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time t3g1]
and Dec Time [332].
Table 24

Preset Preset Preset

Output Speed
Ctrl3 Ctrl2 Ctrl1.

0 0 0 Analogue reference

o o 7L) Preset Ref 1

o 7L) o Preset Ref 2

0 T L Preset Ref 3

tt) o 0 Preset Ref 4

7 0 T Preset Ref 5

L T 0 Preset Ref 6

7 L T Preset Ref 7

ro8 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OI-4428-O1r3

L1,.3.8 PID Process Control t38OI
The PID controller is used to control an external process via
a feedback signal. The reference value can be set via analogue
input Anln I , at the Control Panel [3 t O1 by using a Preset
Reflerence, or via serial communication. The feedback signal
(actual value) must be connected to an analogue input that
is set to the function Process Value.

Process PID Control [381]

This function enables the PID controller and defines the Fig. 90 Closed loop PID control
response to a changed feedback signal.

PID lTime t3841

381 PID Control Setting the integration time for the PID controller.
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off 384 PID I Time
off o Pl D control deactivated.
StpE 1.00s
The speed increases when the feedback Defa u lt: 1.00 s
On 7 value decreases. PID settings according to
Range: 0.01-300 s
menus [381] to [385].
The speed decreases when the feedback
Communication information
lnvert 2 value decreases. PID settings according to
menus t3831 to [385].
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L57

Communication information Profibus sloVindex L69/6r

Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43154 Modbus format El nt
Profibus sloVindex 169/58
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Process PID D Time t3851
Modbus format U lnt Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller.

PID P Gain t3831 385 PID D Time

Setting the P gain for the PID controller. StpEI 0 .00s
Defa u lt: 0.00 s
383 PID P Gain Range: 0.00-30 s
StpE 1.0
Defa u lt 1.0 Communication information

Range: 0.0-30.0 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43158

Profibus sloVindex L69/62
Communication information
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.0L s
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43156 Modbus format El nt
Profibus sloVindex L69/60
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functional Description 109

PI D sleep functionality Example 1 PID control - normal (flow or
This function is controlled via a wait delay and a separate pressu re control)
wake-up margin condition. \With this function it is possible l3Ztl = F (AnIn)
to put the AC drive in "sleep mode" when the process value l3zz1 = Bar
is at it's set point and the motor is running at minimum [3tO] =2A Bar
speed for the length of the time set in [:4e1. By going into 1342) = 2 s (inactive since t3Se1 is activated and have higher
sleep mode, the by the application consumed energy is priority)
reduced to a minimum. \7hen the process feedback value [3gt]= on
on the process reference as set in
goes below the set margin [3461 = 10 s
13871, the AC drive will wake up automatically and normal l3S7l = I Bar
PID operation continues, see examples. The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is
below or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds. The AC drive
PID sleep when less than minimum will activate/wake up when the "Process value" goes below
the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process
speed t386I reference, i.e. goes below QA-l) Bar. See Fig. 91.
If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed
for given delay time, the AC drive will go to sleep.
lTttl Process Value
31Ol Process Ref

386 PID4{inSpd
stpE off
Defa ult: off [341] Min Speed
Ra nge: off, 0.01 -3600 s
Fig. 9l PID Stop/skep with normal PID
Com munication information
Exampl e 2 PID control = inverted (tank leve!
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 4337L control)
Profibus sloVindex 17o/20 l3Ztl = F (AnIn)
l3zz1 = rrr
Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.01 s
[3t01 = 7 m
Modbus format E! nt 13421 - 2 s (inactive since [1S01 is activated and have higher
prioriry)
[34 t ]= Inverted
NOTE: Menu t3861 has hlgher priority than menu 13421. t3861 = 30 s

13871 -- 1 m

PID Activation Margi n [387]
The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to the
process reference and sets the limit when the AC drive
should wake-up/start again.
The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is
below or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds. The AC drive
will activate/wake up when the "Process value" goes above
the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process
reference, i.e. goes above (7 +l) m. See Fig . 92.

387 PID Act lliarg

stpE 0
171,L) Process Value
Activate/Wake up
Defa u lt: o t3871
i [310] Process Ref
Ra nge: 0 -10000 in Process unit
1712) Speed

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43372

Profibus slot/index 17O/2I Fig. 92 PID Stop/sleep utith inuerted PID
Fieldbus format Long

Modbus format El nt

NOTE: The margin ls always a positive value.

110 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-0 1r3

 PID Steady State Test t388l steady state test the PID operation is overruled and the AC
In application situations where the feedback can become drive is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error is
independent of the moror speed, this PID Steady Test func- within the steady state margin. If the PID error goes outside
tion can be used to overrule the PID operation and force the the steady state margin the test failed and normal PID
AC drive ro go in sleep mode i.e. the AC drive auromatically operation continues, see exarnple.
reduces the outpur speed while at the same time ensures rhe
process value. 389 PID Stdy Mar
Example: pressure controlled pump sysrems with low/no stpE! 0
flow operation and where the process pressure has become
independent of the pump speed, e.g. due ro slowly closed Defa u lt: o
valves. By going into Sleep mode, heating of the pump and Range: 0-10000 in process unit
motor will be avoided and no energy is spilled.
PID Steady srare resr delay. Communication information

NOTE: lt is important that the systenr has reached a Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43374
stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated.
Profibus sloVindex L7O/23
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
88 PrD Stdy Tst Modbus format nt
stpfiI off El

Defa u lt: off Example: The PID Steady Test srarrs when the process value
lltt] is within the margin and Steady State Test \Wait Delay
Range: off, 0.01-3600 s has expired. The PID ourpur will decrease speed with a srep
value which corresponds to the margin as long as the Process
Communication information value l7tt] stays within steady stare margin. \il7hen Min
Speed l34l] is reached the steady state test was successful
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43373 and stop/sleep is commanded if PID sleep function

Profibus slot/index tf S6land l3S7) is activated. If the Process value lZttl goes
L7O/22
outside the set steady srare margins then the test
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
failed and normal PID operation will continue, see Fig. 93
Modbus format El nt

PID Steady State Margin t38gl

PID steady stare margin defines a margin band around the
reference that defines "steady state operation". During the

ITLL) Process Value

t38el
[31O] Process Ref
t38el

[387] [388] ..- time

Start steady Stop steady

1772) Speed

t3411 Min Speed t3861 ptDcMin spd!

Fig. 93 Steady state test

Emotron AB 0I-4428-0L13 Functional Description LTL

 Commun ication information
L1,.3.9 Pump/Fan Control t390l
The Pump Control functions are in menu [3lO]. The
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L62
function is used to control a number of drives (pumps, fans,
etc.) of which one is always driven by the AC drive. Profibus slot/index 1:69/66

Fieldbus format U lnt

Pump enable t3911 Modbus format U lnt
This function will enable the pump control to set all relevant
pump control functions.
Select Drive t3931
of the pump system. 'Sequence' and
Sets the main operation
391 Punrp enable 'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 'All' means
stpE! off Alternating MASTER operation.

Defa u lt: off

off 0 Pump control is switched off
3 Select Drive
Pump control is on:
StpEI Sequenc
- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G]
appear and are activated according to Defa ult Sequence
On L
defa ult settings. Fixed MASTER operation:
- View functions [39H] to [39M] are added - Theadditional drives will be selected in
in the menu structure. Seq uence 0 sequence, i.e. first pump l then pump 2
etc.
- A maximum of 7 drives can be used.
Commun ication information
Fixed MASTER operation:
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43161 - The additional drives will be selected
depending on the Run Time. So the drive
Profibus slot/index L6e/65
with the lowest Run Time will be selected
Fieldbus format U lnt first. The Run Time is monitored in menus
Run Time 1,
Modbus format U lnt [39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drive
the Run Time can be reset.
- When drives are stopped, the drive with
the longest Run Time will be stopped first.
Number of Drives t3921 - Maximum 7 drives can be used.
Setsthe total number of drives which are used, including the
Master AC drive. The setting here depends on the parameter Alternating MASTER operation:
- When the drive is powered up, one drive is
Select Drive 139il. After the number of drives is chosen it is
selected as the Master drive. The selection
important to set the relays for the pumP control. If the
criteria depends on the Change Condition
digitd inputs are also used for status feedback, these must be
[394]. The drive will be selected according
setfor the pump control according to; Pump 1 OK- Pump6 Ail 2 to the Run Time. So the drive with the
OK in menu [520]. lowest Run Time will be selected first. The
Run Time is monitored in menus [39HJ to

392 No of Drives t39Ml in sequence. For each drive the Run

Time can be reset.
stp$ 1 - A maximum of 6 drives can be used.

Defa u lt: 7
Com munication information
1-3 Number of drives it l/O Board is not used.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43163
Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' is
1-6 used, see Select Drive t3931 . (l/O Board IS Profibus sloflindex 1:69/67
used.)
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is used,
see Select Drive t3931. Modbus format Ulnt
7-7
(l/O Board is used.)

NOTE: This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives

NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or are selected.
Master Pump. Used di$ital inputs must be defined as
Pump Feedback.

Fu nstional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Change Condition t3941 Change Timer t395I
This parameter determines the criteria for changing the \7hen the time set here is elapsed, the master drive will be
master. This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER changed. This function is only active if Select Drive
operation is selected. The elapsed run time of each drive is 1393)=All and Change Cond 7yq= Timer/ Both.
monitored. The elapsed run time always determines which
drive will be the 'new' master drive.
395 Change Timer
This function is only active if the parameter Select Drive
1393)=All.
stpfi soh
Defa ult: 50h
4 Change Cond Range: 1-3000 h
stpE! Both
Com munication information
Defa u lt: Both

The Runtime of the master drive Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43165
determines when a master drive has to be
changed. The change will only take place
Profibus sloVindex L69/6e
after a: Fieldbus format Ulnt, 1=1 h
Stop 0
- Power Up
- Stop Modbus format Ulnt, 1=1 h
- Standby condition
- Trip condition.
Drives on Change t3961
The master drive will be changed if the
timer setting in Change Timer t3951 has If a master drive is changed according to the timer function
elapsed. fhe change will take place (Change Condition=Timer/Borh 13941), it is possible to
immediately. So during operation the leave additional pumps running during the change
additional pumps will be stopped operation.'$7'ith this function the change operation will be
Timer T temporarily, the 'new' master will be as smooth as possible. The maximum number to be
selected accordingto the Run Time and the programmed in this menu depends on the number of a
additional pumps will be started again. dditional drives.
It is possible to leave 2 pumps running
during the change operation. This can be Example:
set with Drives on Change [396J. If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value will
The master drive will be changed if the be 4. This function is only active if Select Drive 1393]=All.
timer setting in Change Timer t3g5l has
elapsed. The 'new' master will be selected
396 Drives on Ch
Both 2
according to the elapsed Run Time. The
change will only take place after a: stpE! 0
- Power Up
- Stop Defa u lt: 0
- Standby condition.
- Trip condition. Range: 0 to (the number of drives - 2)

Communication information Communicatio n information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43166

43L64
Profibus slot/index Profibus sloVindex L69/7O
169/68
Fieldbus format Fieldbus format U lnt
U lnt
Modbus format Modbus format Ulnt
U lnt

NorE: lf the status feedback lnputs (Digln 9 to Digln L4l

are used, the master drive will be changed immedlately
if the feedback generates an 'Eror'.

Emotron AB 0!-4428-0113 Functional Description 113

 Com municatio n informatio n
Upper Band t3971
If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band,
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43168
an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set
in start delay 1399). Profibus slot/index L69/72
Fieldbus format Long, L=LY,
Upper Ban Modbus format Elnt
stpflI 10t
Defa u lt: tOo/o Example:
Max Speed = 1500 rpm
Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed
Min Speed = 300 rpm
Lower Band = l0o/o
Com munication in formation
Stop delay will be activated:
Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1 500-300 = 1200 rpm
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L67
l0o/o of 1200 rprrr = I20 rpm
Profibus slot/index L69/7L
Long, L=Lo/o
Start level = 300 + 120 - 420 rpm
Fieldbus format

Modbus format Elnt

Speed
Example:
Max Speed = 1500 rpm Max
Min Speed = 300 rpm
Upper Band - l0o/o
Start delay will be activated:
Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1 500-300 = 1200 rpm
l0o/o of I 200 rpm = 120 rpm
Start level = 1500-120 - 1380 rpm <-r
Stop Delay [39A]
(NG_5GPC-r 3_r)

Speed

Max Fig. 95 Lower band

Start Delay t3991

This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is
started. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of
pumPs.
Min

l--_;l Flow/Pressure
Start De1ay
Start Delay t3991
(NG_5o-rc-12_1) stpE! 0s
Fig. 94 Upper band Defa u lt: Os

Range: 0-999 s
Lower Band t3981
If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band Communication information
an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time. This
delay time is set in the parameter Stop Delay t39A]. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43169

Profibus sloVindex L69/73

398 Lower Band Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s
stpE! 10t
Modbus format El nt

Defa u lt: LOo/,

Ra nge: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed

LL4 Fu nctional Descri ption Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

 Stop Delay t39Al Lower Band Limit t39Cl
This delay time musr have elapsed before the 'top' pump is If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, the
stopped. A delay time prevenrs the nervous switching of ',op' pump is stopped immediately without delay. If a stop
PumPs. delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is from 0o/o,
equalling min speed, to the ser percenrage for the Lower
Band t3ls1.
39A Stop DeJ.ay
stpfi 0s
39C Low Band Li-m
Defa u lt: 0s stpE! 0t
Range: 0-999 s
Defa u lt: o%
Communication information
0 to Lower Band level. O% 1=rin speed) means
Ra nge:
that he Limit function is switched off.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L70
Profibus sloVindex 169/74 Communication information
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43L72
Modbus format El nt
Profibus sloVindex L69/76
Fieldbus format Long, L=L%
Upper Band Limit t39Bl
If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, the Modbus format Elnt
next pump is starred immediately without delay. If a start
delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is berween
0o/o, equalling max speed, and the set percenrage for the
UpperBand 1397).
Max

398 Upp Band tim "top" pump stops

stpE! 0t \ immediately

Defa u lt: o%
\
O to Upper Band level. O% 1=rax speed) means
Range:
that the Limit function is switched off.
Flow/Pressure
Stop Delay t39AI
Communication information (NG_5O-PC-15_2)

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L7L Fig. 97 Louter band limit

Profibus slot/index 769/75
Fieldbus format Long, L=7%
Modbus format Elnt

Speed

Max

Flow/Pressure
Start Delay t3991
(NG_so-PC-14_2)

Fig. 96 Upper band limit

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functional Description 115

Settle Time Start [39D] Example
Max Speed = 1500 rpm
The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is
Min Speed - 200 rpm
switched on before the pumP control continues. If an
TiarrsS Start - 600/o
additional pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On Line) orYl
A, the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' \fllren an additional pump is needed, the speed will be
start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting controlled down to min speed + (6A0/o x (1500 rpm - 200
and stopping of additional pumps. rpm)) - 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. \(hen this speed is
reached, the additional pump with the lowest run time
During the Settle start: hours will be switched on.
o PID controller is off,
o The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a PumP.
Switch on
Speed procedure starts

39D Settle Start

stpE! 0s Actua I

Additional pump

Defa u lt: 0s
Tra ns
Range: 0-999 s
{
Com munication info rmation Min

FloVPressure
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43773 Actual start
command of next
Profibus slot/index L69/77 pumP (RELAY) (Nc_so-pc-16_1)

Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s

Fig. 9S Transition speed start
Modbus format Elnt

Flow/Pressure
Transition Speed Start t39El Transition speed
decreases overshoot
The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/
\
pressure overshoot when adding another PumP. \7tren an
additional pump needs to be switched on, the master PumP
will slow down to the set transition speed start value, before
the additional pump is started. The setting depends on the
dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives. Time
The transition speed is best set by trial and error. Fig. 99 Effect of rransition speed

ln general:
. If rhe additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, Settle Time Stop t39Fl
then a higher transition speed should be used. The settle stop allows the process to settle afrer a pump is
. If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, switched off before the pump control continues. If an
then a lower transition speed should be used. additional pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/
A, the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the'rough'
start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting
398 Transs Start and stopping of additional pumps.
stpfi 60t
During the Settle stop:
Defa u lt: 60% o PID controller is off
Ra nge: 0-1OO% of total min speed to max speed . the speed is kept at a fixed level afrer stopping a pump

Commun ication information 39f Settle Stop

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L74
StpE 0s

Profibus slot/index L69/78 Defa u lt: Os

Fieldbus format Long, 1=Lo/o Range: O-999 s

Modbus format Elnt

116 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Communication information
Actual shut down of pump
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 431.75

Profibus sloVindex 169/79

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s

Modbus format El nt
Trans

Actual
Transition Speed Stop t39cl Min
The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/
pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump. Switch off procedure starts
The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master
Fig. 100 Thansition speed stop
drive and the additional drives.

ln general: Run Times 1-6 t39Hl to t39Ml

. If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics,
then a higher rransition speed should be used.
. If the additional pump has 'fasr' starr/stop dynamics, 39H Run Time 1
then a lower transition speed should be used. StpEI h:mm: ss

Unit: h :m m :ss (hours: min utes:seconds)

39G Transs Stop
stpEl 60t Range: 0:00:00 -262743:59:59

Defa u lt: 60o/o Communication information

Range: O-7OO% of total min speed to max speed
31051 : 31052 : 31053(hr:min:sec)
31054 : 31055: 31056(hr:min:sec)
Communication information 31057 : 31058: 31059(hr:min:sec)
Modbus lnstance no/
31060 : 31O61: 31062(hr:min:sec)
DeviceNet no:
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43176 31063 : 31064: 31065(hr:min:sec)
31066 : 31067: 31068(hr:min:sec)
Profibus sloVindex 169/80
Fieldbus format Long, t=to/o
421,/ 195, L27/L96, !2L/L97
Modbus format El nt L21,/r98, L2t/ 199, 721,/2OO
L21,/ 2Ot, L21,/ 2O2, L21,/ 2O3
Profibus slot/index
L2I/ 2O4, t2!/ 2O5, I27/ 206
Example L21,/ 2O7, L21,/ 2O8, L2I/ 2O9
Max Speed = 1500 rpm 12L/ 21:O, L21,/ 2Ll, L21,/ 2L2
Min Speed = 200 rpm
Fieldbus format Long, L=Lh/m/s
TransS Start - 600/o
'W'hen less addidonal Modbus format Efnt, t=th/m/s
pumps are needed, the speed will be
controlled up to min speed + (600/o x (1500 rpm - 2AO
rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. '$7hen this speed is
reached, the additional pump with the highest run time
hours will be switched ofC

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Fu nctional Description LL7

Reset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1] L7..4 Load Monitor and Process
Protection [400]
39H1 Rst Run Itnl
Stm No
LL.4.!. Load Monitor t4101
Defa u lt: No The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a
load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines
No 0
and processes against mechanical overload and underload,
Yes L e.g. a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failure
on a fan and a pump dry running. See explanation in section
Commun ication information 7 .5, page 40.

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 38-43, pump 1-6

Alarm Select l4LL)
Profibus slot/index o/37 -O/ 42 Selects the types of alarms that are active.
Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt ALL Alarm Se1ect

stpE! off
Pump Status [39N] Defa ult off

39N Pump L23456 off o No alarm functions active.

stpE! ocD Min L

Min Alarm active. The alarm output func-
tions as an underload alarm.
Max Alarm active, The alarm output func-
Max 2
tions as an overload alarm.
lndication Description
Both Max and Min alarm are active. The
Control, master pump, only when alternating
C Max+Min 3 alarm outputs function as overload and
master is used
underload alarms.
D Direct control

o Pump is off Communicatio n information

E Pump error
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43321,
Profibus slot/index L69/225
Num ber backup/reserve [39P]
Sets the number of pumps used for backup/reserve which in Fieldbus format U lnt
normal conditions can not be selected. This function can be Modbus format U lnt
used for increasing redundancy in the pumP system by hav-
ing pumps in reserve that can be activated when some
pumps indicate fault or are shut off for maintenance. Alarm Trip t4L2l
Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the AC drive.
39P No of Backup
stpE! 0 4L2 A1arm trip
Defa u lt: 0
stpE! off
Ra nge: 0-3 Defa u lt: off
Se lectio n: Same as in menu [411]
Com munication info rmation

Communication information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43L77

Profibus slot/index L69/8r Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43322

Fieldbus format U lnt Profibus slot/index L69/226
Modbus format Ulnt Fieldbus format U !nt

Modbus format U lnt

TLB Funstional Descri ption Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

Ramp Alarm t4131 Load Type t4151
This function inhibits the (pr.) alarm signals during In this menu you select monitor type according to the load
acceleration/deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms. characteristic of your application. By selecting the required
monitor type, the overload and underload alarm function
can be optimized according to the load characteristic.
4L3 Ramp A1arm 'When
STPET off the application has a constant load over the whole
speed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, the load ryp.
Defa u lt: off can be set to basic. This rype uses a single value as a reference
for the nominal load. This value is used for the complete
(Pre) alarms are inhibited during accelera-
off 0 speed range of the AC drive. The value can be set or
tion/dece leration.
automatically measured. See Autoset Alarm l4lLl and
(Pre) alarms active during acceleration/ Normal Load [41B] about setting the nominal load
On L
deceleration. reference.

The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 load

Commun ication information
values at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is populated by
a test run with a real load. This can be used with any smooth
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43323 load curve including constant load.
Profibus sloVindex L69/227
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt Max Alarm

Basi
Alarm Start Delay 14L41 Min Alarm
This parameter is used i[ for example, you wanr to override
an alarm during the start-up procedure.
Load curve
Sets the delay time after a run command, after which the
alarm may be given.
Speed
. If Ramp AIarm=On. The srarr delay begins after a RUN
command. Fig. 101
. If Ramp Alarm=Off. The stam delay begins after the
acceleration ramp. 415 Load Type
StpEI Basic
4L4 Start De1ay
stpflI 2s Defa u lt: Basic

Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load

Defa u lt: 2s level over the full speed range. Can be used
Basic 0
in situations where the torque is independ-
Range: 0-3600 s
ent of the speed.

Communication information Uses the measured actual load

Load
T characteristic of the process over the speed
Curve
range.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43324
Profibus sloVindex L69/228 Communication information
Fieldbus format Long, 1-1 s
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43325
Modbus format El nt
Profibus sloVindex L69/229
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB 01-4428-0113 Fu nstional Description 119

Max Alarm t41-61
Max Alarm Margin l4LGLl
\7ith load rype Basic, l4l5), used the Max Alarm Margin
sets the band above the Normal Load, [418], menu that
does not generate an alarm. \With load rype Load Curve,
l4l5l, used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the
Load Curve, l4lcl, that does not generate an alarm. The
Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor
torque.
Max Pre Alarm 14171
Max Pre AlarmMargin l4L7I)
\7ith load rype Basic, l4l5l, used the Max Pre-Alarm
Margin sets the band above the Normal Load, [4 ] B], menu
'With
that does not generate a pre-alarm. load rype Load
Curve, l4l5l, used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band
above the Load Curv e, l4l C], that does not generate a
pre-alarm. The Max Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of
nominal motor torque.

4L6L Ma:<AlarmMar 4L7L MaxPreAItIar

stpfi lst stpE! 10t
Defa u lt: L5% Defa u lt: LOo/o

Ra nge: O-4AOo/o Range: o-400%

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43326 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43327

Profibus slot/index 1:69/23O Profibus sloVindex L6e/23L

Fieldbus format Long, L:t% Fieldbus format Long, L=O.Lo/o

Modbus format El nt Modbus format El nt

Max Alarm delay l4L62l Max Pre Alarm delay l4L72l

Sets the delay time berween the first occurrence of max Sets the delaytime berween the first occurrence of max pre
alarm condition and after when the alarm is given. alarm condition and after when the alarm is given.

4L62 !,Ia:<A].armDe1 4L72 MaxPreAIDeI

StpEI 0.1s StpE 0.1s
Defa u lt: 0.1 s Defa u lt: 0.1 s

Ra nge: O-90 s Range: O-9O s

Communication in formation Commun icatio n information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43330 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43331

Profibus slot/index L69/234 Profibus sloVindex 169/235

Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 s

Modbus format El nt Modbus format El nt

L20 Fu nctiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Min Pre Alarm t4181 Min Alarrn [419]
Min Pre Alarm Margin t L3Ll Min Alarm Margin l4LgLl
\7ith load rype Basic, l4l5), used the Min Pre-Alarm \7ith load rype Basic, l4l5l, used the Min Alarm Margin
Margin sets the band under the Normal Load, [418], menu sets the band under the Normal Load, [418], menu that
that does not generate a pre-alarm. \7ith load rype Load 'S7ith
does not generate an alarm. load rype Load Curve,
Curve, l4l5), used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band l4I5), used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the
under the Load Curve, l41C], that does nor generate a Load Curve, [4lC), that does not generate an alarm. The
pre-alarm. The Min Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor
nominal motor torque. torque.

4181 MinPreA1Mar 4L9L MinAlarmMar

stpE! 10t stpfi 1st
Defa u lt: 1:O% Defa u lt: L1o/o

Ra nge: o-400% Range: O-40Oo/o

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43328 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43329

Profibus sloVindex L69/232 Profibus sloVindex L69/233

Fieldbus format Long, t=Lo/o Fieldbus format Long, t=L%o

Modbus format El nt Modbus format Elnt

Min Pre Alarm Response delay l4L82l Min Alarm Response delay 14L92)
Sets the delaytime benveen the first occurrence of min pre Sets the delaytime berween the first occurrence of min
alarm condition and after when the alarm is given. alarm condition and after when the alarm is given.

4L82 t'IinPreAlDel 4L92 MinAlarmDe1

StpEI 0.1s StpE 0.1s
Defa u lt: O.1 s Defa u lt: O.1 s

Range: 0-90 s Range: O-90 s

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43332 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43333
Profibus sloVindex 169/236 Profibus slot/index 769/237
Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1-0.1 s
Modbus format Elnt Modbus format Elnt

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113 Fu nstional Description L2L

Autoset Alarm [41A] Normal Load [4]-Bl
The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load Set the levelof the normal load. The alarm or pre alarm will
that is used as reflerence for the alarm levels. If the selected be activated when the load is above/under normal load t
Load Typ. l4l5) is Basic it copies the load the motor is margin.
running with to the menu Normal Load t41B]. The motor
must run on the speed that generates the load that needs to
be recorded. If the selected Load Typ. l4l5) is Load Curve it
418 Normal Load
performs a test-run and populates the Load Curve [41C]
stp$ 100t
with the found load values.
Defa u lt: LOO%

Range: 0-400% of max torque

WARNING!
When autoset does a test run the motor and
application /machine will ramp up to NOTE: LOOY, Torque meanst lruom= lgor. The maximum
maximum speed. depends on the motor current and AC drive max current
settings, but the absolute maximum adiustment ls
4OOo/o.
NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm
funstion to succeed. A not running motor generates a
"Failed!" message. Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43335

41A AutoSet AIrm
stpE! No Profibus sloVindex L69/239
Fieldbus format Long, L=LY,
Defa u lt: No
Modbus format El nt
No 0
Yes L
Load Curve t41-Cl
The load curve function can be used with any smooth load
Com munication info rmation
curve. The curve can be populated with a test-run or the
values can be entered or changed manually.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43334

Profibus slot/index L6e/238 Load Curve 1--9 l4LCLl-l LCgl

The measured load curye is based on 9 stored samples. The
Fieldbus format Ulnt
curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed,
Modbus format U lnt the range in berween is divided into 8 equal steps. The
measured values of each sample are displayed in [41C 1] to
The default set levels for the (pre)alarms are: l4lc9) and can be adapted manually. The value of the I st
sampled value on the load curve is displayed.

Max Alarm menu tALOLl + [418]

Overload
Max Pre Alarm menul LTl-l + [418] 41C1 Load Curvel
Min Pre Alarm menu [41B] - t4L8L)
stpE! 0rpm 1008
Underload
Min Alarm menu [418] - t41:9r.1 Defa ult: LOOa/o

Ra nge: 0-400% of max torque

These default set levels can be manually changed in menus
1416l to 1419]. After execution the message "Autoset OK!" is
displayed for ls and the selectiott reverts to "No".

L22 Functional Descri ption Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Communication information LL.4.2 Process Protection l420l
Submenu widr settings regarding protection functions for
43336%,43337 rpm the AC drive and the motor.
43338o/o,43339 rpm
4334oo/o,43341 rpm
43342%,43343 rpm Low Voltage Override l42Ll
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no 43344o/o,43345 rpm
If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage
43346%,43347 rpm
override function is enabled, the AC drive will automatically
43348o/o,43349 rpm
43350o/o,43351 rpm decrease the motor speed to keep control of the application
43352o/o,43353 rpm and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage
rises again. Therefore the rotating energy in the motor/load
169/240,769/242 is used ro keep the DC link voltage level at the override level,
169/244, 169/246
for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a
Profibus sloVindex L69/248, t69/250
standstill. This is dependent on the inertia of the motor/load
L69/252, 1t69/254
L7O/ L combination and the load of the motor at the time the dip
occurs, see Fig. 103.
Fieldbus format Long

Modbus format Elnt 42L Low Volt OR

stpE! on
NOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and Max
Defa u lt: On
Speed values. they are read only and cannot be
changed. off o At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect
At mains dip, AC drive ramps down until
On L
voltage rises.
Min-Max alarm tolerance band graph

Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43361

Profibus sloVindex L7O/LO

Fieldbus format U lnt

0.5 Modbus format U lnt

DC link voltage

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Speed

Oaa Measured load samples

r Min-max tolerance band

Max alarm limit

Min alarm limit

Fig. 102

(06-F6Onew)

Fig. 103 Low uoltage ouerride

NOTE: During the low voltage override the LED tripllimit

blinks.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Fu nstiona I Descri ption L23

Rotor locked 14221 Overvolt control1424)
'With
the rotor locked function enabled, the AC drive will [Jsed to switch off the overvoltage conrrol function when
protect the motor and application when this is stalled whilst only braking by brake chopper and resisror is required. The
increasing the motor speed from standstill. This prorection overvoltage control function, limits the braking rorque so
will coast the motor to stop and indicare a fault when the that the DC link voltage level is conrrolled ar a high, but
Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more safe, level. This is achieved by limiting the actual
than 5 seconds. deceleration rate during stopping. In case of a defect at the
brake chopper or the brake resistor the AC drive will trip for
"Overvoltage" to avoid a fall of the load e.g. in crane
422 Rotor ]-ocked applications.
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be ac,tlvated if
brake chopper is used.
off 0 No detection

AC drive willtrip when locked rotor is

On L
detected. Trip message "Locked Rotor" 424 Over VoIt CtI
stpE! on
Communication in formation
Defa u lt: On

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43362 On 0 Overvoltage control activated

Profibus slot/index L7O/IL off 7 Overvoltage control off
Fieldbus format U lnt
Com mu nication i nformation
Modbus format U lnt

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43364

Motor lost 14231 Profibus slot/index L7O/ L3
\With the motor lost function enabled, the AC drive is able
Fieldbus format Ulnt
to detect a fault in the motor circuit: moror, moror cable,
Modbus format Ulnt
thermal relay or output filter. Motor lost will cause a trip,
and the motor will coast to standstill, when a missing moror
phase is detected during a period of 5 s.

423 Motor ].ost

stpE! off
Defa u lt: off
Function switched off to be used if no
off 0
motor or very small motor connected.

trip when the motor is

AC drive will
Trip L
disconnected. Trip message "Motor Lost"

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43363

Profibus sloVindex I7O/ 12
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format U lnt

L24 Functional Description Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

11.5 l/Os and Virtual t5l 5l AnIn2 Setup - 4-20 mA
15164) AnIn2 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)
Gonnections [5OO] 15166) Anln2 Function Max = L]ser defined
Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and l5l6n AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rPm
outputs of the AC drive. [5168] Anln2 Operation = Add+
Calculation:

LI".5.1 Analogue lnputs [51O] Anlnl = ( l0-4) I (20-4) * (1 500-0) * 0 - 562.5 rpm
Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs. AnIn2 -- (5-41 I (20-4) * (3OO-0) + 0 = 18.75 rPm
The actual process reference will be:
Anlnl Function t51-1I +562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpm
Sets the function for Analogue input l. Scale and range are
Analogue lnput Selection via Digital lnputs:
defined by AnIn I Advanced settings [513]. \Mhen rwo different external Reference signals are used, €.8.
4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0- l0 V locally
511 Anlnl Fc mounted potentiometer, it is possible to switch between
StpE Process Ref these two different analogue input signals via a Digital Input
set to 'Anln Select".
Defa u lt: Process Ref
AnIn I is 4-20 mA
off o lnput is not active AnIn2 is 0-10 V
Max Speed T The input acts as an upper speed limit. Digln3 is controlling the Anln selection; HIGH is 4-20 mA,
Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit. LO\f is 0-10 V
The input value equals the actual process [5t t] Anlnl Fc = Process Ref;
value (feedback) and is compared to the set AnInl as reference signal input
Process Va I 3 reference signal (set point) by the PID
controller, or can be used to display and l5tZl AnInl Setup - 4-20mA;
view the actual process value. set Anln I for a current reference signal
Reference value is set for control in [513A] Anln 1 Enable = Digln;
Process Re{ 4 process units, see Process Source [321] setAnln 1 to be active when Digln3 is HIGH
and Process Unit 13221.
l5t+1Anln2 Fc = Process Ref;
set AnIn2 as reference signal input
Commun ication information
t5l5l Anln2 Setup = 0-l0V;
set AnI n2 for a voltage reference signal
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 4320]t
Profibus sloVindex L6e/ 105 [516,{] AnIn2 Enabl - lDigln;
setAnln2 to be active when Digln3 is LO\V
Fieldbus format U lnt
1523) Digln3=Anln;
Modbus format U lnt
set Dlgln3 as input fot selection of AI reference

NOTE: When AnlnX Func=Off, the connected signal will

Subtracting analogue inputs
still be available for Comparators [61O]. Example 2: Subtract rwo signals

Signal on Anlnl = 8 V
Adding analogue inputs Signal on Anl n2 = 4Y
If more then one analogue input is set to the same function, [5t t] AnInl Function = Process Re[,
the values of the inputs can be added together. In the l5tZl Anlnl Setup = 0-10 V
fo[owing examples we assume that Process Sour ce 1321] is 15134) Anlnl Function Min = Min (0 rpm)
set to Speed. 15136) Anlnl Function Max = Max (1500 rPm)
Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning). [5138] AnIn 1 Operation = Add+
l5tll Anln2 Function - Process Ref,
Signal on Anlnl = 10 mA
t5151 AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V
Signal on Anl n2 - 5 mA
\rcq Anln2 Function Min - Min (0 rpm)
[5t t] AnInl Function = Process Ref. [5 t ee1 AnIn2 Function Max - Max ( 1 500 rpm)

l5tZl Anlnl Setup = 4-20 mA [5 t e S1 Anln2 Operation - Sub-

15134) Anlnl Function Min = Min (0 rpm) Calculation:

15136) AnInl Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)
[5 138] AnIn 1 Operation = Add+
Anlnl = (8-0) I (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpm
l5t+1Anln2 Function = Process Ref,, AnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) * (1500-0) * 0 = 600 rPm

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Fu nctional Description L25

The actual process reference will be:
NOTE: For bipol func,tion, input RunR and RunL needs to
+ 1200 - 600 = 600 rpm
be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to "R+E'.

Anlnl Setup 15L21 NorE: Always check the needed set up when the setting
The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogue of s1 is changed; selection will not adapt automatically.
input in accordance with the signal used that will be
'$7ith
connected to the analogue input. this selection the Com munication information
input can be determined as current (4-20 mA) or voltage
(0- 10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available for
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43202
using a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, or a
user deftned input range. \7ith a bipolar input reference Profibus sloVindex L69/1:06
signal, it is possible to control the motor in rwo directions. Fieldbus format U lnt
See Fig. 104.
Modbus format U lnt

NOTE: The selection of voltage or curlent input is done

with 51. When the swltch is in voltage mode only the
Speed n
voltage menu ltems are selectable. With the switch in
current mode only the current menu items are
selectable.

5L2 Anlnl Setup

StpEI 4-2
Defa u lt: 4-2O mA

Dependent on Setting of switch 51

The current input has a fixed threshold

4-2OmA 0 (Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full
range for the input signal. See Fig. 1-06.

Normal full current scale configuration of

0-2OmA T the input that controls the full range for the
Fig. 104
input signal. See Fig. 105.
The scale of the current controlled input,
that controls the full range for the input sig
User mA 2
nal. Can be defined by the advanced Anln
Min and Anln Max menus.

Sets the input for a bipolar current input,

User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the
3
mA input signal. Scale can be defined in
advanced menu Anln Bipol.
Normal full voltage scale configuration of
o-10v 4 the input that controls the full range for the
input signal. See Fig. 105.

The voltage input has a fixed threshold

2-LOV 5 (Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full range Fig. I 05 Normalfull-scale configuration
for the input sisnal. See Fig. 106.

The scale of the voltage controlled input,

that controls the full range for the input sig
User V 6
nal. Can be defined by the advanced Anln
Min and Anln Max menus.

Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input,

User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the
7
V input signal. Scale can be defined in
advanced menu Anln Bipol.

L26 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

 Communication informarion

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43204

Profibus slot/index L69/LO8

Fieldbus format Long
Modbus format El nt

Special function: Inverted reference signal

o 2v 1ov If the Anln minimum value is higher than the Anln
4mA 2 OmA maximum value, rhe input will acr as an inverted reference
Fig. 106 2-10 V/4-20 mA (Liue Zero) input, see Fig. 107.

Anlnl Advanced t513I

NorE: The different menus wil! automatically be set to lnvert
either '(mA" oJ "V", based on the selection in Anln 1 Anln Min >
Anln Max
Setup [512J.

513 Anlnl Advan

STPET

Fig. 107 Inuerted reference

Anlnl Min [5131]
Parameter to set the minimum value of the external Anlnl- Bipol [5133]
reference signal. Only visible if t: 12) - User mAA/: This menu is auromatically displayed ifAnln I Setup is ser ro
User Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window will

5131 Anrnl MTn automatically show mA or V range according ro selected

StpE Ov/ 4.0

flunction. The range is set by changing the positive
maximum value; the negative value is automatically adapted
Defa u lt: O v/4.O0 mA accordingly. Only visible if [: 12) - User Bipol mAN. The
inputs RunR and RunL input need to be acrive, and
O.OO-2O.OO mA
Range: Rotation, 1219], must be set to "R+L", to operate the
0-10.00 v
bipolar function on the analogue input.

Communication information
5133 Anrnl BipoJ-
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43203 StpEIlo. oov /20. oomA
Profibus slot/index 1.:69/ LO7
Defa u lt: 1O.OO V/2O.OO mA
Fieldbus format Long
Range: 0.0-20.0 mA, 0.00-10.00 V
Modbus format Elnt

Com munication information

Anlnl Max [5132]
Parameter to set the maximum value of the external Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43205
reference signal. Only visible if l5l2) - LJser mA/V.
Profibus sloVindex 169/7O9
Fieldbus format Long
5L32 Anfnl Max
Stp 10 . OV/20 .O Modbus format Elnt

Defa u lt: L0.00 v/2O.O0 mA

0.00-20.00 mA
Ra nge:
0-10.00 v

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
Anlnl Function Min [5134] Anlnl Function Max [5136]
'$7'ith
\7ith AnIn 1 Function Min the physical minimum value is Anln 1 Function Max the physical maximum value is

unit. The default scaling is

scaled to selected process scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is

dependent of the selected function of Anlnl [;11]. dependent of the selected function of Anlnl [t11]. See
Table 25.

5134 Anrnl Fctvlin

stpE! Min 5136 Anlnl FcIvIax
StpEI tlax
Defa u lt: Min
Defa u lt: Max
Min 0 Min value
Min 0 Min value
Max L Max value
Max T Max value
User-
2 Define user value in menu [5135] User-def inec 2 Define user value in menu [5137]
defined

Communication information
Table 25 shows corresponding values for the min and max
selections depending on the function of the analogue input
Modbus lnstance nol
[5tt1. 43207
DeviceNet no:

Table 25 Profibus slot/index L69/LLL

Long,
Anln Function Mln Max o/o.
Fieldbus format Speed/Torque 1=1 rPm or
Speed Min Speed 134L1 Max Speed t3431 Other 1= 0.001

Torque o% Max Torque t351I Modbus format Elnt

Process Ref Process Min 13241 Process Max t3251

Process Value Process Min 13241 Process Max t3251

Anlnl Function Value Max [51-37]
\With AnIn 1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined
value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is
Commun ication information selected in menu [5 136].

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43206

169/ 110
5137 Anlnl Vallax
Profibus slot/index
Ulnt
StpEI 0.000
Fieldbus format
Modbus format U lnt Defa ult: 0.000
Ra nge: -10000.000 - 10000.000
Anlnl Function Value Min [5135]
'S7ith
AnIn 1 Functiotr ValMin you define a user-defined Communication information
value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is
selected in menu [5 134]. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43551
Profibus slot/index 17o/2oo
5f35 Anlnl VaIvIin Long,
StpE 0.000
Fieldbus format
Speed t=L rpm
Torq ue t=to/o
Defa u lt: o.ooo Process val 1-=O.OO1

Ra nge: -10000.000 - 10000.000 Modbus format Elnt

Communication information NOTE: With Anln Min, Anln Max, Anln Function Min and
Anln Function Max settings, loss of feedback signals
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43541, (e.8. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can be
L7O/ 1e0
compensated to ensule an acculate process control.
Profibus slot/index
Long,
Speed t=7- rpm
Fieldbus format Torq ue L=Lo/o
Process val 1-0.001-

Modbus format El nt

Fu nstional Descri Ption Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

 Example:

Process sensor is a sensor Anln change

with the following specification:
Range: 0-3 bar
Output: 2-10 mA Original input signal

Analogue input should be ser up according ro:

l5tZl Anlnl Setup = L]ser mA Filtered Anln signal

lltlll Anlnl Min = 2 mA

l5tlZ) Anlnl Max = l0 mA
15134) Anlnl Function Min - L]ser-defined
[5135) AnInl VaMin = 0.000 bar
15136) AnIn I Function Max = User-defined
l5l37l Anlnl VaMax = 3.000 bar
Anlnl Operation [5138]
Fig. 108
5138 Anfnl Oper
stPEI Add+ Anlnl Enable [513A]
Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection via
Defa u lt: Add+ digital inputs (Digln ser ro function AnIn select).
Analogue signal is added to selected
Add+ o
function in menu [S11].
13A Anfnl EnaEl
Sub- T
Analogue signal is subtracted from
selected function in menu [511].
stPEI on
Defa u lt: On
Communication information On 0 Anlnl is always active

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43208

!Digln T Anlnl is only active if the digital input is low.

Profibus slot/index
Digln 2 Anlnl is only active if the digitat input is high
769/L72
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Communication information
Modbus format Ulnt
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no Anln 7 4321:0
Anlnl- Filter [5139] Profibus sloVindex Anln 1, 169/ LI4
If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference
Fieldbus format Ulnt
value), rhe filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A change
of the input signal will reach 630/o on AnIn I within the sei Modbus format U lnt
AnInl Filter time. After 5 times theset rime, Anlnl will
have reached l00o/o of the input change. See Fig. 108.
Anln2 Function t514I
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.
5139 AnInI-ffi
stPEI o- ls Same function as AnIn 1 Func t5 t t 1.

Defa u lt: 0.1 s 514 AnI,n2 FC

Range: o.oo1 - 10.0 s stPEI ofr
Defa ult: off
Communication information
Selection: Same as in menu [511]
Modbus lnstance no/ DeviceNet no: 43209
Communication information
Profibus slot/index L69/ 113
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001 s Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 432!7
Modbus format Elnt Profibus slot/index L6e/rLs
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Funstional Description
Anln2 Setup [515] Anln3 Setup t5181
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2' Same functions as Anlnl Setup l5tZ1.

Same functions as Anlnl Setup l5tZ1.

518 AnIn3 SetuP
f15 AnT.n2 SetuP
StpEI 4'2
StpEI 4-2 Defa u lt: 4-20 mA

Default lq-20mA Dependent on setting of switch s3

Dependent on Setting of switch 52 Selection: Same as in menu [512].

Selection: Same as in menu [512].

Commun ication information

Communication information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43222

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 432L2 Profibus sloVindex L69/L26

Profibus slot/index !6e/LL6 Fieldbus format U lnt
Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Anln3 Advanced t5191

Anln2Advanced t516I Same functions and submenus as under AnIn 1 Advanced
Same functions and submenus as under Anlnl Advanced t5l3l.
t5131.
519 AnIn3 Advan
515 AnTn2 Advan STPEI
STPET

Communication information
Com munication in formation
43223-43230
43213-43220 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43543
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no 43542
43553
43552 L69/L27 -r6s/r34
L69/7L7 -L24 Profibus slot/index L7O/ L92
Profibus slot/index 17o/ L91, L7O/2O2
77O/2O1,

Anln4 Function [51A]

Anln3 Function [517] Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4.
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3'
Same function as Anlnl Func [5t t1.
Same function as Anlnl Func [5t t1'

51A AnInA Fc
517 AnIn3 Fc stpE! off
stpE! off
Defa u lt: off
Default: lOff
Se lection: Same as in menu [511]
Selection: Same as in menu [511]

Commun ication information

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43231,

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43227
Profibus sloVindex !6e/ 135
Profibus slot/index L69/725
Fieldbus format U lnt
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
Functional DescriPtion
 Anln4 Set-up [518] Lf,.5.2 Digital Inputs [S2O]
Same functions as Anlnl Setup l5tZ1. Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs.

518 AnIn4 Setrrp NorE: Additional inputs will become avaitable when the
StpEI 4-2 l/O option boards are connected.

Defa u lt: 4-20 mA

Dependent on
Digital lnput 1, l52Ll
Setting of switch 54
To select the function of the digital input.
Selection: Same as in menu [512].
On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs.
Communication information If the same function is programmed for more than one input
that function will be activated according ro "oR" logic if
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43232 nothing else is stated.

Profibus slot/index L69/ 136

Fieldbus format lnt
52L Digrn 1
U
stpE! RunL
Modbus format U lnt
Defa u lt: RunL

off 0 The input is not active.

Anln4 Advanced t51CI
Be aware that if there is nothing connected
Same functions and submenus as under Anlnl Advanced to the input, the AC drive will trip at "Exter-
15r3l. Ext. Trip 3 naI trip" immediately.
NOTE: The Ecternal Trip is active low.
NOTE: Astivated according to "AND' logic.
51C AnIn4 Advin
STPET Stop command according to the selected
Stop mode in menu [33B].
Stop 4
NOTE: The Stop command is active low.
Communication information NOTE: Activated according to "AND" logic.

Enable command. General start condition

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43544
Profibus slot/index
43233-43240 to run the AC drive. lf made low during
running the output of the AC drive is cut off
43554 immediately, causing the motor to coast to
Enable 5 zero speed.
L69/r37 -744 NOTE: !f none of the digital inputs are
r7o/r93 programmed to "Enable", the internal
17o/2o3 enable signal is astive.
NOTE: Acti\rated according to ?ND' logic.

Run Right command (positive speed). The

RunR 6 output of the AC drive will be a
clockwise rotary field.
Run Left command (negative speed). The
RunL 7 output of the AC drive will be a
cou nter-clockwise rota ry field.

Reset command. To reset a Trip condition

Reset I and to enable the Autoreset function.
Preset Gtrll 10 To select the Preset Reference.

Preset Ctrl2 7T To select the Preset Reference.

Preset Ctrl3 T2 To select the Preset Reference.

lncreases the internal reference value

according to the set AccMotPot time t3331.
MotPot Up 13
Has the same function as a "real" motor
potentiometer, see Fig. 89.

Decreases the internal reference value

MotPot
L4 according to the set DecMotPot time [334].
Down
See MotPot Up.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Functional Description

 Communication information
Feedback input Pumpl for Pumq/Fan
Pumpl
15 control and informs about the status of the
Feedb Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43241,
auxilia ry connected Pum P/fan.
Profibus slot/index L69/ r45
Feedback inPut PumP 2for PumP/Fan
Pump2
16 control and informs about the status of the Fieldbus format U lnt
Feedb
a uxilia ry connected PumP/fan.
Modbus format U lnt
Feedback input PumP3 for PumP/Fan
Pump3
L7 control and informs about the status of the Table 26
Feedb
auxiliary connected PUm P/f an-

Feedback input PumP 4for PumP/Fan Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2
Pump4
18 control and informs about the status of the 0 0
Feedb A
a uxiliary connected PumP/fan.
B 1, o
Feedback inPut PumPS for PumP/Fan
Pump5 o
19 control and informs about the status of the C 1,
Feedb
auxiliary connected Pump/fa n. D t L
Feedback input PumP 6 for PumP/Fan
Pump6
20 control and informs about the status of the
Feedb NOTE: To activate the palameter set selection' menu
auxilia ry connected Pum P/fan.
241, must be set to Digln.
Timer 1 Delay t6431 will be activated on the
Timer L 2L
rising edge of this signal.

22
Timer 2 Delay t6531 will be activated on the Digital lnput 215221to Digital lnput 8
Timer 2
rising edge of this si$nal.
t528I
Activates other parameter set. See Table I
Set Ctrl 1 23 Same function as lSZ1l. Default function for Digln
Digln
26 for selection Possibilities.
B is Reset. For Digln 3 to 7 the default function is Off.
Activates other parameter set. See Table
Set Ctrl 2 24
26 for selection Possibilities.
522 Digln
Mot PreMag 25
Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster
motor start.
stpE! Ru

To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run Defa u lt: RunR

Jog 26 command with the set Jog sPeed and Selection: Same as in menu [521]
Direction, page 105.
Be aware that if there is nothing connected Com mun ication in formation
to the input, the AC drive will trip at
Ext Mot
27 "External Motor Temp" immediately.
Temp Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43241,-43248
NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active
low. Profibus slot/index 169/ 1.46-L69/ L52
Activate local mode defined in l2t71l and Fieldbus format U lnt
Loc/Rem 28
12L721. Ulnt
Modbus format
Activate logue inputs
/ deaclivate a na

Anln select 29 defined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and

[51CA]
Liquid cooling low level signal.
LC Level 30 NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active
low.

Brake acknowled$e input for Brake Fault

Brk Ackn 31 control. Function is activated via this selec-
tion see menu [33HJ Page 1:O2

NOTE: For bipolfunction, input RunR and RunL needs to

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to "R+U'.

Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OL'4428-0 1r3

Additional digital inputs t5291 to t52Hl AnOutl Function t5311
Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed, Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale and
Bl Digln | 15291 - 83 Digln 3l52Hl. B stands for board range are defined byAnOutl Advanced settings [533].
and I to 3 is the number of the board which is related to the
position of the I/O option board on the option mounting
plate. The functions and selections are the same as Digln 1
531 AnOutl Fc
l5zt1.
stpflI spee
Communication information Defa u lt: Speed

Actual process value according to

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43501-43509 Process Val o
Process feedback signa l.

Profibus sloVindex L7O/ r5O-L7O/ 158 Speed 1, Actual speed.

Fieldbus format lnt Torque 2 Actualtorque.
Modbus format lnt Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value.
Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power.

L1,.5.3 Analogue Outputs t53OI Freq uency 5 Actual frequency.

Submenu with all settings for the analogue ourpurs. Cu rre nt 6 Actual current.
Selections can be made from application and AC drive val-
El power 7 Actual electrica I power.
ues, in order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputs can
also be used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such a signal Output volt 8 Actual output voltage.
can be used as: DC-voltage I Actual DC link voltage.
. a reference signalfor the next AC drive in a Master/Slave Mirror of received signal value on
configuration (see Fig. I 09). Anlnl 10
Anl n 1.
. a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue Mirror of received signal value on
Anln2 TT
reference value. Anln2.

Mirror of received signal value on

Anln3 72
Anln3.

Mirror of received signal value on

Anln4 13
Anln4.

Actual internal speed reference Value

Speed Ref L4
after ramp and Y/Hz.
Actual torque reference value
Torque Ref 15
(=0 in Y/Hz mode)

NOTE: When selections Anlnl, Anln2 ..,. Anln4 is

selected, the setup of the Anout (menu t5321 or [535])
has to be set to O-1OV or O-2OmA. When the AnOut Setup
ls set to e.g. 4-2OmA, the mirrorlng Is not working
correct,

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 4325r

Profibus slot/index L69/ 155
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3 Functional Description 133

AnOut l Setup t5321 Anoutl Advanced t533I
Preset scaling and offset of the output configuratiotr. \With the functions in the AnOut I Advanced menu, the
output can be completely defined according to the
application needs. The menus will automatically be adapted
532 AnOutl Setup to "mA" or
((V",
according to the selection in AnOutl Setup
STPET 4-2 l5tzl.
Defa u lt: 4-2OmA

The current output has a fixed threshold

533 AnOut 1 Adv
4-20mA 0 (Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full STPET
range for the output signal. See Fig. 106,

Normal full current scale configuration of Anoutl Min [5331]

0-20mA T the output that controls the full range for
This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or
the output signal. See Fig. l-05.
User V is selected in menu AnOut 1 Setup l5lZ). The menu
The scale of the current controlled output will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting
that controls the full range for the output according to the selected setup. Only visible if lSlZ] = User
User mA 2
signal. Can be defined by the advanced mA/V
AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus.

Sets the output for a bipolar current

output, where the scale controls the
5331 AnOut 1 Min
User Bipol
mA
3
range for the output signal. Scale can be stpEl 4
defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
Defa u lt: 4mA
Normal full voltage scale configuration of
0-10v 4 the output that controls the full range for Range: 0.00 - 20.00 mA, 0 - 10.00 V
the output signal. See Fig. 105.
The voltage output has a fixed threshold Communication i nformation
2-LOV 5 (Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full
range for the output signal. See Fig. 106. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43253

The scale of the voltage controlled output Profibus slot/index 169/ L57
that controls the full range for the output
User V 6 Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01
signal. Can be defined by the advanced
AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. Modbus format El nt
Sets the output for a bipolar voltage

User Bipol V 7
output, where the scale controls the
range for the output signal. Scale can be
defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
Com munication information
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43252
AnOutl Max [5332]
This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or
User V is selected in menu AnOutl Setup 1532]. The menu
will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting a
ccording to the selected setup. Only visible if l;lZ] = User
mAA/..

Profibus slot/index L69/ 156 5332 AnOut 1 Max

Fieldbus format U lnt Stp 20.
Modbus format U lnt Defa u lt: 20.00 mA
Range: O.OO-2O.OO mA, O-1O.OO V

Communicatio n i nformation
AC drive AC drive
Master Slave Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no 43254
Profibus slot/index r6e/ 158
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01

Modbus format Elnt

Fig. 109

L34 Fu nctional Description Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3

 AnOutl Bipol [5333] Table 27
Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or LJser Bipol v is
selected in menu Anoutl setup. The menu will AnOut
Min Value Max Value
automatically show mA or V range according ro the selected Function
function. The range is set by changing the positive
Process Value Process Min t3241 Process Max [3251
maximum value; the negarive value is automatically adapted
accordingly. Only visible if lSl}l = User Bipol mA/V. Speed Min Speed t3411 Max Speed [343]
Torq ue o% Max Torque [351J
5333 AnoutaEIFo:I Process Ref Process Min t324) Process Max t3251
Stp -10.00-10.00 Shaft Power o% Motor Power 12231
Defa u lt: -L0.00-10.00 v Freq uency Fmin * Motor Frequency 1222)
Ra nge: -10.00-10.00 V, -20.0-20.0 mA Cu rrent OA Motor Current 12241
El Power OW Motor Power 12231
Com munication information
Output Voltage OV Motor Voltage t2271
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43255 DC voltage OV 1000 v
Profibus sloVindex L69/r59 Anln 1 Anlnl Function Min Anlnl Function Max
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 Anln2 Anln2 Function Min Anln2 Function Max
Modbus format El nt Anln3 Anln3 Function Min Anln3 Function Max
Anln4 Anln4 Function Min Anln4 Function Max
AnOutl Function Min [5334]
'with Anoutl Function Min the physical minimum value is *) Fmin is dependent on the
scaled to selected presentation.
set value in menu
The default scaling is "Minimum Spe ed l34l)"
dependent of the selected function of Anoutr t:ar].
Communication information

5334 Anffi Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43256

stpEl Min Profibus slot/index L69/L6O
Defa u lt: Min Long,
Min 0 Fieldbus format 1=0.1W, O.tHz,0.1 A,
Min value
0.1 V or O,OO1
Max T Max value
Modbus format Elnt
User-defined 2 Define user value in menu t53351

Thble 27 shows corresponding values for the min and max
selections depending on the function of the analogue ourpur
15311.
Example
Set the Anout function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, ser
AnOut functionMin 15334) ro "l.Jser-defined" and AnOutl
VaMin15335) - 0.0. This results in an anlogue ourput signd
from 014 mA to 20mA::\Hz to Fmot.
This principle is valid for all Min to Max settings.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
AnOutl Function Value [5335] AnOutl Function Value Max [53371
a user-defined
\With AnOutl Function VaMax you define a user-defined
With AnOutl Function VaMin you define
value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is

selected in menu 15334). selected in menu [5 334).

5335 AnOutlval'Iin 5337 AnOutlVat'Iax

stpE! 0.000 StpEI 0.000
Default | 0.000 Defa ult: 0.000

Range: -10000.000- 10000.000 Ra nge: -10000.000- 10000.000

Communication information Commun ication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43545 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43555

Profibus slot/index L7O/ L94 Profibus sloVindex L7O/2O4

Long, Long,
Speed t=t rpm Speed L=t rpm
Fieldbus format Torq ue 1=Lo/o Fieldbus format Torque 1:Lo/o
Process val 1=0.001 Process val 1=0.001
Modbus format El nt nt
Modbus format El

AnOutl Function Max [5336]

\With AnOut I Function Min the physical minimum value is AnOut2 Function t5341
scaled to selected presentation' The default scaling is Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2.
dependent on the selected function of Anoutl [;31]' see
Table 27.
534 AnOut2 Fc
StpEI Torgue
f336 AnOutlFCt'Iax
StpEI l'Iax Defa u lt: Torque

Selection: Same as in menu [531]

Defa u lt: Max

Min 0 Min value

Com munication i nformation
Max L Max value

User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337] Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4326L

Profibus slot/index L69/ 165

Communication information lnt
Fieldbus format U

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43257 Modbus format U lnt

Profibus sloflindex 1:69/ 161

Fieldbus format Long, 0.001 Anout2 Setup t5351

Elnt Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for
Modbus format
analogue output 2.

NOTE: lt is possible to set An0utl up as an inverted

output signal by setting Anoutl Min > An0utl Max. See
535 AnOut2 SetuP
Fig. LO7. StpEI 4-2
Defa ult: 4-20mA

Selection: Same as in menu [532]

Emotron AB AI-4428-01r3
Functional Descri Ption
 Communication information
The frequency is limited by the
At Max spd 7
Maximum Speed.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43262
No Trip 8 No Trip condition active.
Profibus slot/index 169/1:66
Trip I A Trip condition is active.
Fieldbus format U lnt
AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active.
Modbus format Int
U
Limit lt A Limit condition is active.

Warning 72 A Warning condition is active.

AnOut2 Advanced t536I The AC drive is ready for operation
same functions and submenus as under Anoutl Advanced and to accept a start command. This
Ready 13
1533). means that the AC drive is powered
up and healthy.

536 AnOut2 AEvan T= Tri, L4

The torque is limited by the torque
limit function.
STPET
The output current is higher than the
motor nominal current [224], reduced
lrlno* 15
Communication in formation according to Motor ventilation l229l,
see Fig. 73.
43263-43267 The output is used to control a
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43546 Bra ke 16
mechanical brake.
43556
One of the Anln input signals is lower
Sgnl<Offset T7
169/767 -L69/77r than 75Yo of the threshold level.
Profibus slot/index 77O/L95
The max or min alarm level has been
17o/2o5 Alarm 18
reached.

The max or min pre alarm level has

Pre-Alarm
LL.5.4 Digital Outputs IS4OI
19
been reached.
Submenu with all the settings for the digital ourpurs. The max alarm level has been
Max Alarm 20
reached.

Digital Out Ll54L) Max PreAlarm 2T

The max pre alarm level has been
reached.
Sets the function for the digital output 1.
The min alarm level has been
Min Alarm 22
reached.
NoTE: The definitions described here are valid for the
active output condition. The min pre alarm Level has been
Min PreAlarm 23
reached.
LY 24 Logic output
541 DigOut 1
Y.

stPEI Rea
!LY 25 Logic output Y inverted.
LZ 26 Logic output Z.
Defa u lt: Ready
lV 27 Logic output Z inverted.
Output is not active and constanily
off o CA1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output.
low.
!A1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output.
Output is made constanily high, i.e.
On 7 for checking circuits and trouble CA2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output.
shooti ng.
tA2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output.
Running. The AC drive output is active
Run 2 CD1 32 Digital comparator 1 output.
- produces current for the motor.
Stop !D1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output.
3 The AC drive output is not active.

The output frequency:Oto.1Hz when

cD2 34 Digital comparator 2 output.
OHz 4
in Run condition. ID2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output.
The speed is increasing or decreasing Run command is active or AC drive
Acc/Dec 5
along the acc. ramp dec. ramp. running. The signal can be used to
At Process Operation 36 control the mains contactor if the AC
6 The output - Reference.
drive is equipped with Standby supply
option.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Fu nctional Description
 37 Timerl output Com Error 80 Serial communication lost
T1Q

Timerl inverted output The AC drive requires external cooling.

!T1Q 38 External Fan 81-
lnternal fans are active.
T2Q 39 Timer2 output
LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling PumP
!r2Q 40 Timer2 inverted outPut
Activate liquid cooling heat exchanger
Sleeping 4L Sleepi ng fu nction activated LC HE Fan 83
fan
Crane Deviat 42 Tripped on deviation LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active
PumpSlavel 43 Activate pumP slave 1 Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/
Run Right 85
44 Activate pumP slave 2 clockwise direction.
PumpSlave2
45 Activate pumP slave 3 Negative speed (<0.5%), i.e. reverse
PumpSlave3 Run Left 86
counter clockwise direction.
PumpSlave4 46 Activate pump slave 4
Com Active 87 Fieldbus com mu nication active.
PumpSlave5 47 Activate pumP slave 5
Brk Fault 88 Tripped on brake fault (not released)
PumpSlave6 4B Activate pumP slave 6
Warning and continued oPeration
PumpMasterl 49 Activate pumP master L BrkNotEngage 89 (keep torque) due to Brake not
Activate pumP master 2 engaged during stoP.
PumpMaste12 50
51 Activate pumP master 3 Failure occured in built-in option
PumpMaster3 Option 90
boa rd.
PumpMaster4 52 Activate pump master 4
CA3 91 Analogue comparator 3 output
PumpMaster5 53 Activate pump master 5
Analogue comparator 3 inverted
PumpMaste16 54 Activate pump master 6 !A3 92
output
All Pumps 55 All pumps are running CA4 93 Analogue comparator 4 output
Only Master 56 Only the master is running Analogue comParator 4 inverted
!A4 94
LoclRem 57 Local/Rem function is active output

58 Standby suPPlY oPtion is active CD3 95 Digital comparator 3 output

Sta nd by

59 Trip when function is active !D3 96 Digital comparator 3 inverted output

PTC Trip

60 Trip when function is active CD4 97 Digital comparator 4 outPut

PT100 Trip
61 Overvoltage due to high main voltaSe !D4 98 Digital comparator 4 inverted output
Overvolt

Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode

Commun ication information
Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration

Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc. ramP Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no 43271,

Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec. ramP Profibus slot/index 169/ !75

66 l2t limit protection active Fieldbus format U lnt

12t

67 Overvoltage limit function active Modbus format U lnt

V-Limit

C-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active

Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning

Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning

Digln 1 7L Digital input 1

Digln 2 72 Digital input 2

Digln 3 73 Digital input 3

Digln 4 74 Digital input 4

Digln 5 75 Digital input 5

Digln 6 76 Digital input 6

Digln 7 77 Digital input 7

Digln 8 78 Digital input 8

Active trip that needs to be manually
ManRst TriP 79
reset

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Descri Ption
 Digital Out 215421 Retay 2 [552]
NorE: The definitions described here are valid for the NOTE: The definitions descrlbed here are valid for the
active output condition. active output condition.

Sets the function for the digital output 2. Sets the function for the relay output 2.

542 DigOut2 552 Relay 2

StpEI Brake StpEI Run
Defa u lt: Brake Defa u lt: Run
Selection: Same as in menu [5a1] Selection: Same as in menu [5a1]

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43272 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43274

Profibus sloVindex L69/176 Profibus slot/index 169/L78
Fieldbus format U lnt Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format U lnt Modbus format Ulnt

LL.5.5 Relays [550] Relay 3 t553I

Submenu with all the settings for the relay ourpurs. The Sets the function for the relay output 3.
relay mode selection makes it possible to establish a "fail
safe" relay operation by using the normal closed conracr to
function as the normal open contact. 553 ReJ.ay 3
stpEl off
NorE: Additlonal relays will become available whe n l/o Defa u lt: off
option boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards with 3
relays each. Selection: Same as in menu [541]

Communication information
Retay L t5511
Sets the function for the relay ourpur l. same function as Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43275
digital ourput | 5q1l can be selected. Profibus slot/index L69/L79
Fieldbus format U lnt
51 Re1ay 1 Modbus format
stpE! rrip U lnt

Defa lt:
u Trip Board Relay [554] to ts5Cl
Selection: Same as in menu [541] These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option
board is fitted in slot 1,2, or 3. The ourputs are named Bl
Com mun ication information Relay l-3, 82 Relay t-3 and 83 Rel ay l-3. B stands for
board and l-3 is the number of the board which is related to
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43273 the position of the I/o option board on the option
mounting plate.
Profibus slot/index 769/r77
Fieldbus format U lnt NorE: vlsible only if optional board is detected or if any
Modbus format input/output is astivated.
U lnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Functiona I Description
Communication information LL.5.6 Virtual Connections t560I
Functions to enable eight internal connections of
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no 435rr-43519 comparator, timer and digital signals, without occupying
Profibus slot/index !7O/ 160 -L7O/ 168 physical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are used to
*ir.l.rs connection of a digital outPut function to a digital
Fieldbus format U lnt
input function. Available signals and control functions can
Modbus format U lnt be used to create your own specific functions.

Example of start delaY

Relay Advanced [55D] The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after Digln 1 gets
This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will high. Diglnl has a time delay of 10 s.
also be closed when the AC drive is malfunctioning or
powered down. Menu Parameter Setting

Example 152LI Diglnl Timer 1

A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To t5611 VIO 1 Dest RunR
.orrtrol the required number of PumPs by the relay mode VIO l Source T1Q
[562]
NC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally by the
Timerl Trig Digln 1
pump control, but are also activated when the AC drive is t6411
tripped or powered down. 16421 Timerl Mode Delay

[643] Timerl Delay 0:00:10

5So Relay Adv
STPET NOTE: When a di$ital input and a virtual destination are
set to the same function, this function will act as an OR
logic function.
Relay L Mode [55D1]

5D1-neJ.ay Mode Virtual Connection 1" Destination t561-l

StpEI N -o \ilfith this function the destination of the virtual connection
is established. \Mhen a function can be controlled by several
Defa u lt: N.O sources, e.B. VC destination or Digital Input, the function
The normal open contact of the relay will will be controlled in conformiry with "OR [ogic". See Digln
N.O 0 for descriptions of the different selections.
be activated when the function is active.
The normally closed contact of the relay
will act as a normal open contact. The 561 VIO 1 Dest
N.C 1, contact will be opened when function is
not active and closed when function is
stpE! of
active. Defa u lt: off
Same selections as for Digital lnput 1,
Communication information Selection:
menu [521].

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43276

Com mun icatio n information
Profibus slot/index L6e/ 180

Fieldbus format U lnt Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43281,

Modbus format U lnt Profibus slot/index L69/ 185

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Relay Modes [55D2)to [55DC] lnt
Modbus format U
Same function as for relay 1 mode [55D1].
Communication information

43277 -43278,
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43521,-43529

L69/ 181- L6e/782,

Prof ibus slot/index L7O/ L7O-17O/ 1-78

Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

nctional Descri Ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Fu
Virtual Connection 1- Source t562I 11.6 Logical Functions and
\With this function the source of the virtual connection is
defined. See DigOut 1 for description of the different
Timers [600]
'With
selections. the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers,
conditional signals can be programmed for control or
signalling features. This gives you the abiliry to compare
562 VIO 1 Source different signals and values in order to generate monitoring/
stpE! off controlling features.

Defa u lt: off

Selection: Same as for menu [541].
LL.6.1 Comparators t61OI
The comparators available make it possible to monitor
different internal signals and values, and visualize via digital
Communication information
relay outputs, when a specific value or status is reached or
established.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43282
Profibus sloVindex 169/ 186
Analogue comparators [611] - [614]
There are 4 analogue comparators that compare any
Fieldbus format U lnt available analogue value (including the analogue reference
Modbus format Ulnt inputs) with two adjustable levels. The two levels available
are Level HI and Level LO. There are rwo analogue
comparator rypes selectable, an analogue comparator with
Virtual Connections 2-8 t5631 to t56Gl hysteresis and an analogue window comparator.

Same function as virtual connection I 5e1] and The analogue hysteresis rype comparator uses the rwo
1562).
available levels to create a hysteresis for the comparator
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 berween setting and resetting the output. This function gives
Destination. a clear difference in switching levels, which lets the process
'With
adapt until a certain action is started. such a hysteresis,
43283, 43285,43297 , even an unstable analogue signal can be monitored without
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43289, 4329].., 43293, getting a nervous comparator output signal. Another feature
43295 is the possibiliry to ger a fixed indication that a certain level
L69/ L87,189, Lgt, has been passed. The comparator can latch by setting Level
Profibus sloVindex
193, 195, 1.97,199 LO to a higher value than Level HI.
Fieldbus format U lnt The analogue window comparator uses the two available
Modbus format U lnt levels to define the window in which the analogue value
should be within for setting the comparator output.
The input analogue value of the comparator can also be
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8
selected as bipolar, i.e. treated as signed value or
Source.
unipolar, i.e. treated as absolute value.

43284, 43286,43298, Refer to Fig. ll4, page 146 where these functions are
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 43290, 43292,43294, illustrated.
43296
Digital comparators [615]
L69/ 188, 190, t92, There arc 4 digital comparators that compare any available
Profibus sloVindex
194,196, 1gg, 200
digital signal.
Fieldbus format U lnt
The output signals of these comparators can be logically tied
Modbus format U lnt together to yield a logical output signal.
All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or
relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections
t5601.

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Functional Description L4L

CA1 Setup t6111 The output signal can be programmed as a virtual
connection source and to the digital or relay outputs.
Analogue comparator 1, parameter group.

5111 CA1 Value

Analogue Comparator 7-, Value [61LL|
Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator I
stpflI s
(cAl). Defa u lt: Speed
Analogue comparator I comparesthe selectable analogue Set by Process settings [321] and
value in menu with the constant Level HI in menu Process Val 0
[6111] 13221
[611 2) and constant Level LO in menu [6] l3]. If Bipolar
Speed L rpm
type[6] lJ] input signal is selected then the comparison is
if
made with sign otherwise unipolar selected then Torq ue 2 %
comparison is made with absolute values.
Shaft Power 3 KW
For Hysteresis comparator type [6114], when the value
El Power 4 KW
exceeds the upper limit level high, the output signal CAI is
set high and lAl low, see Fig. 110. \When the value decreases Cu rre nt 5 A

below the lower limit, the output signal CAl is set low and Output Volt 6 V
!A1 high.
Frequency 7 Hz

DC Voltage 8 V
Analogue value:
Menu [6111] Heatsink Tmp I OC

Signal:CA1
OC
ljustable Level Hl. PT100_1 10
Menu l6Lt2)
PT100_2 1! OC

OC
PT100_3 T2

Energy 13 kwh

Fig. 1 l0 Analogue comparator tyPe Hysteresiss Run Time T4 h

Mains Time 15 h
For \Tindow comparator type [61 14] , when the value is
benveen the lower and upper levels, the output signal value
Anlnl 16 o/o

CAl is set high and !A1 low, see Fig I 13. \When the value is Anln2 L7 %
outside the band of lower and upper levels, the output CAI
Anln3 18 o/o

is set low and !A1 high.

Anln4 19 Yo

Process Ref 20 Set by Process settings [321] and

Level High 161L2) Process Err 2L 13221

An Value t61111 Com munication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43401:

Level Low [6113]
Profibus sloVindex 17O/50
Fieldbus format U lnt
Fig. I I I Anahgu€ compar*tor tyPe "Window
Modbus format U lnt

L42 Fu nstiona I Descri ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

 Example
Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue refer- Reference signal Anlnl
ence signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20 mA, is
connected to Analogue Input I . AnIn I Setup, menu
[5 12) --
4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale ( 1000/o) input
signal on Anln I - 20 mA. \7hen the reference signal on
AnInl increases 80o/o of the threshold (4 mA x 0. g = 3.2
mA), the AC drive will be set in RUN mode. \Mhen the sig-
nal on Anlnl goes below 600/o of the rhreshold (4 mA x 0.6
= 2.4 mA) the AC drive is set to STop mode. The output of
CAI is used as a virtual connection source that controls the
virtual connection destination RUN.

Menu Function Setting

511 Anlnl Function Process reference
5L2 Anln 1 Set-up 4-2O mA, threshold is 4 mA
34L Min Speed 0
343 Max Speed 1500
6LlI CA1 Value Anlnl
6LL2 CA1 Level Hl t6o/o (3.2mA/20mA x LOO%)

6113 CA1 Level LO L2% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%)

6L74 CA1 Type Hysteresis
561 VIO 1 Dest RunR Fig. I t2
562 VIO l Source CA1

21.5 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote No Descrlption

The reference signal passes the Level Lo vatue from
7 below (positive edge), the comparator cA1 output stays
low, mode=RuN.
The reference signal passes the Lever Hl value from
2 below (positive edge), the comparator cA1 output is set
high, mode=RuN.
The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA,
3
the motor speed will now follow the reference signal.
During this period the motor speed wiil follow the
T
reference signal.
The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor
4
speed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level Ht vatue from
5 above (negative edge), the comparator cA1 output stays
high, mode =RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level Lo value from
6 above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 out-
put:STOP.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctional Description
Analogue Comparator 7-, Example
This example describes, both for hysteresis and window ryPe
Level High t61L2l comparator, the normal use of the constant level high and
Sets the analogue comParator high level, with range 1ow.
according ro the selected value in men,, [6111].
Menu Funstion Setting
ffiLeve1 Hr
343 Max Speed 1500
stpEl 300
61LL CA1 Value Speed
Default: lsoO rpm
6TT2 CA1 Level Hl 300 rpm
Range: See min/max in table below.
6113 CA1 Level LO 2OA rpm

6tL4 CA1 Type Hysteresis

Min/Max setting range for menu l6LL2)
561 VC1 Dest Timer 1

Mode Min Max Decimals 562 VC1 Source CA1

Set by Process settings 3

Process Val
l32Ll and 1322)
Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0

Torq ue, Yo 0 Max torque 0

Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0 tl

r rCAl Level Hl [6112]

El Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0

Current, A 0 Motor lnx4 L

CA1 Level LO [6113]
Output volt, V 0 1000 L

Freq uency, Hz 0 400 1,

DC voltage, V 0 1.250 L
oC o 100 L
Heatsink temp,
oC -100 300 T
PT 100 _r_2_3,
tpq4l Hv$erSis
Energy, kwh 0 1000000 o

Run time, h 0 65535 0

Mains time, h 0 65535 0

Output ttlllll
0 100 o CA1 , j[6LL4l
l- Wlndow !I
An ln 7'4o/o r r I :
I
High
Set by Process settings 3
Process Ref
l32Ll and 13221 Low

Set by Process settings

Process Err 3
l32Ll and 1322)

NOTE: lf Bipolar selected [61t5l then Min value is equal Fig. t 13

to -Max in the table.

Com mun ication info rmation

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43402

Profibus slot/index 17o/5L
Long,
L=L W, 0.1A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format O.LHz,0.1oC, 1 kwh,
LH, L%, 1 rPm or 0.001
via process value

Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB 0!-4428-0113
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 No. Description Hysteresls Wlndow Analogue Comparator L,
The reference signal passes the
Level Low [6113]
Level LO value from below (positive Sets the analogue compararor low level, with unit and range
7
edge), the comparator CA1 does not according ro the selected value in menu [6 ] 1 I ] . .
change, output stays low.

5113 CA1 Levdl

2
The reference signal passes the
Level Hl value from below (positive
stpE! 2oo
edge), the comparator CA1 output is
set high.
Defa u lt: 200 rpm
Range: Range as [6112].
The reference signal passes the
Level Hl value from above (negative Communication information
3
edge), the comparator CA1 does not
change, output stays high.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43403

The reference signal passes the Profibus slot/index L7O/52

Level LO value from above (negative
4 Long,
edge), the comparator CA1 is reset,
L=t W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
output is set low. Fieldbus format O.tHz,0.1oC, 1 kwh,
7H, L%, 1 rpm or 0.001
The reference signal passes the via process value
Level LO value from below (positive
5 Modbus format Elnt
edge), the comparator CA1 does not
change, output stays low.

The reference signal passes the

Analogue Comparator 7-, Type tO1 L4t
Selects the analogue compararor
Level Hl value from below (positive Qrpe, i.e. Hysteresis or
6 \ilZindow j.
edge), the comparator CA1 output is rype. See Fig. ll4 and Fig. 1l
set high.

6LL4 cA1 Tlrp=

The reference signal passes the
Level Hl value from above (negative
StpEI Hysteresis
7
edge), the comparator CA1 does not
Defau lt: Hysteresis
change, output stays high.
Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis type com pa rator
The reference slgnal passes the Window L Window type comparator
Level LO value from above (negative
8
edge), the comparator CA1 is reset,
output is set low. Communication informatio n

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4348I

Profibus slot/index r7o/r3o
Long,
L=! W 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format O.7.Hz, O.1oC, 1 kwh,
LH, t%. 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format Elnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctiona I Description
Analogue Comparator 7-, Polarity [6115]
Type t61141 = Window
selects how the selected value in ] should be handled
[6 ] 1 l
CA1
prior to the the analogue comParator , i.e. as absolute value t61151 Unipolar
'
or handled with sign. See Fig. ll4 t61121'Hl > o
lorrsJ Lo >o
An.Value
[6111]

CA1
115 CA1 Po1ar 't61151 Bipolar An.Value
t611Zl Ht > 0
STPET Unipolar forrg] Lo > o t61111

t61131,8jtr|}
CA1
Defa u lt: Unipolar

U nipola r 0 Absolute value of [6111] used il,Hi"

Bipolar L Signed value of [6111] used CA1

t61151 Bipolat
^--^ t
An.Value

Communication information 8ii3is:8 t61111

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43486

L7O/ 135
Fig. I t 5 Principle functionality of compararor featury: fr,
Profibus slot/index "TyPr'[6i t+] =Windoi ' and "Polar [61 l5J"'
Long,
L=t W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
NOTE: When "Unipolal " is selected, absolute value of
Fieldbus format O.lHz,0.1oC, 1 kwh,
1 rPm or 0.001
signal is used.
LH, Lo/o,
via process value

Elnt NOTE: When "Bipolar" ls selested in [6115] then:

Modbus format
1. Functionality ls not symmetrical and
2. Ranges for high/low ale biPolar
Example
See Fig. 1 I 4 and Fig. I 15 for different principle
functionality of comparator features 61 14 and 6115. CA2 Setup 16L21
Type [6114J= HYsteresis Analogue comparator 2, parameter grouP.
CA1
161151 UniPolar
' t6tL21[lt > o An.Value Analogue Comparator 2, Value l6L2L1
lorral Lo > o
[6111]
Function is identical to analogue comParator 1,

'T '-,ilYli" value [6 ] I 1] .

'"'rf?|.?'BiE' 'LOHI 6L2L CA2 Va1ue

-
t61151 Bipolar
CA1
An.Value StpEI Torque
t61121 Hl > o
tbrral'Lo < o -- [6111]
Defa u lt: Torque
LO

Selections: Same as in menu [6111]

Bipolar An.Value
-
t61151
t'6112] Hl < o t61111
tbrrsl Lo < o

Comm unication i nfornlation

Fig. 1 1 4 Princip le functionality of compay.tgr.fealy:':

"Type'[6i 14J - Hysieriis " ind "Polar [6115J"'
nf Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43404
Profibus sloVindex 17O/53

Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctional DescriPtion
 Analogue Comparator 2, Analogue Comparato r 2, Type 16L241
Level High t6L22l Function is identical to analogue compararor t,
Function is identical to analogue compararor 1,
Typ. l6tr4l.
level high 16rr2l.
6L24 CA2 Type
6L22 cA STPET Hysteresis
stPEI 20t, Defa u lt: Hysteresis
20% Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis type compa rator
Range: Enter a value for the high level. Window T Window type comparator

Communication information Communicatio n i nformation

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43405 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43482
Profibus slot/index L7O/54 Profibus slot/index L7O/L3!
Long Long,
L=t W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, L=t W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.LH2,0.1"C, 1 kwh, Fieldbus format O.LHz, O.1oC, 1 kwh,
tH, L%, 1 rpm or 0.001 tH, L%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value via process value
Modbus format Elnt Modbus format Elnt

Analogue Comparator 2, Analogue Comparator 2, polar 16L251

Level Low t6123) Function is identical to analogue compararor l,
Function is identical to analogue compararor l, Polar [61 15].
level low [6 ] 1 3].

6L25 CA2 Pollar

6L23 cA2ffi stpE! Unipolar
stPEI 1ot Defa u lt: Unipolar
Defa u lt: LO% Un ipola r 0 Absolute value of [6111] used
Range: Enter a value for the low level. Bipolar L Signed value of [6111] used

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43406 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43487
Profibus slot/index 17o/55 Profibus slot/index L7O/L36
Long,
Long,
L=L W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format L=L W, 0.1 A, 0.LV,
O.1"Hz, O.1oC, 1 kwh, Fieldbus format O.tHz, O.1oC, 1 kwh,
tH,7%, 1 rpm or 0.001
LH,7%. 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
via process value
Modbus format Elnt Modbus format Elnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctional Description 147
CA3 Setup t61-31 Analogue Comparator 3,
Analogue comparators 3, parameter group' Level Low t61331
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,

Ievel low [61 1 3].

Analogue Comparator 3, Value [6131]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,

value [61 1 1] eI33 cA3 Level Lo

stpE! 2oOrPm
6f31 cA3 varue Defa u lt: 2OO rpm
StpEI Process Val Range: Enter a value for the low level.

Default: I Process Value

Communication i nformatio n
Selections: Same as in menu [6111]

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43473

Commun ication in formation Profibus sloVindex L7O/L22

Long,
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4347L L=7, W, 0.1 A, 0.1V,
17O/ 12O Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1oC, 1 kwh,
Profibus slot/index
LH, Lo/o, 1 rpm or 0.001
Fieldbus format U lnt via process value

Modbus format U lnt Modbus format El nt

Analogue Comparator 3, Analogue Comparator, 3 TYPe [6134]

Level High t61321 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Typ.
Function is identical to analogue comParator 1, 16rr4l
level high 16112).
6134 Type
6TE2 cA3 Level Hr StpEI Hysteres j.s
stpE! 300
Defa u lt: Hysteresis

Default: | 3OOrPm Hysteresis o Hysteresis tyPe comParator

Ra nge: Enter a value for the high level. Window L Window type comParator

Communication information Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43472 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43483
Profibus sloVindex L7O/L2r Profibus sloVindex L7O/1.32
Long Long,
t=L W, 0.1 A, 0.1V, L=7, W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1oC, 1 kwh, Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1oC, 1 kwh,
LH, Lo/q 1 rpm or 0.001 LH, 1o/o, 1 rpm or O.001
via process value via process value

Modbus format El nt Modbus format Elnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 Analogue comparator 3, polar t6i-35] Analogue Comparator 4, Level High
Function is identical to analogue compararor 1,
Polar [61 I 5]. 16L42l
Function is identical to analogue compararor 1 level high
l6t tzl.
6135 cA3 Pollti
StpE Unipolar 6L42 CA4 Level HI
Defa u lt: Un ipola r stpE! 100rpm
Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used Defa u lt: 10Orpm
Bipolar 7 Signed value of [6111] used Range: Enter a value for the high level.

Communication information Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43488 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43475
Profibus slot/index L7O/L37 Profibus slot/index L7O/L24
Long, Long
t=t W, 0.1A, 0.1 V, t=t W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format O.LHz,0.1"C, 1 kwh, Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1"C, 1 kwh,
LH, to/o, 1 rpm or 0.001 LH, to/u 1 rpm or O.OO1
via process value via process value
Modbus format El nt Modbus format Elnt

CA4 Setup l6L4l Analogue Comparator 4,

Analogue compararors 4, paramerer group.
Level Low [6143]
Function is idenrical to analogue compararor 1, level low
Analogue comparator 4, volue l6L4Ll [61 13].
Function is identical to analogue compararor 1,
value [61 1 1].
6143 CA4 Level
StpEI -100
6L4L cA4 VEIue
-100 rpm
StpEI Process Err Defa u lt:

Range: Enter a value for the low level.

Defa u lt: Process Error

Selections: Same as in menu [6111] Commun ication informatio n

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43476

Communication information
Profibus sloVindex L7O/ r25
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43474 Long,
t=L W, 0.1 A, O.1 V,
Profibus slot/index L7O/ r23 Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1"C, 1 kwh,
Fieldbus format U lnt LH, Lo/o, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format Ulnt
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
Functiona I Description L49
Analogue Comparato r 4, TYPe 16144l Digital comparator SetuP t6l-51
Function is identical to analogue comParator 1, level Typ. Digital comparators, Parameter grouP.
16rr4l
Digital Comparator 1, [615U
6L44 CA4 TY'Pe Selection of the input signal for digital comParator 1 (CD1).
stpEl windo The output signal CD I is set high if the selected input
signal is active. See Fig. 1 16.
Defa u lt Window
The output signal can be Programmed to the digital or relay
Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis tyPe comParator
outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections t560].
Window ! Window type comparator

Communication information
Digital signal: Signal: CD1

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43484 Menu t61511

Profibus slot/index 17o/ 133

Long, Fig. I 16 Digital comparator

L=7" W, 0.1 A, 0.1V,
Fieldbus format O.tHz, O.loC, 1 kwh,
LH, L%, 1 rpm or 0.001 6151 CD1
via process value stpE! Run
Modbus format El nt
Defa u lt: Run

Selection: Same selections as for Digout 1 [541].

Analogue Comparator 4, Polar [6145]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,
Com munication i nformation
Polar [6] 15]
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43407
145 CA4 Polar Profibus sloVindex L7O/56
stpE! BiPoJ.ar
Fieldbus format Ulnt

Defa u lt: Bipolar Modbus format U lnt

Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used

Bipolar L Signed value of [6111] used Digital Comparator 2 t6152I

Function is identical to digital comparator I [61 5 1].
Communication information
6L52 CD
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43489
stpE! Disln 1
Profibus slot/index L7O/ 138
Defa u lt: Digln 1
Long,
7=I W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, Selection: Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541].
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1"C, 1 kwh,
LH, to/o, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value Commun ication information

Modbus format El nt
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43408

Profibus sloVindex L7O/57

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format Ulnt

nctional Descri Ption Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Fu
 Digital Comparator 3 t6153I L7..6.2 Logic Output Y [620]
Function is identical to digital compararor I t6l j 1]. By means of an expression editor, the compararor signals can
be logically combined into the Logic Y function.

5153 cD 3 The expression editor has the following features:

stpE! rri . The following signals can be used:
CAL, CAZ, CDl, CDZ or LZ (or LB
Defa u lt: Trip
o The following signals can be inverted:
Selectlon: Same selections as for Digout 1 t5411.
!A1, !A2, !Dl ,1D2, or ILZ (or !LY)
. The following logical operarors are available:
Com munication information
"+" : OR operator
rr6(rr
: AND operator
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43477 rrn rr
: EXOR operator
Profibus slot/index r7o/726
Expressions according ro the following truth table can be
Fieldbus format U lnt made:
Modbus format Ulnt
lnput Result

Digital Cornparator 4 [6154] A B & (AND) + (oR) ^(exoR)

Function is identical to digital compararor 1 t6l 5l l. 0 0 o o 0
0 7 0 7 L

6L54 CD 4 7 0 0 7
StpEI Read
1,

1, 1, T ! 0
Defa ult: Ready

Selection: Same selections as for Digout 1 t5411. The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay
outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source [5601.
Communication information
620 LOGIC Y
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43478 Stp CA1 & !A2&CD1
Profibus slot/index L7O/727
Fieldbus format U lnt Communication information
Modbus format U lnt
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31035
Profibus slot/index L27/ 779
Fieldbus format Long
Modbus format Text

The expression must be programmed by means of the

menus 162ll to 16251.

Emotron AB OI-4428-0 1r3 Fu nctional Description

Example: Y Comp 1, l62Ll
Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function.
Broken belt detection for Logic Y
This example describes the programming for a so-called
"broken belt detection" for fan applications. 62L Y Comp 1

The comparator CAI is set for frequency>l0Hz.

stp$ cA1

The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20o/o. Defa u lt: CA1

The comparator CD1 is set for Run. CA1 0

The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the "broken belt !A1 L

detection". cA2 2

In menus [62 l]-1625] expression entered for Logic Y is

tA2 3
visible.
CD1 4
Set menu162ll to CAI
!D1 5
Set me nu 16221 to 6c
Set me nu 16231 to !A2 cD2 6
Set me nu 16241 to 6c tD2 7
Set merut 15251 to CDI
LZ/U 8
Menu 1620) now holds the expression for Logic Y
tLZ/il:( I
CAl S(!A26(CD I
T1 10
which is to be read as:
!T1 LT
(CAl s{!A2)6.CDl
T2 12

tT2 13
NOTE:Set menu l624lto "." to finish the expression
when onty two comparators ale lequlred for Logic Y. CA3 L4

!A3 15

CA4 16

!A4 L7

CD3 18

!D3 19

CD4 20
!D4 2T

Communication i nformation

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43471

Profibus slot/index L7O/60
Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format Ulnt

Functional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 Y Operator 1, 16221 Y Operator 216241
Selects the firsr operator for the logic y function. Selects the second operator for the logic Y function.

622 Y OperaEor .I 624 Y Operator 2

stPEI & stpE! &

Defa u lt: & Defa lt:

u &
& ! &=AND When ' (dot) is selected, the Logic y
+ 2 +-oR o expression is finished (when only two
expressions are tied together).
n
3 ^=EXOR
& L &=AND

Com mun ication information + 2 +-oR

n
3 ^=EXOR
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 434r2
Profibus slot/index L7O/6L Communication i nformation
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 434I4
Modbus format Ulnt
Profibus slot/index 770/63
Fieldbus format U lnt
Y Comp 2 t6231 Modbus format U lnt
Selects the second compararor for the logic y function.

623 Y Comp--Z Y Comp 3 t6251

stpE! tA2 Selects the third compararor for rhe logic Y function.

Defa lt: IA2

u
625 Y Comp 3
Selection: Same as menu [621] stpE! cD1

Communication information Defa u lt: CD1

Selection: Same as menu [6271

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 4341.3
Profibus slot/index 17o/62 Commun ication information

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus Instance nolDeviceNet no: 434!5
Modbus format U lnt
Profibus slot/index 77O/64
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Functional Description
L1.6.3 Logic OutPutZ t63OI ZComp 2 t6331
Selects the second comParator for the logic Z function.

630 LOGIC Z
stpfi CA1 & !A2&CD1 633 Z Comp 2
stpE! tA2
The expression must be Programmed by means of the Defa u lt: tA2
menus 16311 to 1635). Selection: Same as menu [621-]

ZComp 1, t6311 Com munication informatio n

Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43423

31 z Comp 1 Profibus sloVindex L7O/72

stpE! cA1 Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt

Defa u lt: CA1

Selection: Same as menul62L1

ZOperator 2 t6341
Com munication in fo rmation Selects the second oPerator for the logic Z function.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 4342L

TZ operator 2
Profibus slot/index 17O/7O stpE! &

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Defa ult: &
Modbus format U lnt
Selection: Same as menu 16241

ZOperator 1, t6321 Commun icatio n i nformation

Selects the first operator for the logic Z function.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43424

l7operator 1 Profibus sloVindex L7O/73

stpE! & Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt

Defa u lt: &

Selection: Same as menu1622l

ZComp 3 t6351
Communication information Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43422

535 Z Comp 3
Profibus slot/index L7O/7L stpE! cD1
Fieldbus format U lnt
Defa u lt: CD1
Modbus format Ulnt
Selection: Same as menu [621]

Commun ication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43425

Profibus slot/index L7O/74

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt

nctional Descri Ption Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

Fu
 L7..6.4 Timerl [640] Timer 1, Mode t6421
The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an
interval with separare on and off times (alternate mode). In
delay mode, the outpur signal rlebecomes high if the set 642 Timerl ffiaE
delay time is expired. See Fig. ll7. stpEl off
Defa u lt: off
off 0
Timerl Trig Delay T

Alternate 2

T1Q
Communication i nformation

Fig. I 17 Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43432

Profibus sloVindex 77O/8L
In alternare mode, the outpur signal Tlewill switch auro-
matically from high to low etc. according to the set interval Fieldbus format U lnt
times. See Fig. I 18. Modbus format Ulnt
The outpur signal can be programmed to the digital or relay
ourpurs used in logic functions [520] and t630], or as a
virtual connection source t560]. Timer 1, Delay t643I
This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay.
NorE: The actual timers are common for all parameter This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section
sets. lf the actual set is changed, the timer funcilonality 9.5, page 57 .
[641] to [645] wllt change according set settings but the
timer value will stay unchanged. so inltiallzation of the Timer 1 delay sers the time that will be used by the first

timer might differ for a set change compared to normal timer after it is acrivated. Timer I can be acrivared by a high
triglglering of a timer. signal on a Digln that is set to Timer I or via a virtual
destination [560.l.

643 TimerlDe1iy
Timerl Trig
stpEl 0:00:00
Defa ult: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
T1Q Range: 0:00:OO-9:59:59

Communication informatio n
Fig. It8
43433 hours
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43434 minutes
Timer 1,Trigl641]
43435 seconds
!7O/82, L7O/83,
64L Timerl- fr$ Profibus slot/index
17o/84
stPEI orf Fieldbus format Ulnt
Defa u lt: off Modbus format Ulnt
Selection: Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu t5411

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43431.

Profibus slot/index L7O/80
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Functional Description
Timer 1,T1, 16441 Timer l Value t64el
\Mhen timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled, Timer I Value shows actual value of the timer.
this timer witl automatically keep on switching according to
the independently programmable up and down times' The 649 Timerl Va].ue
Timer I in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital input stpE! 0:00:00
or via a virtual connection. See Fig. 118. Timer 1 Tl sets the
up time in the alternate mode. Defa u lt: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
Range: 0:00:00-9:59:59
644 Timer 1T1
SIPET 0:00:00 Commun ication information

Defa u lt: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)

42921- hours
Range: Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 42922 minutes
42923 seconds

Com munication information 168/80, t68/81,

Profibus sloVindex L68/82
43436 hours lnt
Fieldbus format U
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43437 minutes
43438 seconds Modbus format U lnt

L7O/85, L70/86,
Profibus slot/index L7O/87
LL.6.5 Timer2[65OI
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Refer to the descriptions For Tirnerl.
Modbus format U lnt

Timer 2Trig t651I

Timer 1,T2 t645I
Timer I T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode. 651 Timer2 Trig
stpE! off
645 Timerl T Defa ult: off
stpE! 0:00:00 Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu
Selection:
Defa u lt: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec t5411.

Range:
Communication information

Communication information
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43451,

43439 hours Profibus sloVindex 17o/ 100

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43440 minutes
Fieldbus format U lnt
4344L seconds
Modbus format U lnt
L7O/88, t7O/89,
Profibus slot/index L7O/eO

Fieldbus format Ulnt

Modbus format U lnt

NOTE: Timer 1T1 t6441 and Timer 2T1, t6541 are only
vlsible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 Timer 2 Mode tOS2l Timer 2T2 t6551

6s2 riffi 55 Timer 2 T2

stpE! ofr stpE! 0:00:00
Defautr I Oft Defa u lt: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
Selection: Same as in men u l142j Range:

Communication information Com mun ication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 43452

43459 hours
Profibus slot/index L7O/r}r Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43460 minutes
4346L seconds
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Profibus slot/index L7O/LO8, t70/109,
Modbus format U lnt 77O/LrO
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Timer 2 Delay t6531 Modbus format Ulnt

653 Timer2Ddfay
I

Timer 2 Value t65gl

stpE! 0:00:00 Timer 2 value shows actual value of the timer.

Defa u !t: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec

Range:
659 Timer2 VEIue
0:00:00-9:59:59
stpE! 0:00:00
Commun ication information Defa u lt: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
Range: 0:00:00-9:59:59
43453 hours
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43454 minutes
43455 seconds
Communication information

Profibus slot/index L7O/ LO2, t7O/ 103,

42924 hours
L7O/LO4 Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 42925 minutes
Fieldbus format Ulnt 42926 seconds
Modbus format Ulnt Profibus slot/index !68/83, 168/84,
!68/84
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Timer 2T1, [654]
Modbus format U lnt

554 Timffi
stpE! 0:00:00
Defa u lt: O:OO:00, hr:min:sec

Range: 0:00:00-9:59:59

Communication information

43456 hours
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 43457 minutes
43458 seconds

Profibus slot/index L7O/1.:O5, L70/106,

L7O/ LO7
Fieldbus format Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
L7..7 View Operati on/Status Torque t7131
Displays the actual shaft torque.
[7oo]
Menu with parameters for viewing aI[ actual operational 7L3 Torque
data, such as sPeed, torque, Power, etc'
Stp 0t 0.0
L7..7.!. Operation t71OI Unit: %, Nm
o/o,
Resolution: 7- 0.1 N m

Process Value tTLLl

Commun ication informatio n
The process value is showing the Process actual value,
depending on selection done in chapter Process Source
31003 Nm
l3zr1. Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 3LOO4 o/o

L21,/ L47
IT-E ocess Val Profibus sloVindex L21,/L48
stp Long, 1-0.1 Nm
Fieldbus format Long, L=7- o/o
Un* lm::Si,Xi,'E ;:'""sourcer321l Modbus format El nt
Speed: lrPm,4digits
Resolution
Other units: 3 digits
Shaft power l7L4)
Commun ication in formation Displays the actual shaft Power.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31001 7L4 Shaft Power

Profibus slot/index L21,/ r45 Stp
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001
Unit: W
Modbus format El nt
Resolution: 1W

Speed 17L21 Communicatiort i nformatio n

Displays the actual shaft sPeed.
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31005

7L2 Speed Profibus slot/index L21,/ 149

stp Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W

Modbus format El nt
Unit I rpm
Resolution: 1 rpm, 4 digits
Electrical Power t7151
Communication information Displays the actual electrical outPut power.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31002 715 EI Power

Profibus slot/index r2L/L46 stp k
Fieldbus format lnt, 1=1 rpm
Unit: KW
Modbus format lnt, 1=1 rPm
Resolution: 1W

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 Communication information
Frequency [718]
Displays the actual output frequency.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31006
Profibus slot/index L2L/ 150
718 Frequency
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W
Stp Hz
Modbus format Elnt
Unit: Hz

Resolution: O.7 Hz
Current ITLG)
Displays the actual outpur currenr.
Communication information

1LG Current Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31009

stp Profibus slot/index 727/L53
Unit: A Fieldbus format Long, 1=0. t Hz

Resolution: 0.1 A Modbus format Elnt

Com munication informarion

DC Link Voltage t7Lgl
Displays the actual DC link voltage.
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31007

Profibus slot/index L2r/!5L

7L9 DC VoJ-tige
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1A
stp
Modbus format El nt
Unit: V

Resolution: 0.1 v
Output Voltage l7L7l
Displays the actual output voltage.
Communication informatio n

7L7 ou@ Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31010

stp Profibus sloVindex L21,/754
Unit: V Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V

Resolution: 0.1 v Modbus format Elnt

Communication info rmation

Heatsi n k Temperatu re tT1,Aj
Displays the actual heatsink temperarure, measured. The
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31008
signal is generated by , sensor in the IGBT module.
Profibus slot/index 72UL52
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V 71A Heatsink mF
Modbus format Stp oc
Elnt

Unit: "C

Resolution: 0.1" c

Commun ication information

Modbus lnsta nce no/ DeviceNet no: 31011

Profibus slot/index 72r/r55

Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1oC
Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
Functional Description
PT 100- 1,-2-3 Te m P t71 Bl LL.7.2 Status l720l
Displays the actual PT 1 00 temPerature.
I VSD Status l72Ll
ffioo L,2,3
oC
Indicates the overall status of the AC drive.
Stp
Unit: | "C
72L VSD Status
1"C
stp L/222/333/ 44
Resolution:

Co mmunication info rmation Fig. 1 19 AC driue stdtus

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31oL2,31013, 3LOL4 Display Value

Status
position
L21,/ 156
Profibus slot/index r27/ L57 L Parameter Set A,B,C,D
!2r/ 158
-Key (keyboard)
oC
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 Source of reference -Rem (remote)
222 -Com (Serial comm.)
Elnt value
Modbus format
-Opt (option)

-Key (keyboard)
Source of Runl -Rem (remote)
333 Stop/Reset com- -Com (Serial comm.)
mand
-Opt (option)

-TL (Torque Limit)

-SL (Speed Limit)
44 Limit functions -CL (Current Limit)
-VL (Voltage Limit)
- - - -No limit active

Exa m ple: " A/KeY /Rem/T['

This means:
A: Parameter Set A is active.

Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP).

Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals l-22.

TL: Torque Limit active.

Warning 17221
Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning
occurs if the AC drive is close to a trip condition but still in
operation. During a warning condition the red trip LED
will start to blink as long as the warning is active.

122 l{arnings
Stp warn. msg

The active warning message is displayed in menu 1722).If

no warning is active the message "No Error" is displayed.
The following warnings are Possible:

Emotron AB O7'4428-O1r3
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 Fieldbus Digital lnput Status t7231
integer Warning message Indicates the srarus of the digital inpurs. See Fig . 120.
value
1 Digln I
0 No Error 2 Digln 2
1, Motor l2t 3 Digln 3
4 Digln 4
2 PTC
5 Digln 5
3 Motor lost 6 Digln 6
4 Locked rotor 7 Digln 7
8 Digln 8
5 Ext trip
The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate
6 Mon MaxAlarm the status of the associated input:
7 Mon MinAlarm
1 High
8 Comm error
0 Low
9 PTlOO
The example in Fig. 120 indicates that Digln 1,
L7 Pump Digln 3 and Digln 6 are active at this momenr.
L2 Ext Mot Temp

13 LC Level 723 Digln Status

!4 Bra ke
Stp 1010 0100
15 Optlon
Fig. 120 Digital input stntus example
16 Over temp

L7 Over curr F Com munication information

18 Over volt D
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 37017
19 Over volt G
Profibus slot/index L21,/L67
20 Over volt M
Fieldbus format Ulnt, bit O=Digln1, bit
2T Over speed
Modbus format 8=Digln8
22 Under voltage
23 Power fault
24 Desat Digital Output Status 17241
25 DClink error Indicates the srarus of the digital ourpurs and relays. See Fig.
rzt.
26 lnt error
RE indicate the status of the relays on position:
27 Ovolt m cut
1 Relayl
28 Over voltage
2 Relay2
29 Not used 3 Relay3
30 Not used DO indicate the srarus of the digital ourputs on position:
31 Not used I DigOutl
2 DigOut2
Communication information
The status of the associated outpur is shown.

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31016 1 High

0 Low
Profibus slot/index I21,/1.:60
Fieldbus format Long
Modbus format Ulnt

See also the Chaprer 12. p^ge 169.

Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3 Fu nctional Description 161

The example in Fig. 121 indicates that DigOutl 1S actlYe Analogue lnput Status 1726)
and Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay I is active, relay 2 and Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4.
3 are not active.

726 AnIn 3 4
724 DigOutstatus Stp -100t 65t
Stp RE 100 Do 10
Fig. 123 Analogue input stdtas
Fig l2 I Digital outPut status example
Communication information
Communication information
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 3to2L,3rO22
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31018
Profibus slot/index 727/165, L21,/166
Profibus sloVindex 721,/L62
Fieldbus format Long, t=t%
Fieldbus format Ulnt, bit O=DigOutl,
bit 1=Dig0ut2 Modbus format El nt
bit 8=Relayl
Modbus format bit 9=Relay2
bit 10=Relay3 Analogue Output Status 17271
Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 120. E.g. if
4-20 mA output is used, the valu e 20o/o equals rc 4 mA.
Analogue lnput Status 17251
Indicates the status of the analogue inputs I and 2.
727 AnOut 1 2
Stp -100t 65t
725 AnIn 1
Stp -100t 65t Fig. 124 Analogue output stdtus

Fig. 122 Analogue input stdtus Com municatio n i nformation

Com munication information Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31023, 3rO24

Profibus slot/index L21,/r67, L2t/ 168

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020
Fieldbus format Long, L=Lo/o
Profibus sloVindex 121,/763, t21,/1:64
Modbus format El nt
Fieldbus format Long, L=Lo/o

Modbus format El nt
The first row indicates the Analogue outputs.
I Anout 1
The ftrst row indicates the analogue inputs.
2 AnOut 2
1 AnIn 1
Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the
2 Anln 2 status of the belonging outpur is shown in o/o:
Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the
o/o: - 1O0o/oAnOut I has a negative 1 00o/o outPut value
status of the belonging input is shown in
65o/oAnOut2 has a 55o/o outPut value
- 100o/o AnIn t has a negative 1 00o/o input value
The example in Fig. l2O indicates that both the Analogue
65o/a Anln2 has a 650/o inPut value outputs are active.
So the example in Fig. 122 indicates that both the Analogue
inputs are active. NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values
based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so
NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values related to either O-10 V or O-2O mA.
based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so
related to either O-10 V or O-20 mA.

L62 Fu nctional DescriPtion Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 l/O board Status tT2Bl lT2Aj Lf,.7.3 Stored values tZgOI
lndicates the status for the additional I/O on oprion boards The shown values are the actual values built up over time.
1 (Bt),2 (BZ) and 3 (B3).
values are stored at power down and updated again ar power
uP.
728 ro 81
Stp R8000 DI10 Run Time [73L]
Displays the total time that the AC drive has been in the
Com munication information Run Mode.

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 31025 - 3!027 731 Run Time

Profibus slot/index 72L/L7O - r72 Stp h:mm: ss
Fieldbus format Ulnt, bit O=Diglnl Un it: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)
bit 1=Digln2
bit 2=Digln3 Range: O0: 00: 0O- 262143: 59: 59
Modbus format bit 8=Relayl
bit 9=Relay2 Communication informatio n
bit 1o=Relay3

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31028:31029:31030

(hr:min:sec)

Profibus slot/index L2I/ L72:L2L/ L73:

L21,/I74
Fieldbus format Ulnt, t=th/m/s
Modbus format Ulnt, t=Lh/m/s

Reset Run Time l73LL)

Reset the run time counter. The stored information will be
erased and a new registration period will srarr.

7311 ReseL mnm

stp No
Defa u lt: No

No o
Yes I
Communication i nformation

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 7

Profibus slot/index o/6
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format Ulnt

NorE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to

ttNott.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
Mains time 1732) Reset Energy [7331]
Resets the enerry counter. The stored information will be
Displays the total time that the Ac drive has been connected will start.
erased and a new registration period
to the mains supply. This timer cannot be reset.

TEz Mains Time

7331 Rst EnerEfY
Stp h:mm: ss
Stp No

Defa u lt: No
Unit: I n, mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)
Selection: No, Yes
Range: 00: 00: 00- 262L43: 59: 59

Com munication informatio n

Communication information
Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 6
31031:3LO32:31033
Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: (hr:min:sec) o/5
Profibus sloVindex
L2L/ t75:L2I/ t76: Fieldbus format U lnt
Profibus slot/index !2!/I77
Modbus format Ulnt
Fieldbus format Ulnt, L=Lh/m/s

Modbus format Ulnt, L=Lh/m/s NOTE: After reset the setting automaticatly goes back to
,,Nort.

Energy t7331
Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy
reset 173311 took Place'

733 Energy
Stp kllh
Unit: I Wn (shows Wh, kwh, MWh or GWh)

Ra nge: 0.0-999999GWh

Communication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 3LO34

Profibus slot/index L21,/ L7 8

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 W

Modbus format El nt

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
 11.8 View Trip Log ISOOI Trip message [811]-t81Nl
Main menu with paramerers for viewing all the logged trip The information from the status menus are copied to the
data. In total the AC drive saves the last 1 0 trips i" it . trip trip message log when a trip occurs.
memory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFo principie
(First In, First out). Every trip in the memory is logg.d
t, Trip menu Copied from Description
the time of the Run Time tTlt] counter. At every trip, th.
actual values of several parameter are srored and available for 811 7lL Process Value
troubleshooting.
8L2 7!2 Speed
813 772 Torque
11.8.1 Trip Message log tg1.0l
8r4 7!4 Shaft Power
Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred.
\[hen a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the trip 815 7L5 Electrical Power
message log. There are nine trip message logs
\ilZhen the tenth
tgl0l-tg90l. 816 776 Cu rrent
trip occurs the oldest trip *itt disappear.
8L7 7L7 Output voltage
818
8x0 Trip message 71.8 Frequency

Stp h:mm: ss 819 719 DC Link voltage

814 7lA Heatsink Temperature

Unit I n: m (hours: minutes)
818 7LB PT100_7,2,3
Range: 0h: 0m-65355h: 59m
81C 721, AC drive Status
723
810 E@ 81D Digital input status

Stp 132:L2:L4 81E 724 Digital output status

81F 725 Analogue input status 1-2

For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message table 81c 726 Analogue input status 3-4
for warnings, l7ZZ1. 81H 727 Analogue output status 1-2
81r 728 l/O status option boa rd L
NOTE: Bits o-5 used for trip message value. Bits 6-1s
for internal use. 81,l 729 l/O status option boa rd 2
81K 72A l/O status option board 3
Communication information
811 731t Run Time

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31101 81M 732 Mains Time

Profibus slot/index 81N 733 Energy

72L/245
Fieldbus format 810 310 Process reference
Ulnt
Modbus format Ulnt
Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 37rO2 - 31135

Profibus sloVindex L2r/246 - 254,

L22/O - 24
Depends on parameter,
Fieldbus format see respective parame-
ter.

Depends on parameter,
Modbus format see respective parame-
ter.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Functional Description
Example: L1.8.3 Reset TriP Log [8AO]
Fig. 121 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over Resets the content of the 10 trip memories'
temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 1 3 minutes
in Run time. EAO Reset TriP
Stp No
830 Over temP
Stp 1396h:13 Defa u lt: No

No 0

Fig. 125 Tiip 3 Yes L

L7,.8.2 TriP Messages [820J'[890] Commun ication information

Same information as for menu [810]'

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 8
Communication info rmation
Profibus slot/index o/7
Trip log list Fieldbus format U lnt
31151-3118s 2
Modbus format U lnt
3L20r-3L235 3
3L25r-3L285 4
Modbus lnstance nol 31301-31335 5
DeviceNet no: NOTE: After the reset the setting goes automatically
31351-31385 6
back to "NO". The message "OK" is displayed tot 2 sec.
3L40r-31435 7
31451,-31485 8
31501-31535 9

Trip log list

L22/40-122/74 2
L22/9O-L22/L24 3
L22/ I4O-L22/ 1.74 4
Profibus sloVindex 122/ 190- L22/224 5
r22/24O-L23/L8 6
L23/35 - L23/68 7
L23/85-r23/LL8 8
123/ 135 -L23/ 168 I
Depends on Parameter, see respec-
Fieldbus format
tive parameter.
Depends on Parameter, see respec-
Modbus format
tive parameter.

A11 nine alarm lists contain the same ryPe of data' For
example DeviceNet parameter 31 l0l in alarm list 1
.o.rrrirs the same data information as 31 1 51 in alarm list 2'
It is possible ro read all parameters in alarm lists 2-9 l>y
,..rl.,rlating the DeviceNet instance number into a Profibus
slot/index number. This is done in the following way:
slot rlo : abs((dev instance no-l)1255)
index rro = (dev instance no-1) modulo 255
dev instance no = slot nox255+index no+1
'We
Example: want to read out the process value out from
alarm list 9. In alarm list I process value has the DeviceNet
instance numb er 31102. In alarm list 9 it has DeviceNet
instance no 31502 (see table 2 above). The corresponding
slot/index no is then:
slot rro = abs((3$A2-l)1255)-123
index no (modulo)= the remainder of the division above =

l36,calculated as: (31502- 1)- 123x255=136

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctional DescriPtion
 11.9 System Data tgOOI Table 2B Information for Modbus and profibus ruumber,
Main menu for viewing all the AC drive sysrem data. sofiutare uersion

Bit Description
LL.9.1 VSD Data tg2OI 7-O mtnor

13-8 major
VSD Type 19271
release
Shows the AC drive rype according ro the type number. OO: V, release version
The options are indicated on the L5-1,4 01: P, pre-release version
rype plate of the AC drive. 1O: B, Beta version
7t: a, Alpha version
NOTE: lf the control board is not configured, then type
type shown is FDU4O-XXX.
Table 29 Information for Modbus and profibus numben
option uersion

2Lm Bit Description

Stp fDU48-0 4G 7-O mtnor

Example of rype 15-8 major

Communication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no: 31037 Y 4.30 - Version of the Sofrware

Profibus slot/index L2r/L8L
NOTE: lt is important that the software version displayed
Fieldbus format Long in menu 19221is the same software version number as
Modbus format Text the software version number written on the tifle page of
this instruction manual. lf not, the functionality as
described in this manual may differ from the
Examples: funstionality of the AC drive.
FDU48 -046AC drive-series suited for 3g0-4g0 volt mains
supply, and a rated ourpur currenr of 46 A.

Software 19221
Shows the software version number of the AC drive.

Fig. 126 gives an example of the version number.

922 Software
Stp V 4.30
Fig. 126 Example of sofiware uersion

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance nolDeviceNet no 31038 software version

31039 option version
Profibus slot/index L21,/Lg2-Lg3
Fieldbus format U lnt
Modbus format U lnt

Emotron AB OL-4428-O1r3
Functional Description L67
Unit name t9231
Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or
cusromer identity. The function enables the user to define a
name with max 12 characters. Use the Prev and Next key to
move the cursor ro the required position. Then use the +
and - keys to scroll in the character list. confirm the charac-
ter by moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the
Next k"y. See section User-defined [Jnit 1323].

Example
Create user name I.JSER 15.

I . .ilf,hen in the menu 1923) press Next to move the cursor

to the right most Position.
2. Press the + k.y until the character U is displayed'

3. Press Next.

4. Then press the + k.y until S is displayed and confirm

with Next.
5. Repeat until you have entered USER1 5'

3 Unit Name
Stp
Default I Itlo characters shown

Com munication information

Modbus lnstance no/DeviceNet no: 42301,-4231.2

Profibus slot/index L65/225-236

Fieldbus format U lnt

Modbus format U lnt

.When sending a unit name you send one character at a time

starting at the right most position.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Fu nctiona I Descri Ption
 L2. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance

L2.7. TriFS, warnings and limits "Limits"

In order ro protecr the AC drive the principal operating o The inverrer is limiting rorque and/or frequency ro avoid
variables are continuously monirored by the system. If Lne a trip.
of these variables exceeds the safery limit an error/warning ' The Limit relay or ourput is acive (if selected).
message is displayed. In order ro avoid any possibly . The Ti.ip LED is flashi.g.
dangerous situations, the inverter sers itself into a srop Mode
called Tlip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display. ' one of the Limit status indications is displayed (area D
of the display).
Thips will always stop the AC drive. Ti'ips can be divided into
normal and sofr trips, depending on the setup Tlip Type, see Table 30 List of trips and utarnings
menu 1250) Autoreset. Normal trips are default. For normal
trips the AC drive srops immediately, i.e. the moror coasrs Ttip/Warning Trip Warning
naturally to a standstill. For soft trips the AC drive srops by Selections (NormaT lndicators
messages
ramping down the speed, i.e. the motor decelerates ro a Soft) (Area D)
standstill. Motor lzt Trip/Off / Limit Normal/Soft l2t
"Normal Trip" PTC Trip/Off Norma/Soft
The AC drive srops immediately, the moror coasrs ro Motor PTC On Normal
'
naturally to a standstill. PTlOO Trip/Otf NormaTSoft
' The Tlip relay or ourput is active (if selected). Motor lost Trip/Otf Normal
. The TLip LED is on. Locked rotor Trip/Off Normal
o The accompanying trip message is displayed. Ext trip Via Digln Normal/Soft
' The "TRP" starus indication is displayed (area D of the Ext Mot Temp Via Digln Normal/Soft
display). Mon MaxAlarm Trip/Off /Warn Normal/Soft
"Soft Trip" Mon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft
o the AC drive srops by decelerating ro a standstill. Comm error Trip/Ott/Warn Norma/Soft
During the deceleration. Pump Via Option Normal
The accompanying trip message is displayed, including Over temp
' On Normal OT
an additional soft trip indicator "s" before the trip time. Over curr F On Normal
o The Thip LED is flashirg. Over volt D On Normal
o The'warning relay or ourput is aqive (if selected). Over volt G On Normal
After standstill is reached. Over volt On Normal
. The Thip LED is on. Under voltage On Normal LV

' The Ti'ip relay or ourput is active (if selected). Trip/Otf /Warn
LC Level Normal/Soft LCL
o The "TRP" srarus indication is displayed (area D of the Via Digln
display). Desat ### * On Normal
Apart from the TRIP indicarors there are rwo more DClink error On Normal
indicators ro show that the inverrer is in an "abnormal" Power Fault
situation. PF #### x
On Normal

"Warning" Ovolt m cut On Normal

The inverrer is close ro a trip limit. Over voltage Warning VL

The \Tarning relay or ourput is active (if selected). Safe stop Warning SST

The T}ip LED is flashing. Brake Trip/Otf /Warn Normal

The accompanying warning message is displayed in OPTION On Normal

window l7ZZ1\Warning.
*) Refer to table Thble 3l regarding which Desat or
one of the warning indications is displ ayed (area F of
the displry). Power Fault is triggered.

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance
L2.2 Trip conditiolls, causes and
remedial action
The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid
to find the cause of a sysrem failure and to how to solve any
problems that arise. An Ac drive is mostly just a small part
of a complete Ac drive sysrem. sometimes it is
difficul, io determine the cause of the failure, although the
AC drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to
find th. tight cause of the failure. Good knowledg. of the
complete drive system is therefore
necessary. Contact your supplier if you have any questions'
The AC drive is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid
trips by limiting torque, overvolt etc.
Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after
commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect
settings or even bad connections.
Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of
failure-free operation can be caused by changes in the system
or in its environment (e.g. wear).
Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are
generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be sure
ihm the installation fulfils the demands for installation
stipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter 8' page 51'
Sometimes the so-called "Tlial and error" method is a
quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This can
b. dor,e at any level, from changing settings and functions to
disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives.
The Tlip Log can be useful for determining whether certain
trips occur at certain moments. The Tlip Log also records
the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter.
WARNING!
lf it is necessary to open the AC drive or any
part of the system (motor cable housing'
conduits, electlical panels, cabinets, etc') to
inspect or take measure-ments as suggested in this
lnstructlon manual, it is absolutely necessary to read
and follow the safety instructions in the manual.
L70 Troubleshootin& Diagnoses and Maintenance
L2.2.1 Tech nically qual ified personnel
Installation, commissioning, demounting, making measure-
menrs, erc., of or at the AC drive may only be carried out by
personnel technically qualified for the task.
Lz.2.20pening the AC drive
WARNING!
Always switch the mains voltage off if lt is
necessary to open the AC drive and walt at
least 7 mlnutes to allow the capacitors to
discharge.
WARNING!
ln case of malfunctioning always check the
DC-link voltage, or wait one hour after the
mains voltage has been switched off, before
dismantling the AC drlve for repair.
The connections for the control signals and the switches are
isolated from the mains voltage. Always take adequate
precautions before opening the AC drive.
L2.2.3 Precautions to take with a
connected motor
If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the
driven machine, the mains voltage must always first be
'Wait at least 7 minutes
disconnected from the AC drive.
before continuirg.
L2.2.4Autoreset TriP
If the maximum number of Thips during Autoreset has been
reached, the trip message hour counter is marked with an
..Art.
830 O\TERVOLT G
Trp A 345:45:L2
Fig. 127 Autoreset triP
Fig. 127 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]:
Overvoltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attemPts
took place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and l2 seconds of
run time.
Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
 Table 3l Ti'ip condition, their possible causes and remedial action

Trlp condition Possible Cause Remedy Size* *

Check on mechanical overload on the
Motor lt l2t value is exceeded.
- Overload on the motor according to the
motor or the machinery (bearings,
"14, gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
progra m med l2t setti ngs. Change the Motor l2t Current setting in
menu group [230]

Check on mechanical overload on the

Motor thermistor (pTC) exceeds maximum motor or the machinery (bearings,
level. gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
PTC
Check the motor cooling system.
NOTE: Only valid if option board pTC/ Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
PT1O0 is used. load.
Set PTC, men u 23al to OFF

Check on mechanical overload on the

Motor thermistor (pTC) exceeds maximum motor or the machinery (bearings,
level. gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
Motor PTC
Check the motor cooling system. B,C,D
NOTE: Only valid at Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
l2g7l is enabted.
load.
Set PTC, menu t237lto OFF

Check on mechanical overload on the

Motor PT10O elements exceeds maximum motor or the machinery (bearings,
level. gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
PTlOO Check the motor cooling system.
NOTE: Only vatld if option board pTC/ Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
PT10O is used. load.
Set PT100 to OFF, menu 12341

Check the motor voltage on all phases.

Check for loose or poor motor cabte
Phase loss or too great imbalance on the co n nections
Motor lost
motor phases lf all connections are OK, contact your
supplier
Set motor lost alarm to OFF.

Check for mechanical problems at the

Torque limit at motor standstill: motor or the machinery connected to the
Locked rotor
- Mechanical blocking of the rotor. motor
Set locked rotor alarm to OFF.

Check the equipment that initiates the

External input (Digln 1-8) active: external input
Ext trip
- active low function on the input. Check the programming of the digital
inputs Digln 1-8

Check the equipment that initiates the

External input (Digln 1-g) active: external input
Fxt Mot Temp
- active low function on the input. Check the programming of the digital
inputs Digln 1-8

Max alarm level (overload) has been - Check the load condition of the machine
Mon MaxAlarm - Check the monitor setting in section L!.6, page
reached.
!41,.

Min alarm level (underload) has been - Check the load condition of the machine
Mon MinAlarm - Check the monitor setting in section !!.6, page
reached.
!47.

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance
Tdble 31 Trip condition, their possible cduses and remedial action

Remedy Slze* *
Trip condition Possible Cause

Check cables and connection of the

serial communication.
Check all settin$s with regard to the
Comm error Error on serial communication (option) serial communication
Restart the equipment including the
AC drive

No master pump can be selected due to Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback
error in feedback si$nalling. signals
Pump check settings with regard to the pump feedback
NOTE: Only used ln PumP Control. digital inputs

Check the cooling of the AC drive cabinet.

Heatsink temPerature too high: check the functionality of the built-in fans. The
- Too high ambient temperature of the fans must switch on automatically if the heatsink
AC drive temperature gets too high. At power up the fans
Over temp - Insufficient cooling are briefly switched on.
- Too high current Check AC drive and motor rating
- Blocked or stuffed fans Clean fans

Motor current exceeds the peak AC drive
cu rrent:
- Too short acceleration time.
- Too high motor load
Over curr F - Excessive load change
- Soft short-circuit between phases or
phase to earth
- Poor or loose motor cable connections
- Too high lxR ComPensation level
Check the acceleration time settings and
make them longer if necessary.
Check the motor load.
Check on bad motor cable connections
Check on bad earth cable connection
Check on water or moisture in the motor housing
and cable connections.
Lower the level of lxR Compensation [352]

Over volt Too high DC Link voltage: check the deceleration time settings and make
D(eceleration) - Too short deceleration time with them longer if necessary.
respect to moto r/machine inertia. Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and
Over volt - Too small brake resistor malfunctioning the functionality of the Brake chopper (if used)
G(eneration) Brake chopper

Over volt (Mains) Check the main suPPlY voltage

Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high Try to take away the interference cause or use
O(ver) volt mains voltage other main suPPlY lines.
M(ains) cut
Make Sure all three phases are properly connected
Too low DC Link voltage: and that the terminal screws are ti$htened.
-
Too low or no suPPlY voltage Check that the mains supply voltage is within the
Under volta$e - Mains voltage dip due to starting other limits of the AC drive.
major power consuming machines on Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused
the same line. by other machinery
Use the function low voltage override l42Ll

Low tiquid cooling leve! in external reservoir. Check liquid cooling

External input (Digln L-8) active: Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the
LC Level - active low function on the inPut- externa I input
NOTE: Only valid for AC drive types with Liq- check the programming of the digital inputs Digln
uid Cooling oPtion. 1-8

OPTION lf an Option sPecific triP occurs Check the description of the specific option

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
L72 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance
 Tdble 31 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial acilon

Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size* *

Desat
B-D
Desat U+ *
Desat U- * Failure in output stage, Check on bad motor cable connections
-desaturation of IGBTs Check on bad earth cable connections
Desat V+ * - Hard short circuit between phases or Check on water and moisture in the
motor housing and cable connections
Desat V- * phase to earth
- Earth fault check that the rating plate data of the motor is E&Up
Desat W+ 't - For size B - D also the Brake IGBT correctly entered.
* check the brake resistor, brake IGBT and wiring.
Desat W-

Desat BCC *

Make sure all three phases are properly

connected and that the terminal screws are tight-
DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum ened.
DC link error check that the mains supply voltage is within the
level
limits of the AC drive.
Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused
by other machinery.

Power Fault
One ofthe 10 PF (power Fault) trips below Check the PF errors and try to determine the
has occured, but could not be determined. cause. The trip history can be helpful.

PF Fan Err * Error in fan module check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and
blocking material in fan module. E&Up
PF HCB Err* Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) Check mains supply voltage D&Up
Error in current balancing: Check motor.
PF Curr Err * - benveen differenr modules. Check fuses and line connections
- ber'ween rwo phases within one module. Check the individual moror currenr leads with an G& Up
clamp on amp merer.
Error in voltage balancing, overvoltage
PF Overyolt * detected in one of the power modules Check motor.
Check fuses and line connections. G& Up
(PEBB)

PF Comm Err * lnternal communication error Contact service

PF lnt Temp * lnternal temperature too high Check internal fans
PF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service

PF DC Err * DC-link error and mains supply fault Check mains supply voltage
Check fuses and line connections. D&Up

PF Sup Err * Mains supply fault Check mains supply voltage

Check fuses and line connections.

Check Brake acknowledge

Brake tripped on brake fault (not released)
Brake
or Brake not engaged during stop.
signal wiring to selected digital input.
Check programming of digital input Digln 1-g,
t5201.
check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake
circu it.
check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is
wired from brake limit switch.
Check brake contactor.
Check settings [33CJ, [33D], [33E], [33F].

*
= 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300-1500 A)
** If no size is mentioned in this column, the information
= is valid for all sizes.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 1.73
L2.3 Maintenance
The AC drive is designed not to require any servicing or
maintenance. There are however some things which must be
checked regularly.

All AC drives have built-in fan which is speed controlled

using heatsink temperature feedback. This means that the
frrr-rr. only running if the AC drive is ru.ning and loaded.
The design of the heatsinks is such that the fan does not
blow the cooling air through the interior of the AC drive,
but only across the outer surface of the heatsink. However,
running fans will always arrracr dust. Depending on the
environment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust'
Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when
necessary.

If AC drives are built into cabinets, also check and clean the
dust filters of the cabinets regularly.
Check external wiring, connections and control signals.
Tighten terminal screws if necessary. For more information
on maintenance, please contact your EMOTRON service
Partner.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
L74 Troubteshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance
13. Options
The standard options available are described here briefly. L3.2 Handheld
Some of the options have their own instruction or
installation manual. For more information please contact Gontrol Panel 2.O
your supplier. See also Emotron VF)UFDU 2.0 Product
catalogue for more info.
Paft number Description

Handheld Control Panel 2.0 complete for

01-5039-00
13.L Options for the control FDU/VFK2.O or CDU /CDx 2.O

panel

Part number Description

01-3957-00 Panel kit complete including panel

01-3957-AL Panel kit complete including blank panel

Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable are

available as options for the control panel. These options may
be useful, for example for mounting a control panel in a
cabinet door.

Fnaf The Handheld Control Panel - HCP 2.0 is a complete

control panel, easy to connect to the AC drive, for
use when e.g. commissioning, servicing and so
:.JP.tary
@@@ The HCP has full functionaliry including memory. It is

ru possible to set parameters, view signals, actual values, fault

logger information and so on. It is also possible to use the

@@@ memory to copy all data (such as parameter set data and
motor data) from one AC drive to the HCP and then load

trtr@ this data to other AC drives

@ortootor@)ot
Fig 128 Control panel in mounting
13.3 EmoSoftcom
EmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a personal
computer. It can also be used to load parameter settings
from the AC drive to the PC for backup and printing.
cassette
Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact
Emotron sales for further information.

Emotron AB Ot-4428-O1r3 Options L75,

L3.4 Brake chopper Table 33 Brake resistor FDU4S type

All AC drivesizes can be fitted with an optional built-in Rmin [ohm] if supply Rmin [ohm] lf supply
Type
brake chopper. The brake resistor must be mounted outside 380-415 VAc 440-480 VAc
the AC drive. The choice of the resistor depends on the
application switch-on duration and dury-cycle. This option FDU48-OO3 43 50
can not be after mounted. -o04 43 50
-006 43 50
WARNING!
The table gives the mlnlmum values of the -008 43 50
brake resistors. Do not use resistors lower -010 43 50
than this value. The AC drive can trip or even
be damaged due to high braking currents. -013 43 50
-018 43 50
The following formula can be used to define the power of -o26 26 30
the connected brake resistor:
-031 26 30
(Brake level Vod2 -037 T7 20
Pr.rirto, xED
R-i, -046 T7 20

'Where: -061 10 T2

-o74 10 L2
P...ir,o, required power of brake
resistor -090 3.8 4.4
Brake level VncDC brake voltage level (see Thble 32) -109 3.8 4.4
Rmin minimum allowable brake resistor -746 3.8 4.4
(see Thble 33,Table 34 and Thble 35 -L75 3.8 4.4
ED effective braking period. Defined as:
-2LO 2.7 3.1
ED = tbt
-250 2.7 3.1
120 [s]
-300 2x3.8 2x4.4
tb, Active braking time at nominal braking -375 2x3.8 2x4.4
power during a 2 minute operation
cycle.
-430 2x2.7 2 x3.t
Maximum value of ED - 1, meaning continuous braking.
-500 2x2.7 2x3.!
-600 3x2.7 3x3.1
Table 32
-650 3x2.7 3x3.1
Supply voltage (Vnc) -750 3x2.7 3x3.1
Brake level (Voc)
(set in menu [218J
-860 4x2.7 4x3.7
220-240 380
-1000 4x2.7 4x3.L
380-415 660
-!200 6x2.7 6x3.1
440-480 780
-1500 6x2.7 6x3.1
500- 525 860
550-600 1000
660-690 1150

L76 Options Emotron AB O!-4428-O 1r3

Table 34 Brake resistors FDU52 V types 13.5 l/O Board
Rmin [ohm] if supply Rmin [ohm] if supply
Type
440-480 VAc 5OO-525 VAc Part number Descrlption

FDU52-003 50 55 01-3876-01 I/O option boa rd 2.O

-o04 50 55
Each I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputs
-oo6 50 55
and three extra digital inputs (24Y). The I/O Board works
-008 50 55 in combination with the Pump/Fan Control, but can also be
-010 50 55 used as a separate option. Maximum 3IlO boards possible.
This option is described in a separate manual.
-013 50 55
-018 50
-o26 30
55
32
13.6 Encoder
-o31 30 32
Part number Descriptlon
-o37 2A 22
01-3876-03 Encoder 2.O option board
-046 20 22
-061 T2 L4 The Encode r 2.0 option board, used for connection of
-o74 T2 L4 feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incremental
encoder is described in a separate manual.

Table i5 Brake resistors FDU69 V types L3.7 PTC/PTI.OO

Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] Description
Part number
Type if supply if supply if supply
5OO-525 VAc 550-600 VAc 660-690 VAc 01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option board

FDU69-090 4.9 5.7 6.5

The PTC/PTI00 2.0 option board for connecting motor
-109 4.9 5.7 6.5
thermistors and max 3 PT100 elements to the AC drive is
-!46 4.9 5.7 6.5 described in a separate manual.
-L75 4.9 5.7 6.5
-2LO 2x4.9 2x5.7 2x6.5
-250 2x4.9 2x5.7 2x6.5
-300 2x4.9 2x5.7 2x6.5
-375 2x4.9 2x5.7 2x6.5
-430 3x4.9 3x5.7 3x6.5
-500 3x4.9 3x5.7 3x6.5
-600 4x4.9 4 x5.7 4x6.5
-650 4x4.9 4x5.7 4x6.5
-750 6x4.9 6x5.7 6x6.5
-860 6x4.9 6x5.7 6x6.5
-900 6x4.9 6x5.7 6x6.5
-1000 6x4.9 6x5.7 6x6.5

NOTE: Although the AC drive will detect a failure in the

brake electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal
overload which will cut off the power at overload is
strongly lecommended.

The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer

and must be specified when the AC drive is ordered.

Emotron AB OI-4428-0 1r3 Options L77

13.9 Serial communication
and fieldbus
Part number Descriptlon

01-3876-04 R5232/485
01-3876-05 Profibus DP

o1-3876-06 DeviceNet

o1-3876-09 Modbus/TCP, Ethernet

For communication with the AC drive there are several Fig. 129 Connection of standby suppb opilon on size B,C and
option boards for communication. There are different E-F
options for Fieldbus communication and one serial commu-
nication option with RS232 or RS485 interface which has
x1
galvanic isolation. Name Function Specification
terminal

External, AC drive
13.9 Standby supply board T Ext. supply 1
main power inde-
24VDc !LO%
pendent, supply
option voltage for control
Double iso-
2 Ext. supply 2 lated
and communica-
Part number Description tion circuits

o1-3954-00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting

The standby supply board option provides the possibility of

keeping the communication system up and running without Connect the
having the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is that power supply
board to the
the system can be set up without mains power. The option two blue
will also give backup for communication failure if mairr terminals
marked
power is lost. A- and B+
The standby supply board option is supplied with external
xlAo/o 24VDcprotected by a 2 A slow acting fuse, from a 0V to A-
double isolated transformer. The terminals Xl: l, Xl :2 (on 24V to B+
size B,C and E to F) are voltage polarity independant.
The terminals A and B (on size D) are voltage polarity
dependent.

Fig. 130 Connection of standby suppb option on size D

Terminal Name Funstion Specification

External, AC drive
A- OV
main power depend-
24 V Dc !!Oo/o
ent, supply voltage for
Double isolated
B+ +24Y control and communi-
cation circuits

L78 Options Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

13.10 Safe Stop option terminal 20 in the example Fig. 133, please refer to section
I 1.5 .4, p^ge 137 15401.
To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with Safe
'S7hen
Torque Off (STO) EN-IEC 62A61 :2005 SIL 2 A EN-ISO the "lnhibit" input is de-activated, the AC drive dis-
17.849-1:2006, the following three parts need to be attended plry will show a flashing "SST" indication in section D
(bottom left corner) and the red Tlip LED on the Control
panel will be flashing.
1. Inhibit trigger signals with safery relay Kl (via Safe Stop
option board). To resume normal operation, the following steps have to be
taken:
2. Enable input and control of AC drive (via normal I/O
control signals of AC drive). o Release "lnhibit" input 24Y96 (High) to terminal 1

and 2.
3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback of
driver circuits and IGBT's).
o Give a STOP signal to the AC drive, according to the set
Run/Stop Control in menu 12151.
To enable the AC drive to operate and run the motor, the
following signals should be active:
o Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/
Stop Control in menu [215].
. "lnhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the
Safe Stop option board should be made active by con-
NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command ls
necting 24YDC to secure the supply voltage for the
dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/
driver circuits of the power conductors via safery relay
Edge t21AI and the use of a separate Stop input via
Kl . See also Fig. 133. digital input.
o High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig.
133, which is set to "Enable". For setting the digital
input please refer to section 1 1.5.2, page 131 .
These two signals need to be combined and used to enable WARNING!
the output o[ the AC drive and make it possible to activate a The safe stop function can never be used for
Safe Stop condition. electrical maintenance. Fot elec'trical
maintenance the AC drive should always be
dlsconnected from the supply voltage.
NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC
62061:2OO5 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-t2OO6, can only be
realized by de-actlvatlng both the "lnhibit" and "Enable"
inputs.

tVhen the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using these

two different methods, which are independently controlled,
this safery circuit ensures that the motor will not start run-
ning because:
. The 24YDC signal is disconnected from the "lnhibit"
input, terminals 1 and 2, the safery relay Kl is switched
of[,
The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power
conductors is switched of[ This will inhibit the trigger
pulses to the power conductors.
. The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down.
The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit
which will forward the information to the P\fM part on
the Control board.
To make sure that the safety relay Kl has been switched off,
this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did
not refuse to act. The Safe Stop option board offers a
feedback signal for this via a second forced switched safery
relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has Fig. I3I Connection rf tnf, stoP option in size B - D.
confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is
shut down. See Thble 36 for the contacts connections.
To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" on
a digital output can be used. For setting a digital output, e.g.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Options L79

 T(tble 36 Spectfication of Saf, Stop option board

x1
Name Function Specificatlon
pin

I lnhibit + lnhibit driver circuits of DC 24V

2 ln h ibit
power conductors (20-30 v)

NO contact
3
relay K2 Feed back; confi rmation 48V Do/
P contact of activated inhibit 30 vAo/2 A
4
relay l\2

5 GND Supply ground

Supply Voltage for oper- +24 VDc,

6 +24 VDC
ating lnhibit input only. 5O mA

Fig 132 Connection of tof, stop option in size E and up.

Safe Stop 1 +5V Power board

4 Voc
W

Enable Digln Controller PWM

Digour

Fig. 133

Options Emotron AB OL-4428-0 1r3

13.L7. Output chokes
Output chokes, which are supplied separately, are recom-
mended for lengths of screened motor cable longer than 100
m. Because of the fast switching of the motor voltage and
the capacitance of the motor cable (both line to line and line
to earth screen), large switching currents can be generated
with long lengths of motor cable. Output chokes prevent the
AC drive from tripping and should be installed as closely as
possible to the AC drive. See also Emotron VF)UFDU 2.0
Product catalogue for filter selection guide.

13.L2 Liquid cooling

AC drive modules in frame sizes E - K and F69 - K69 are
available in a liquid cooled version. These units are designed
for connection to a liquid cooling system, normrlly a heat
exchanger of liquid-liquid or liquid-air rype. Heat exchanger
is not part of the liquid cooling option.
Drive units with parallel power modules (frame size
G - K69) are delivered with a dividing unit for connection of
the cooling liquid. The drive units are equipped with rubber
hoses with leak-proof quick couplings.
The Liquid cooling option is described in a separate manual

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Options 181

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
L4. Technical Data

L4.L Electrical specifications related to model

Thble i7 Typical motor power at mains uoltage 400 V

Normal duty Heavy duty

(LzO%,1 min every 1O min) (LSOo/o,1 min every 1O min)
Max. output
Model Frame size
current [A]*
Power @4OOV Rated current Power @4OOV Rated current
tkwl tAl tkwl tAI

FDU48*OO3 3.O 0.75 2,5 o,55 '2_A

t:

FDU48-OO4 4.8 1.5 4.O 1,_! 3.2

FDU48-006 7,2 2,2 6,0 1.5 4.8

FDU48-008 9.0 3 7.5 2.2 6.0 B

ppu48-010 LL.4 4 3 7,6

FDU48-013 15.6 5.5 13.0 4 ro.4

FDU48-OL8,. 2L.6 7.5 18.O 5.5 L4^4

FDU48-026 31 LL 26 7.5 27

FDU48-031 37 15 5I 11 25
C
FDU48-037 44 18.5 37 15 29.6

FDU48-046 55 22 46 18.5 37

FDU48-061 73 30 61 22 49
D
FDUAB.O74 89 37 74 30 59

FDU48-090 108 45 90 37 72

FDu48-109 131 , 55 109 45 87

E
FDU4B-T46 1-75 75 746 55 LL7

FDu48-175 zLO 90 175 75 r4a

FDU48_2TO 252 1-10 270 90 168

FDU:48-2,28' i"10 228 90 L82 F

FDU48-250 300 !32 250 110 200

,360 160 300 r32 240
G
FDU48-375 450 200 375 160 300
FDU48-430 516 220 430 200 344
H
FDU48-500 600 250 500 220 400
720 315 600 250 480
FDU48-650 780 355 650 315 520

..'900,
400 750 355 600
FDU48-860 LO32 450 860 400 688
)
500 1000 450 800
FDU48-L2OO 1,440 630 L200 500 960
K
1800 ,, 8O0 1500 630 1200

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Technical Data

Tabk 38 Typical rnotor pzwer at mains uoltage 460 V

Normal duty Heavy duty

(M2Oo/o,1 min every 1O min) (15O%, 1, min every 1O min)
Max. output
Model Frame size
current [AJ*
Power @46OV Rated current Power @460V Rated current
thpl tAI thpl tAl

FDU48-OO3 3.0 1 2.5 1, 2,0

FDU48-004 4.8 2 4.O 1-.5 3.2

FDU48-006 7;2 3 6.0 2

FDU48-008 9.0 3 7.5 3 6.0 B

FDU48-010 , Ll""A 5 9.5 3 z6

FDU48-013 15.6 7.5 13.0 5 ro.4
FDU48-O1B 2L.6 10 1g,o 7.5

FDU48-026 31 15 26 10 21

FDU48{31 37 20 31 15 25
C
FDU48-037 44 25 37 20 29.6
FDU48-046 30 46 25 37

FDU4B-061. 73 40 61 30 49
D
FDU48.O74 8g 50 74 40 59
FDU48-090 108 60 90 50 72

F,DU48-109 131 ,75 109 60 87,

E
FDU4B-L46 t75 100 1.46 75 LL7

FDU48-175 270 L25 175 100

FDU48-2LO 252 150 21:O r25 168
FDU48-228 300 200 ,228. 150 F

FDU48-250 300 200 250 150 200

FDU48-300 360 250 300 200 240

G
FDU4B-375 450 300 375 250 300
FDU48-430 51"6 350 430 250 344
H
FDU48-500 600 400 500 350 400
FDU48-600 v2o; 500 600 400
FDU48-650 780 550 650 400 520
FDU48-750 900 600 750 500
FDU4B-B60 LO32 700 860 550 688
)
FDU48-1000 1200 800 1000 650 800
FDU48-1200 1,440 1000 7200 800 960
K
FDU48-1500 1800 L250 1500 1000

* Available during limited time and as long as ailowed by drive temperature.

Technical Data Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

Tabk 39 Typical motor power at mains uoltage 525 V

Normal duty Heavy duty

(fr2Oo/o,1 min every 1O min) (L5O'/o,1 min every 1O min)
Max. output
Model Frame size
current [A]*
Power @525V Rated current Power @525V Rated current
tkwl tAI tkwl tAI

FDU:52-003, ,1,1 ,
2.5 1'1 '2.fr,

FDU52-OO4 4.8 2.2 4.O 1_.5 3.2

FDu52-O06 7,2 ,3, 2.2 4.9

FDU52-008 9.0 4 7.5 3 6.0 B

F:DU52-0tO 5.5 4 7.6

FDU52-013 15.6 7.5 13.O 5.5 70.4

FDUS2-018 21.6 LL 18.0 7.5 14.4

FDU52-026 31 15 26 LL 27

FDU52s3t . 18.5 :

31 15 25
C
FDU52-O37 44 22 37 18.s 29.6

rDU52-046 30 46 22 37

FDU52-061_ 73 37 61 30 49
D
89 45 v4 37 59
FDU69-090 108 55 90 45 72

FDU69-109
,: :,
i 131 75 109 55 87
F69
FDU69-L46 175 90 ]'46 75 7r7
110 L75 90 r40
FDU69-2TO 252 L32 270 110 168

FDU69-250 .. 30O , 160 250 L32 2:O0

H69
FDU69-300 360 200 300 160 240
FDU69:$/$ 4s0 250 375 200 300
FDU69-430 516 s00 430 250 344
r69
$QQ ,, , 315 500 300 400
FDU69-600 720 400 600 315 480
J69
FDU69-650, 780 450 650 355 520
FDU69-750 900 500 750 400 600
560 860 450 688 K69

FDU69-1_000 7200 630 1000 500 800

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.

Emotron AB 07-4428-0 1r3 Technical Data

Tdbk 40 Typical motor prwer at mains uohage 575 V

Normal duty Heavy duty

Max. output (L2OY,,1 min every 1O min) (150%, 1. min every 1O min)
Model Frame size
current [A]*
Power @575V [hp] Rated current [A] Power @575V [hp] Rated current [A]

FDU69-090 r08 75 ,90 60 72

FDU69-109 73r 100 109 75 87
F69
FDU69-L46 t7'5 L25 146 100 T7

FDU69-L75 21]O 150 775 L25 L4A

FDU69-2TO 252 200 2ro 150 168

FDU69-250 300 250 250 200 200
H69
FDU69-300 360 300 300 250 240
FDU69-375 450 350 375 300 300
FDU69-430 516 400 430 350 3;44
r69
FDU69-500 600 500 500 400 400
FDU69-600 724 600 600 500 ,4go .

J69
FDU69-650 780 650 650 550 520
FDU69-750 900 ,
750 750 600 600,,

FDU69_860 LO32 850 860 700 688 K69

FDU69-1000 1200 1000 1000 850 800

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.

T(tbl€ 4l Typical motor power dt mrlins uoltage 690 V

Normal duty Heavy duty

Max. output (L2O'/r,1 min every 1O min) (15O%, 1. min every 1O min)
Model Frame size
current [A]*
Power @690V tkWI Rated current [A] Power @690V [kW Rated current [A]

FDU69-090 90 90 75

FDU69-1-09 131 110 109 90 87

F69
FDU69-L46 175 L32 L46 L30 !f7,"
FDU69-175 270 160 L75 L32 L40
FDU69.2IO 2s2 200 2LO 160
FDU69-250 300 250 250 200 200
H69
FDU69-300 360 315 300 250 240
FDU69-375 450 355 375 315 300
FDU69-430 516 450 430 315 344.
r69
FDU69-500 600 s00 500 355 400
FDU69-600 720 600 600 450
J69
FDU69-650 780 630 650 500 520
FDU69-750 900 710 750 600 600
FDU69-860 ro32 800 860 650 688
K69
FDU69-900 10go 900 900 v70 724,

FDU69-1000 r200 1000 1000 800 800

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.

186 Technical Data Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

L4.2 General electrical specifications
Table 42 General electrical specifications

General

Mains voltage: FDU48 | 23O-480V +LO%/-L5% (-10% at 230 V)

FDU52 | 440-525 V +10 %/-t\'/o
FDU69 I 5OO-690V +LO%/-ts%
Mains frequency: I 45 to 65 Hz
lnput power factor: | 0.95
Output voltage: | 0-Mains supply voltage:
Output frequency: | 0-400 Hz
Output switching frequency: | 3 kHz (adjustable 1,5-6 kHz)
Efficiency at nominal load: ,|97% for models 003 to 018
98% for models 026 to 1500

Control signal inputs:

Ana logue (differentia !)

Ana logue Voltage/cu rre nt: O-t1O V/O-2O mA via switch

Max. input voltage: +30 V/30 mA
lnput impedance: 20 kf, (voltage)
25O C) (current)
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Hardware accuracy: L% lype + 7- t/z LSB fsd
Non-linea rity LVz LSB

Digital:

lnput voltage: I High: >9 VDC, Low: <4 VDC

Max. inputvoltage: | +30 VDC
lnput impedance: I .g.g VDC: 4.7 kQ
I >g.g VDC: 3.6 ko
Signal delay: I <A ,t

Control signal outputs

Analogue

Output voltage/current | 0-10 V/0-20 mA via software setting

Max. output voltage: I +15 V @5 mA cont.
(oo):
Shortrircuit current | +15 mA (voltage), +140 mA (current)
impedance:
Output I 10 fl (voltage)
Resolution: I 10 bit
Maximum load impedance for current I SOO O
accuracy:
Hardware | 1.9% type fsd (voltage), 2.4o/otype fsd (current)
Offset: I 3 LSB
Non-linearity: I 2 LSB
Digital

Output voltage: High: >2o vDc @50 mA, >23 VDC open
Low: <1VDC @5O mA
Shortcircu it cu rrent(oo): 100 mA max (together with +24 VDC)
Relays

Contacts 0.1 - 2 A/Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC

References

+1OVDC +10 Voc @10 mA Short-circuit current +30 mA max

-1OVDC -10 VDC @10 mA
+24YDC +24 Voc Short-circuit current +1OO mA max (together with Digital Outputs)

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Technical Data L87

L4.3 Operation at higher
temperatures
Most Emotron AC drives are made for operation at maxi-
mum of 40'C ambient temperature. However, firr most
models, it is possible to use the AC drive at higher temp era-
tures with little loss in performance. Table 43 shows ambient
temperatures as well as derating for higher temperatures.

Table 43 Ambient temperdtur€ and derating 400-690 V types

lP20 tP54
Model
Max temp. Derating: possible Max temp. Derating: possible

FDU* *_O03 to FDU* *-,Q74 40"c ,C to *rxiX.g"S

: :: r .: ', . ,. . ::: : ,

FDU48-090 to FDU48-250 40"c -2.5%/'C to max +5 " C

FDU69-O9O to FDU69-I75

FDU48-300 to FDU48-1500 40"c :2.5Ya/ "C to max +5,oC 40'c

FDU69 -21o to FDU 69-1000

Example L4.4 Operation at higher

* *"lil'J: ::,l:x trJ: :.Til[:' iffi"21
a'r a'lh a'l
switching freguency
Thble 44 shows the switching frequency for the different AC
Voltage 400 V drive models. \With the possibility of running at higher
Current 68 A switching frequency you can reduce the noise level frorn the
Power 37 k\f motor. The switching frequency is set in menu l22r\),
Select AC drive Motor sound, see section section 11.2.3, page 68. At switch-
ing frequencies >3 kHz derating might be needed.
The ambient temperature is 5 "C higher than the maximum
ambient ternperature. The following calculation is made to Thble 44 Suitchingfrequenry
select the correct AC drive model.

Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5o/ol"C. Standard

Models Switching Range
Derating will be: 5 X2.5a/o - 12.5o/o frequency
Calculation for model FDU48-031 FDU* *-003 to FDU* *_O74 3 kHz T
31 A - (12.5o/o x 31) - 27.1 A; this is not enough.
FDU**_090 to FDU**_1500 3 kHz 1.5-6 kHz
Calculation for model FDU48-037
37 A - (r2.5o/o x 37) - 32.4 A
In this example we select the FDIJ48-037.

188 Technical Data Emotron AB 07-4428-0113

 L4.5 Dimensions and Weights
The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and
weights. The models 003 to 250 is available in IP54 as wall
nrounted modules. The models 300 to 1500 consisr of 2, 3,
4 or 6 paralleled power electonic building block (PEBB)
available in IP20 as wall mounred modules and in Ip54
mounted standard cabinet
Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 stand-
ard.

Tdble 45 Mechanical spectfications, FDU4B, FDU52

Models
Frame Dim.HxWxD[mm] Dim.HxWxD[mm] weight IP2o weight IP54
size tP20 IP54 tksl tksl
Bi 350(416)x2O3 x 2OO L2,.5
026 to 046 C 440(572)xL7Bx292 24
D.. 545(590) x 22O x 295 32
90 to 109 E 950x285x314 56
146 to,t7s E. 950 x,285 x 314 60
zLO to 250 F 950 x 345 x3L4 74
u tO36,x,,50O X 390 225;Qx60Ox6o0 L40 350
430 to 5OO H 1036x500x450 2250 x 600 x 600 L70 380
1036x730x450 225Ox 900 x 600 506
860 to 1-OOO J 1036x1L00x450 2250 x 1200 x 600 340 697
( 1036x1560x450 2250 x 1BO0,x 6OO 496 987

Thble 46 Mechanical specifications, FDU69

Models
Frame Dim.HxWxD[mm] Dim.HxWxD[mm] Weight lP2O Welght lP54
size tP20 tP54 tkel tksl
90:.tO..175 ,, F6g: 1090x345x314 77
27O to 375 H69 1,L76 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 6O0 L76 399
[69 ]

225O x $OO.x 600 257 563

600 to 650 J69 IL76x1100x450 225Ox1200x600 352 773
rli6'x is6o x 4Eo 225Ax18O0x6O0 ,5,14 1100'

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Technical Data

L4.6 Environmental conditions
Thble 47 Operation

Parameter Normal operation

Norni:nal am bient temperature

Atmospheric pressure 86- l-06 kPa

Relative humidity, non-condensing O-907o

Contamination, No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corro-
according to IEC 6072I-3-3 sive materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2.

According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations

t0<f<57,Hz.,0.075 mrn
57<f<150 H2, ;ls
0- 1000 m
Altitude 480VAC drives, with deratingL%/100 m of rated current upto 4000 m
69OV AC drives, with deratingL%/ 100 m of rated current up to 2000 m

Table 4S Storage

Parameter Storage condition

Temperature -20 to +6O, "C

Atmospheric pressure 86- 106 kPa

Relative hum idttlr, ndn-cdndensin g

Technical Data Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

L4.7 Fuses, cable cross- NOTE: The dimensions of fuse and cable cross-section
are dependent on the application and must be
sections and glands determined in accordance with local regulations.

L4.T.LAccording I EC ratings NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in the
[Jse mains fuses of the rype gllgG conforming to IEC 269 models 3OO to 15OO can differ depending on customer
or installation cut-outs with similar characteristics. Check specification.
the equipment first before installing the glands.
Max. Fuse = IrrXimum fuse value that still protects the AC
drive and upholds warranty.

Table 49 Fuses, cable crlss-s€ctions and glands

Nominal Cable glands (clamping range

Maximum Cable cross section conneetor range [mm2] for
input lmml)
Model value fuse
current
tAI
IA] mains/ motor Brake PE mains / motor Brake

FDU* *-003 2.2 M32 opening M25 opening

FDU**-004 3.5 M20 + reducer M20 + reducer
FDU**-006 5.2 (6-12) (6-12) ,,,

,i ,,..
, ,:
t t
'
M32 (L2-2O)/
:FDU**-008 6.9 0.5*to M32 opening
FDU* *-010,, 8,7 M25+reducer : : .: aa:

(10-14) M25 (10-14)

FDU* *:-013: 11.3: t6 M32 (1:6*251/ : ' :::: :

FDg**-018 15.6 '2a M32 (13- 18)

FDU * *-026 22 25
M32 (15-27) M25
FDU * *-031 26 35 2.5 - 16 stranded wire
6-35
FDU * *-037 31 35 2.5 - 25 solid wire
M40 (1e-28) M32
FDU * *-046 3B 50
FDU**,:00t ,ur ,
63 1- -35 stranded wire
M50 (27 - 35) M4O (1e - 2Bl
FDU* *,,-O74 65" 80' 1 - 50 solid wire

FDU* *-090 78 100 FDU48: @tl

16-95 FDU48:477-42
16-95 16-95 (16-70)' 32 Cable flexi-
FDU* *-109 94 100 cable flexible
ble
leadth rough or
FDU * * -L46 L26 1-60 leadth rough or
M50 opening.
M40 opening.
FDU69:423-
FDU69: AL7-
35-1s0 55 Cable flexi-
35 - 150 1-6 - 95 42 Cable flexi-
FDU X*-L75 1^52 160 (16-26;r ble
ble
leadth rough or
leadth rough or
M63 opening.
M50 opening.
:FD:U** 1270 200 FDU48: 35-250 fr23-55 gL7-42 ',,,

FDU48; 35-25O FDU48: 35-1-5O (95-185)1 cable flexible cable flexible

FDU**-228i:i
',2!6 250 FDU69: 35-150 FDU69: 16-95 FDU69: 35-15O leadthrough or leadthrough or
FDU* *-250 :tl
:

(1G7O)r M63 opening. M50 opening.

FDU* *-300 260 300 FDU48: (2x)35-24O

frame
FDU* *-375 324 355 FDU69: (2x)35-150
art., A
,p'p[J:t:*-430 Jt z.
fDU48: (2x)35-240
frame
FDU* * 500 4'32 FDU69: (3x)35-150
ti

FDU * *-600 520 630 FDU48: (3x)35-24O

frame
FDU* *-650 562 630 FDU69: (ax)35-150

Emotron AB AL-4428-01r3 Technical Data 191

Table 49 Fuses, cable crlss-sections and glands

Nominal Cable glands (clamplng range

Maximum Cable cross section connector rangle [mm2] for
input lmml)
Model value fuse
current
tAI mains/ motor
tAI I Brake PE mains / motot Brake

:.1 :
, FDU48: (3x)35-240
648 frame
FDU69: (6x)35-15O

FDU* *-860 744 800

*-900 FDU48: (4x)35-24O
FDU * 795 900 frame
FDU69: (6x)35-150
FDU* *-1000 864 1000

FDU**1200
FDU4'8: (6x)35,-2.4Q frante
FDU**,1500 1500 :

Note: For models 003 to 074 cable glands are optional.

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electrotrics are built in.

L92 Technica! Data Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

L4.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions
according to NEMA ratings
Table 50 Typrt andfuses

Mains input fuses

lnput
Model current
UL Fenaz-Shawmut
[Arms] Class J TD (A) type

6 AJT6

FDU48-004 3,5 6 AJT6

FDU48-006 6 AJT6

FDU48-008 6,9 t-0 AJT]-O

.10 AJTlO

FDU48-013 11,3 15 AJT15

15,6, .
'24 AJT2O

FDU4B_026 22 25 tuT25
.FDU'4&031 ,26 , 30
'I r'.1 : : : '

FDU48-037 31 35 AJT35

FDU48'046 45 ,
AJT45,

FDU48-061 52 60 AJT60

, 80' AJT8O.

FDU48-090 78 100 AJTl.OO

:: :l :

110 AJTlX.O

FDU48-L46 L26 150 AJT15O

L75 AJT175 :

FDU48-zLO !82 200 AJT2OO

250 Al1250
FDU48-250 216 250 AJT250

260 300 AJT3OO

':
FDU48-375 324 3s0 AJT35O

,372 400 AJT4OO

FDU48-500 432 500 AJT5OO

520,
FDU48-650 562 600 AJT600

648 ,:
, A4BQ70O

FDU4B-B60 744 800 A4BQ8O0

864 1000
FDU48-L2OO 1037 L200 A4BQ !2OO

A4BQ15oO

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Technical Data 193

Thble 5I Typ, cables cross-sections and glancls

Cable cross section connector

Mains and motor Brake PE

Model Cable type
Tightening Tightening Tightening
Range torque Range torque Range torque
Nm/ft lbf Nm/ft lbf Nm/ft lbf
FDU48*0'03

FDU48-004

FDU4g-006

FDU4B'OOB Coppef (icu)

AWG 2A - AWG 6 r,s/ 1 AWG 20 - AWG 6 AWG 74 - AWG 6 2.6/2
60"c
FDU48-010

FDU48-013 ,

FDU48-018

FDU48'0,19

FDU48-026 output current

<44A: Copper
FDU48-031
(Cu) 60 " C
AWG L2 - AWG 4 I.3/ L AWG T2 - AWG 4 7.3/ r AWGS-AWG2 2.6/2
FDU48-037 output current
>44A: Copper
FDU48-046 (Cu) 75 " C

FDU4S.O6I AWG 12-AWG 4 L,,6/1.2 AVVG 12-AWG 4 t.6/L.2 AWG 12-AWG 4 L.6IL?
FDU4S-A74 AWG IO.AWG O 2|B/3,O AWG IO.AWG O 2.8/3,O AWG IO-AWG O 2.8/3.O

FDU48-090 AWG4-AWG3/O L4 / 10.5

AWG4-AWG3/O 14 / 10.5 (AWG4-AWG2/O)' (rc / 7.51t
FDU48-109
AWG4-AWG3/O L4 / 10.5
FDU48-746 AWG 1- - AWG 3/O L4 / 10.5 AWG 1- AWG 3/O 74 / 10.5
FDU48-775 AWG 4/O - 300 kcmil 24/ 18 (AWG4-AWG2/O)' (7O / 7.51t
FDU48-2,10
AWG 1-,AWG 3/O AWG 3/O - 400 kcmil
FDU48-228
AWG 3/O -
24I L8 AWG 4/O - 300
r4 / 1O.5
(AWG 4lO - 400 ,
24I t8:
4OO kcrnil
kcmil kcmillt {IO / 7.5}'
FDU48-250 a. .
l.:

'

'::
FDU48-300 2xAWG 4/O- 2xAWG3/O- Copper (Cu)
24/78 24/L8 frame TRon
,v \,,
FDU48-375 2 x 300 kcmil 2 x 4OO kcmil
l

aa a :

FDU48-430 2xAWG 3/0- 2 i AWG 3,/A -

2 x 400 kcmil
24/ L8
2 x 400 kcmil
24/18 frame
FDU48-500

FDU48-600
3xAWG 4/O- 2xAWG3/O-
FDU48-650
3 x 300 kcmil
24/rB 2 x 4OO kcmil
24/78 f rame

FDU48-750

FDU48-860 4 x AWG 4/O- 3xAWG 3/0-

,24;/ LB frame
FDU4B-1000 4 x 300 ,kcm,il 3 X 400 .kcmil

FDU48-L2OO 6xAWG 4/O- 6xAWG3/O-

24/ 18 24/ 18 f rame
FDU4B-1500 6 x 300 kcmil 6 x 4OO kcmil

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built

in.

L94 Technical Data Emotron AB 01-4428-0 1r3

14.8 Control signals
Thble 52

Terminal XI Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type:

:: l

1 +10 v +:tO VDC Supply voltage +1O VDC, max 1O rnA output

0 -10 VDC or O/ 4-20 mA

2 Anlnl Process reference analogue input
bipolar: -1-0 - +10 VDC or -2O - +20 mA

O *tO VDC or O/4;20,,mA

Anln2 analogue input
:
bibolar: -1.0 - +10 VDC or 2O - +20 mI
0 -10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
4 Anln3 off analogue input
bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -2O - +2O mA

Or-10 VDC oir O/4-20 mA

+20 mI analogue input
Ahrh4 Off r.
:

:tl
biRolar: -10 r +10 VDC,or *20 -

6 -10 v -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output

7 Commoh Signal ground OV output
B Digln 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input
Digln 2 RunR, 0-8/24 VDC digital input
10 Digln 3 off 0-8/24 VDC digital input
+,24Y DC Su pply votta ge +24 VDC,,1OO ffiA, output
L2 Common Signal ground OV output
7 Min speed to max speed O *10 VDC or O/4* +ZO,*A analogue 0utput

L4 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 t10 vDC or o/4- +20 mA analogue output

.15 Signal gi0und OV outPut ,

l_6 Digln 4 off 0-8/24 VDC digital input

'1t7 Digln 5 u8124 vDC digitalrinput :.

1B Digln 6 off 0-8/24 VDC digital input

19 :
Digln 7 of,f U8/"4 VDC digital input
20 Digout 1 Ready 24VDC, 100 mA digita I output

Dig0ut 2 No trip 24 VDC, 1OO mA digital ,output

'2L,,
22 Digln 8 RESET o-8/24 VDC digital input

Terminal X2

31.,, ]N/C 1 ,

Tr,ip, afiive wnen tlre

32 COM 1
AC drive is in a TRIP condition
potential free chahge over
N/C is opened when the relay is active relay output
0,1,-, 2 NUmr; 250 VAC ar 47 VDC
(valid for all rehy$) :

B3
aa'
N/O is closed when the relay is active
:a

4t N/C 2
Relay 2 Output
potential free change over
Run, active when the relay output
0.1 - 2 A/Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC
AC drive is started
43 N/O 2

Terminal X3

potential free change over

relay output
52 N/O 3 0,1 - 2 A/Um.x 250 VAC or 42 VDC

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Technical Data 19s

Technical Data Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
15. Menu List DEFAULT CUSTOM

250 Autoreset
251, No of Trips o
DEFAULT CUSTOM 252 Overtemp off
1-OO Preferred View 253 Overvolt D off
110 1st Line Process Val 254 Overvolt G off
t20 2nd Line Current 255 Overvolt off
200 Main Setup 256 Motor Lost off
2LO Operation 257 Locked Rotor off
2tL Language English 258 Power Fault off
2L2 Select Motor M1 259 Undervoltage off
273 Drive Mode V/Hz 254 Motor lzt off
2L4 Ref Control Remote 258 Motor l2t TI Trip

2L5 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 25C PTlOO off

2L6 Reset Ctrl Remote 25D PT1OO TT Trip

277 Local/Rem 25E PTC off

2L7L LocRefCtrl Standard 25F PTC TT Trip

2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 25G Ext Trip off

2L8 Lock Code? o 25H Ext Trip TT Trip

2L9 Rotation R+L 25|, Com Error off

2tA Level/Edge Level 25) Com Error TT Trip

2LB Supply Volts Not Defined 25K Min Alarm off

220 Motor Data 25L Min Alarm TT Trip

227 Motor Volts Uruou v 25M Max Alarm off

222 Motor Freq 50Hz 25N Max Alarm TT Trip

223 Motor Power (Pruort,r) w 250 Over curr F off

224 Motor Curr (lrvror) A 25P Pump off
225 Motor Speed (nye1) rpm 25Q Over speed off
226 Motor Poles 4 25R Ext Mot Temp off
227 Motor Coscp Cosgp6y 255 Ext Mot TT Trip

228 Motor Vent Self 257 LC Level off

229 Motor lD-Run off 25U LC Level TT Trip

224 Motor Sound F 25V Brk Fault off

22B. Encoder off 260 Serial Com
22C Enc Pulses LO24 267 Com Type RS.232/485
22D Enc Speed Orpm 262 R5232/485
22E Motor PWM 2627 Baudrate 9600
22E7 PWM Fswitch 3.00 kHz 2622 Address L

22E2 PWM Mode Standard 263 Fieldbus

22E3 PWM Random off 263L Address 62

22F Enc Puls Ctr o 2632 PrData Mode Basic

230 Mot Protect 2633 Read/Write RW

231" Mot lzt Type Trip 2634 AddPrValue o

232 Mot l2t Curr LOOo/, 264 Comm Fault
233 Mot l2t Time 6Os 2641r ComFlt Mode off
234 Thermal Prot off 2642 ComFIt Time O.5 s

235 Motor Class F 140"C 265 Ethernet

236 PT1OO lnputs PT1OO 1,+2+3 2657 lP Address 0.o.0.0
237 Motor PTC off 2652 MAC Address

240 Set Handling 2653 Subnet Mask o.o.o.0

241" Select Set A 2654 Gateway o.o.o.0
242 Copy Set A>B 2655 DHCP off
243 Default>Set A 266 FB Signal

244 Copy to CP No Copy 2667 FB Signal 1 o

245 Load from CP No Copy 2662 FB Signal 2 0

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Menu List

 DEEAULI CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM
2663 FB Signal 3 0 350 Torques

2664 FB Signal 4 o 351 Max Torque L2Ao/o

2665 FB Signal 5 o 352 lxR Comp off

2666 FB Signal 6 o 353 lxR CompUsr Oo/o

2667 FB Signal 7 o 354 Flux optim off

2668 FB Signal 8 o 355 Max Power off
2669 FB Signal 9 o 360 Preset Ref
266A FB Signal 1O o 361 Motor Pot Non Volatile

2668 FB Signal 11 o 362 Preset Ref 1 O rpm

266C FB Signal 12 o 363 Preset Ref 2 25O rpm

266D FB Signal 13 o 364 Preset Ref 3 5OO rpm

266E FB Signal 14 o 365 Preset Ref 4 750 rpm

266F FB Signa 15 o 366 Preset Ref 5 10OO rpm

266G FB Signal 16 o 367 Preset Ref 6 125O rpm

269 FB Status 368 Preset Ref 7 15OO rpm

300 Process 369 Keyb Ref Mot Pot

310 Set/View ref Orpm 380 ProcCtrlPlD

320 Proc Setting 381 PID Control off

32! Proc Source Speed 383 PID P Gain 1.0
322 Proc Unit rpm 384 PID I Time 1.00s
323 User Unit o 385 PID D fime O.OOs

324 Process Min o 386 PID< M inSpd off

325 Process Max o 387 PID Act Marg 0
326 Ratio Linear 388 PID Stdy Tst off
327 F(Val) PrMin Min 389 PID Stdy Mar 0
328 F(Val) PrMax Max 390 Pump/ an Ctrl
330 Start/Stop 391 Pump enable off
331 Acc Time 1O.OOs 392 No of Drives 2

332 Dec Time 1O.OOs 393 Select Drive Sequence

333 Acc MotPot 16.OOs 394 Change Cond Both

334 Dec MotPot 16.00s 395 Change Timer 50h

335 Acc>Min Spd 1O.OOs 396 Drives on Ch o
336 Dec< Min Spd 10.OOs 397 Upper Band to%
337 Acc Rmp Linear 398 Lower Band LOo/o

338 Dec Rmp Linear 399 Start Delay Os

339 Start Mode Fast 39A Stop Delay Os

33A Spinstart off 398 Upp Band Lim OYo

338 Stop Mode Decel 39C Low Band Lim OYo

33C Brk Release O.OOs 39D Settle Start Os

33D Release Spd 0rpm 39E TransS Start 600/,

33E Brk Engage O.OOs 39F Settle Stop Os

33F Brk Wait 0.OOs 39G TransS Stop 60%

33c Vector Brake off 39H Run Time 1 OO:OO:OO

33H Brk Fault 1.00s 39H1 Rst Run Tm1 No

33t Release Torque Oo/o 39t Run Time 2 O0:OO:OO

340 Speed 39t1 Rst Run Tm2 No

34t Min Speed 0rpm 39J Run Time 3 OO:OO:OO

342 Stp< MinSpd off 39J 1 Rst Run Tm3 No

343 Max Speed Sync Speed 39K Run Time 4 O0:OO:OO

344 SkipSpd 1 Lo Orpm 39K1 Rst Run Tm4 No

345 SkipSpd 1Hi 0rpm 391 Run Timeo5 O0:O0:O0

346 SkipSpd 2 Lo Orpm 3911 Rst Run TmS No

347 SkipSpd 2 Hi Orpm 39M Run Time 6 OO:00:00

348 Jog Speed 50rpm 39M 1 Rst Run Tm6 No

Menu List Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3

 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEEAULT CUSTOM

39N Pump L23456 500 I/Os

39P No of Backup o 510 An lnputs

400 Monitor/Prot 511 Anlnl Fc Process Ref

4to Load Monitor 5L2 Anlnl Setup 4-2OmA

41,L Alarm Select off 513 Anlnl Advn

4L2 Alarm trip off 5131 Anlnl Min 4mA

4L3 Ramp Alarm off Anlnl

10.OOV/
5L32 Max
20.OOmA
4L4 Start Delay 2s
10.OOV/
475 Load Type Basic 5133 Anlnl Bipol
2O.O0mA
4L6 Max Alarm 5134 Anlnl FcMin Min
4L67 MaxAlarmMar t5o/o
Anlnl 0
5135 ValMin
4L62 MaxAlarmDel O.ls 5136 Anlnl FcMax Max
4L7 Max Pre alarm 5L37 Anlnl ValMax o
4L7L MaxPreAlMar LOo/o
5138 Anlnl Oper Add+
4L72 MaxPreAlDel O.1s
5139 Anlnl Filt O.1s
4L8 Min Pre Alarm 513A Anlnl Enabl On
4L8I MinPreAlMar tAo/o
5L4 Anln2 Fc off
4182 MinPreAlDel O.1s
515 Anln2 Setup 4-2OmA
41-9 Min Alarm Anln2 Advan
516
4L9! MinAlarmMar t5o/o
5161 Anln2 Min 4mA
4192 M nAlarmDel O.1s
5t62 An n2 Max 2O.OOmA
41"4 Autoset Alrm No An n2 Bipol
5163 2O.OOmA
4LB Normal Load lOOo/o
5164 An n2 FcMin Min
4tc Load Curve 5165 An n2 ValMin o
ALC! Load Curve 1 too% 5166 Anln2 FcMax Max
4tc2 Load Curve 2 100% 5167 Anln2 ValMax o
41C3 Load Curve 3 LOO%
5168 Anln2 Oper Add+
Atc4 Load Curve 4 l0Oo/o
5169 Anln2 Filt O.1s
4tc5 Load Curve 5 tOOo/o
516A An n2 Enabl On
41C6 Load Curve 6 100%
5L7 An n3 Fc off
4tc7 Load Curve 7 LOOo/o
518 An n3 Setup 4-2OmA
41C8 Load Curve 8 700% 519 An n3 Advan
4LC9 Load Curve 9 lOOo/o
4mA
5191 An n3 Min
420 Process Prot 5L92 An n3 Max 2O.O0mA
42! Low Volt OR On
5193 An n3 Bipol 2O.O0mA
422 Rotor Locked off 5194 An n3 FcMin Min
423 Motor lost off 5195 An n3 ValMin o
424 Overvolt Ctrl On
5196 An n3 FcMax Max

5L97 An n3 ValMax o
5198 An n3 Oper Add+

5199 An n3 Filt O.1s

519A An n3 Enabl On

51A An n4 Fc off
51B An n4 Setup 4-2OmA

51C An n4 Advan

51C1 An n4 Min 4mA

5LC2 An n4 Max 2O.0OmA

51C3 Anln4 Bipol 2O.OOmA

51C4 Anln4 FcMin Min

51C5 Anln4 ValMin o

51C6 Anln4 FcMax Max

57C7 Anln4 ValMax o

51C8 Anln4 Oper Add+

51C9 Anln4 Filt O.1s

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Menu List 199

 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM
51CA Anln4 Enabl On 558 B(oard)3 Relay 2 off
520 Dig lnputs 55C B(oard)3 Relay 3 off
527 Digln 1 RunL 55D Relay Adv

522 Digln 2 RunR 55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O

523 Digln 3 off 55D2 Relay 2 Mode N.O

524 Digln 4 off 55D3 Relay 3 Mode N.O

525 Digln 5 off 55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O

526 Digln 6 off 55D5 B1R2 Mode N.O

527 Digln 7 off 55D6 B1R3 Mode N.O

528 Digln 8 Reset 55D7 B2R1 Mode N.O

529 B(oard)l Digln 1 off 55D8 B2R2 Mode N.O

524 B(oard)1 Digln 2 off 55D9 82R3 Mode N.O

528 B(oard)1 Digln 3 off 55DA B3R1 Mode N.O

52C B(oard)2 Digln 1 off 55DB B3R2 Mode N.O

52D B(oard)2 Digln 2 off 55DC B3R3 Mode N.O

52E B(oard)2 Digln 3 off 560 Virtual l/Os

52F B(oard)3 Digln 1 off 561 VIO 1 Dest off
52G B(oard)3 Digln 2 off 562 VIO l Source off
52H B(oard)3 Digln 3 off 563 VIO 2 Dest off
530 An Outputs 564 VIO 2 Source off
531 Anoutl Fc Speed 565 VIO 3 Dest off
532 An0utl Setup 4-2OmA 566 VIO 3 Source off
533 Anoutl Adv 567 VIO 4 Dest off
5331 Anout 1 Min 4mA 568 VIO 4 Source off
5332 Anout 1 Max 2O.OmA 569 VIO 5 Dest off
5333 AnOutlBipol -10.00-10.00 v 56A VIO 5 Source off
5334 Anoutl FcMin Min 568 VIO 6 Dest off
5335 Anoutl VlMin o 56C VIO 6 Source off
5336 Anoutl FcMax Max 56D VIO 7 Dest off
5337 Anoutl VlMax o 56E VIO 7 Source off
534 Anout2 FC Torque 56F VIO 8 Dest off
535 An0ut2 Setup 4-2OmA 56G VIO 8 Source off
536 An0ut2 Advan 600 Logical6 Timers

5361 Anout 2 Min 4mA 610 Comparators

5362 An0ut 2 Max 2O.OmA 611 CA1 Setup

5363 AnOut2Bipol -10.00-10.00 v 6111 CA1 Value Speed

5364 Anout2 FcMin Min 6Lt2 CA1 Level Hl 30Orpm

5365 AnOut2 VlMin o 6113 CA1 Level LO 20Orpm

5366 Anout2 FcMax Max 6t74 CA1 Type Hysteresis

5367 Anout2 VlMax o 6115 CA1 Bipolar Unipolar

540 Dig Outputs 6L2 CA2 Setup

54r Digout 1 Ready 672L CA2 Value Torque

542 Digout 2 Brake 61'22 CA2 Level Hl 20%

550 Relays 6t23 CA2 Level LO tjo/o

551 Relay 1 Trip 6L24 CA2 lype Hysteresis

552 Relay 2 Run 6L25 CA2 Bipolar Unipolar

553 Relay 3 off 613 CA3 Setup

554 B(oard 1 Relay 1 off 6131 CA3 Value Process Val

555 B(oard 1 Relay 2 off 6132 CA3 Level Hl 3Oorpm

556 B(oard 1 Relay 3 off 6133 CA3 Level LO 200rpm

557 B(oard 2 Relay 1 off 6134 CA3 Type Hysteresis

558 B(oard 2 Relay 2 off 6135 CA3 Bipolar Unipolar

559 B(oard 2 Relay 3 off 614 CA4 Setup

55A B(oard 3 Relay 1 off 6147 CA4 Value Process Err

Menu List Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3

 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM

6L42 CA4 Level Hl 1OO rpm 726 Anln Status 3-4

6143 CA4 Level LO - 1OO rpm 727 Anout Status 1-2

6t44 CA4 Type Window 728 lO Status 81

6145 CA4 Bipolar Bipolar 729 lO Status 82

615 CD Setup 724 lO Status 83

6151 CD1 Run 730 Stored Val

6752 cDz Digln 1 73L Run Time OO:O0:0O

6153 cD3 Trip 73Lt Reset RunTm No

6154 CD4 Ready 732 Mains Time OO:O0:00

620 Logic Output Y 733 Energy kwh

627 Y Comp 1 CA1 7331 Rst Enerry |

*o
622 Y Operator 1 & 800 View Tri Log

623 Y Comp 2 tA2 810 Trip Message

624 Y Operator 2 & 811 Process Value

625 Y Comp 3 CD1 8t2 Speed

630 Logic Z 813 Torque

631 Z Comp 1 CA1 8t4 Shaft Power

632 Z Operator 1 & 815 Electrical Power

633 Z Qomp2 tA2 816 Current

634 Z Operator 2 & 8L7 Output voltage

635 Z Comp 3 CD1 818 Frequency

640 Timerl 819 DC Link voltage

64L Timerl Trig off 81A Heatsink Tmp

642 Timerl Mode off 818 PT100_1, 2,3

643 Timerl Delay O:00:OO 81C AC drive Status

644 Timer 1 T1 O:OO:OO 81D Digln status

645 Timerl T2 O:OO:OO 81E Digout status

649 Timerl Value O:00:OO 81F Anln status 1 2

650 Timer2 81G Anln status 3 4

651 Timer2 Trig off 81H Anout status 1 2

652 Timer2 Mode off 811 lO Status 81

653 Timer2 Delay O:OO:OO 8U lO Status 82

654 Timer 2 Tt O:OO:OO 81K lO Status 83

655 Timer2T2 O:00:OO 811 Run Time

659 Tmer2 Value O:OO:OO 81M Mains Time

700 Opey'Status 81N Enerry

7LO Operation 820 Trip Message

71,L Process Val 821, Process Value

7L2 Speed 822 Speed

773 Torque 823 Torque

714 Shaft Power a24 Shaft Power

7L5 Electrical Power 825 Electrical Power

776 Current 826 Current

717 Output volt 827 Output voltage

7L8 Frequency 828 Frequency

7L9 DC Voltage 829 DC Link voltage

7tA Heatsink Tmp 82A Heatsink Tmp

7LB PT100 t 23 82B, PT100_1,2,3

720 Status 82C AC drive Status

72L AC drive Status 82D Digln status

722 Warning 82E Digout status

723 Digln Status a2F Anln status 12

724 Digout Status 82G Anln status 3 4

725 Anln Status 1-2 82H Anout status 1 2

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3 Menu List

 DEEAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM
82t lO Status 81 850
82J lO Status 82 851 Process Value

82K lO Status 83 852 Speed

821 Run Time 853 Torque

82M Mains Time 854 Shaft Power

82N Energy 855 Electrical Power
830 856 Current

831 Process Value 857 Output voltage

832 Speed 858 Frequency

833 Torque 859 DC Link voltage

834 Shaft Power 85A Heatsink Tmp

835 Electrical Power 858 PT100_1, 2,3
836 Current 85C AC drive Status

837 Output voltage 85D Digln status

838 Frequency 85E DigOut status

839 DC Link voltage 85F Anln 12

83A Heatsink Temperature 85G Anln 3 4

838 PT100_1, 2,3 85H Anlout 1 2

83C AC drive Status 85r lO Status 81
83D Digln status 85J lO Status 82

83E Digout status 85K lO Status 83

83F Anln status 1 2 851 Run Time

83G Aln status 3 4 85M Mains Time

83H Anout status 1 2 85N Energr

83r lO Status 81 860

83J lO Status 82 861 Process Value

83K lO Status 83 862 Speed

831 Run Time 863 Torque

83M Mains Time 864 Shaft Power

83N Energy 865 Electrica! Power
840 866 Current

841, Process Value 867 Output voltage

842 Speed 868 Frequency

843 Torque 869 DC Link voltage

844 Shaft Power 86A Heatsink Tmp

845 Electrical Power 868 PT]"OO_1, 2,3
846 Current 86C AC drive Status

847 Output voltage 86D Digln status

848 Frequency 86E Dig0ut status

849 DC Link voltage 86F Anln 12
84A Heatsink fmp 86G Anln 3 4
848 PT100_1,2, 3 86H Anout 1 2
84C AC drive Status 86! lO Status B1

84D Digln status 86J lO Status B 2

84E Dig0ut status 86K lO Status 83

84F Anln status 1 2 861 Run Time

84G Anln status 3 4 86M Mains Time

84H AnOut status 1 2 86N Enerry

84r lO Status 81 870
84J lO Status 82 871 Process Value

84K lO Status 83 872 Speed

841 Run Time 873 Torque

84M Mains Time 874 Shaft Power
84N Energy 875 Electrical Power

Menu List Emotron AB 07-4428-0 1r3

 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM

876 Current 89C AC drive Status

877 Output voltage 89D Digln status

878 Frequency 89E Digout status

879 DC Link voltage 89F Anln status 12

87A Heatsink Tmpe 89G Anln status 3 4

878 PT100_1,2,3 89H AnOut status 1 2

87C AC drive Status 891 lO Status 81

87D Digln status 89J lO Status 82

87E DigOut status 89K lO Status 83

87F Anln status 12 891 Run Time

87G Anln status 3 4 89M Mains Time

87H Anout status 1 2 89N Energr

871 lO Status 81 8A0 Reset Trip |

*o
87) lO Status 82 900 System Data

87K lO Status 83 920 AC drive Data

871 Run Time 927 AC drive Type

87M Mains Time 922 Software

87N Energy 923 Unit name I

O

880
881 Process Value

882 Speed

818 Torque

884 Shaft Power

885 Electrical Power

886 Current
887 Output voltage
888 Frequency

889 DC Link voltage

88A Heatsink Tmp

888 PT100_1,2,3
88C AC drive Status

88D Digln status

88E Digout status

88F Anln status L 2

88G Anln status 3 4

88H Anout status 1 2

881 lO Status 81

88J lO Status 82

88K lO Status 83

881 Run Time

88M Mains Time

88N Energy

890
891 Process Value

892 Speed

893 Torque

894 Shaft Power

895 Electrical Power
896 Current
897 Output voltage
898 Frequency

899 DC Link voltage

89A Heatsink Tmp

898 PT100_1,2,3

Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3 Menu List

Menu List Emotron AB OI-4428-01r3
 Control Panel memory ...40 Fans ...........ll2
Copy all settings ro Control Feedback 'Starus' input .r.... ..43
Panel ...... .....79 Fieldbus ... 88, 178
..
Frequency...... .I25 Fixed MASTER . ....47, ll2
Control signal connections ............ ...26 Flux optimization .. 106
Control signals ...... ...... ...24,27 Frequency
Edge-controlled 3g, 68 Freque ncy prioriry ...... .. 35
Level-controlled 39, 68 JogFrequency ...... 105
Counter-clockwise rotary field .l3l Maximum Frequency ...... . 103
ctrical ............ ...... .........158 Minimum Frequency . 103
Current ... ...... ...... .....24 Preset Frequency,........o.......... I 08
Current conrrol (0-20mA) ...... ...28 Skip Frequency ...... ...... .... 104
Freque nq priority o......... o...... o.... .. .., 36
D Fuses, cable cross-sections and
voltage
DC-link residual ........2 glands ...... .. I 9 I
Deceleration...... ...... ,......96
Decelerarion time ...96 G
Ramp rype ......,.......98 General electrical specifications ..... 187
Declaration of Conformiry ............ .....7 Global paramerers ...... ...... ... 77
Dgfault.... ....,....... ..r...,,,.,78
Deftnitions ...... .....8 H
Derating ... ...... ..188 Hydrophore controller
Digital compararors ...... l4l
Digital inputs
Board Relay ....139
Digln 1 ... ...... ...... .. 131
Digln 2 ...... .....132
DigIn 3 ............ ...... .....133
Dismantling and scrapping ............ ....7
Display ...53
Double-ended connection ...... ....27
Drive mode ..65
Frequency .lZ5
Drives on Change ...... ..1 13

E
ECp ...........a ,......o.... .....175 J
Edge control ...... .......39,68
Electrical specification Jog Frequency 105
..187
EMC ............ ............ ......16
Currenr conrrol Q-20mA) ..28
Double-ended connection ...... ...27
RFI mains filter .......16
Single-ended connection ...... .....27
Twisted cables ... ......28
Emergency srop ..5 1

8N602 04-l .................. ....7

EN61g00-3 ...... ............ ....7
EN61800-5- I ......7
Enable ............ ..37, 54, l3l
EXOR operaror ... ...151
Expression . 151
External Control Panel .... ...175

F
Factory settings ...... .......,............78
Fail safe ...... ..44

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
205
L
LCD display .--...53
Level control 39, 68
Load default ....-..78
Load monitor .... .....4A, 1 18
Local/Remote ....67
Lock code ....67
Long motor cables ... 18
Low Voltage Directive ...... ...--7
Lower Band ............ ...........114
Lower Band Limit .. 1 15

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
 (7zq "rc2
(727) ...... ..162
(728-72A) ...... ...... 163
(7to) .. 163
(7tr) ... .-... 163
(7311).................. ...... 163
(7121 ...... .. 164
(733) ...... ...... ...... ..164
(7331) ...... ...... 164
(Boo) .. t65
(810) .. 165
(811-81N) ...... t65
(820) .. 166
(830) .. 166
(8A0) . t66
(eool .. t67
(ezo1 -. 167
(9221 ...... ..167
33F .......... 101
616 .... t47
Minimum Frequency ....97
Monitor function
Alarm Select ... 122
Delay time ..... 1 19
Max Alarm ..... I 18
Overload ..40, I 18
delay
Response ...l2O, 122
Start delay I 19
Motorcables ...... 16
Motor cos phi (power factor) ...... .....70
Motor dara ..69
Motor frequenry .....70
Motor I2t Currenr . l7l
Motor identification run .....71
Motor Lost .. 8l
Motor lost ...... .124
Motor Potentiometer ...... 107, l3l
Motor potentiomerer ... I 3 1
Motor ventilation ....71
Motors ...... ....5
Motors inparallel ....21
MotPot ................ ..........96
Multi-motor application ......65

N
Nominal motor frequency . 103
Number of drives ...... .. ll2
o
Operation . ...64
Options ... ..28, 175
Brake chopper 17 6
External Control Panel (ECP) 175
I/O Board ....., 177
Output coils ...... ... 178
Protection class IP23 and
rP54 ...175
Serial communicarion,
fieldbus 178
OR operator 151

Emotron AB 07-4428-0113
207
output coils ....178 Running motor
Output Voltage .....159
Overload. ...40,118 S
Overload alarm ..40 Select Drive ll2
Settle Time 1 16
P Setup menu ..56
Parameter sets ......
Menu structure .-.....56
Load default values -.-.-..78 Shaft power 158
Load parameter sets from Signal ground ...195
Panel
Control --.79 Sirrgle-ended connection .-...-27
Parameter Set Selection ......35 Sofrware .....167
Select a Parameter set . ...77 Sound characteristic ....-..72
PID control ..-....45 Speed .........158
PID Controller l0g Spinstart........ .....98
Closed loop PID control ... 109 Standards ... ....6

Feedback signal .. 109 Start Delay .ll4

PID D Time 109 Start/Stop settings ....95
PID I Time ....109 Status indications ...-.53
PID P Gain .... 109 Stop categories ...... ...51
PowerLED '..... ..54 Stop command . ......131
Priority ..36
Process Protection . .123
Process Value ... 158 if,ffiF:ili ::::: ::::::: ::: :\1
Product standard, EMC ......-..6 Switching frequency --.-..-72

Programming ...-.57 Switching in motor cables . .. - 1 8

Protection class IP23 and lP54 175

PT100 Inputs ..-.76 T
PTC input ...75 Technical Data ... ....193
Pump size ....47 Terminal connections ....24
Pump/Fan Control ... ...112 Test Run ......7 |
Timer ...1 13

a Torque ...... .I05

Quick Setup Card Transition Frequency ... 1I 6

Trip .......54
R Trip causes and remidial action 170
Reference
Trip Message log ....165
Frequency .123 Trips, warnings and limits --169

Motor potentiometer .. 131 Twisted cables ... -.....-28

Reflerence signal .... ..65,91 Typ. code number ...-.5

Set reference value .. 9l

U
Torque .....124
View reference value .... 9
. 1 Underload ....40
Reference control ..---65 Underload alarm -...1 18

Reference signal ... ....65,66 Unlock Code .....67

Relay output ....139 Upper Band ...... ....i....--ll4
Relay 1 .. .-.139 Menu (397) ....1r4
Relay 2 -..-.139 Upper Band Limit ..1 15
Relay 3 ...... ....-139
Release speed ... 0 1 1 V
Remote control ..37 Mode
Y l}lz -......65
Reset command ..... 131 Brake
Vector .... 1 0 I
Reset control .....-66 Ventilation .-7 |
Resolution -.63
. View reference value .. . . ...9 1

RFI mains filter ......- 16 Voltage ... ...--.24

Rotation .-....67 vsD Data ..t67

RUN .....54 W
Run command . ..54 \Wiring
Run Left command . ""' 131
Run Right command ... 131

Emotron AB OL-4428-01r3
 o
cr)
I
sl
o
rl
a

rl
o
N
cr)
rl
o I
00
N
$
Emotron AB, Miirsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsin$bor$, Sweden $
sl
Tel: +46 42LG 99 00, Fax: +46 42LG 99 49 o
m
E-mail: info@emotron.se
wulflw.emotron.com o
o
E
LrJ